CCDD Users Guide

User Manual:

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 314

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

JSC-37494

Core Flight System
Command and Data Dictionary Utility
User’s Guide
Engineering Directorate
Software, Robotics, and Simulation Division

Version 1.4.14
August 2018

National Aeronautics and Space Administration
Lyndon B. Johnson Space Center
Houston, Texas 77058-3696

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 2 of 314

Contents
1.0
Description ........................................................................................................................................ 6
2.0
Requirements .................................................................................................................................... 7
3.0
Installation ........................................................................................................................................ 7
4.0
Operation .......................................................................................................................................... 8
4.1
Getting Started.............................................................................................................................. 8
4.2
Database ..................................................................................................................................... 19
4.2.1
Setup ................................................................................................................................... 19
4.2.2
Authentication .................................................................................................................... 19
4.2.3
Roles .................................................................................................................................... 20
4.2.4
Connection recovery ........................................................................................................... 20
4.2.5
Project access control ......................................................................................................... 20
4.3
Event Log ..................................................................................................................................... 20
4.4
Mouse and Keyboard Navigation................................................................................................ 22
4.5
Data Tables.................................................................................................................................. 23
4.5.1
Table types .......................................................................................................................... 23
4.5.2
Table groups........................................................................................................................ 27
4.5.3
Table tree ............................................................................................................................ 28
4.5.4
Data types ........................................................................................................................... 30
4.5.5
Bit fields............................................................................................................................... 31
4.5.6
Enumerations ...................................................................................................................... 32
4.5.7
Macros ................................................................................................................................ 32
4.6
Data Fields ................................................................................................................................... 33
4.6.1
Data field editor .................................................................................................................. 34
4.7
Input Types.................................................................................................................................. 36
4.8
Data Streams ............................................................................................................................... 40
4.9
Command Menu ......................................................................................................................... 40
4.9.1
File ....................................................................................................................................... 40
4.9.2
Project ................................................................................................................................. 58
4.9.3
Data ..................................................................................................................................... 69
4.9.4
Scheduling ......................................................................................................................... 118
4.9.5
Script ................................................................................................................................. 131
4.9.6
Help ................................................................................................................................... 139
4.10 Scripts ........................................................................................................................................ 140
4.10.1 JavaScript .......................................................................................................................... 141
4.10.2 Python ............................................................................................................................... 142
4.10.3 Ruby .................................................................................................................................. 143
4.10.4 Groovy ............................................................................................................................... 144
4.10.5 Scala .................................................................................................................................. 145
4.10.6 Command line execution .................................................................................................. 145
4.10.7 XTCE export ....................................................................................................................... 146
4.10.8 Data access methods ........................................................................................................ 157
Appendix A. Acronyms .......................................................................................................................... 222
Appendix B. Definitions ......................................................................................................................... 223
Appendix C. Import and Export Format ................................................................................................ 225
Appendix C.1. CSV ............................................................................................................................ 230
Appendix C.2. EDS ............................................................................................................................ 234
Appendix C.3. JSON .......................................................................................................................... 240
Appendix C.4. XTCE .......................................................................................................................... 253
2

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 3 of 314

Appendix D. Error & Warning Messages ............................................................................................... 261
Appendix E. Program Notes .................................................................................................................. 288
Appendix E.1. Key reference ............................................................................................................ 288
Appendix E.2. Program preferences ................................................................................................ 289
Appendix E.3. CCDD class files ......................................................................................................... 295
Appendix E.4. PostgreSQL tables ..................................................................................................... 301
Appendix E.5. PostgreSQL Functions ............................................................................................... 308
Appendix E.6. Known Issues ............................................................................................................. 313

Figures
Figure 1.
Figure 2.
Figure 3.
Figure 4.
Figure 5.
Figure 6.
Figure 7.
Figure 8.
Figure 9.
Figure 10.
Figure 11.
Figure 12.
Figure 13.
Figure 14.
Figure 15.
Figure 16.
Figure 17.
Figure 18.
Figure 19.
Figure 20.
Figure 21.
Figure 22.
Figure 23.
Figure 24.
Figure 25.
Figure 26.
Figure 27.
Figure 28.
Figure 29.
Figure 30.
Figure 31.
Figure 32.
Figure 33.
Figure 34.
Figure 35.
Figure 36.
Figure 37.
Figure 38.
Figure 39.

CCDD inputs and outputs .......................................................................................................... 6
CCDD main window................................................................................................................. 19
Example array display ............................................................................................................. 25
Example dialog ........................................................................................................................ 26
Table tree ................................................................................................................................ 28
Table tree expansion ............................................................................................................... 28
Data field editor ...................................................................................................................... 34
Select User dialog (no server connection) .............................................................................. 41
Select User dialog (server connected) .................................................................................... 41
Database server dialog........................................................................................................ 42
Search event log dialog ....................................................................................................... 43
Web Server dialog ............................................................................................................... 52
Preferences dialog; look and feel preferences ................................................................... 52
Example look and feel differences ...................................................................................... 53
Font preferences ................................................................................................................. 53
Font selection dialog ........................................................................................................... 54
Color preferences................................................................................................................ 54
Color selection dialog .......................................................................................................... 55
Size preferences .................................................................................................................. 55
Spacing preferences ............................................................................................................ 56
Path preferences ................................................................................................................. 57
Other settings...................................................................................................................... 58
Select Project dialog ............................................................................................................ 59
Create Project dialog ........................................................................................................... 60
Rename Project dialog ........................................................................................................ 61
Copy Project dialog ............................................................................................................. 62
Delete Project dialog ........................................................................................................... 63
Backup Project dialog.......................................................................................................... 63
Unlock Project(s) dialog ...................................................................................................... 65
Verification and termination dialog .................................................................................... 66
Example Perform Corrections dialog .................................................................................. 67
Manage User Access Level dialog ....................................................................................... 67
New Table dialog................................................................................................................. 69
Edit Table dialog .................................................................................................................. 70
Example table editor ........................................................................................................... 70
Import data and fields into an existing table dialog ........................................................... 73
Data table search dialog...................................................................................................... 74
Example of macro name display and pop-up dialog in a data table ................................... 76
Special indicator flag example ............................................................................................ 77
3

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Figure 40.
Figure 41.
Figure 42.
Figure 43.
Figure 44.
Figure 45.
Figure 46.
Figure 47.
Figure 48.
Figure 49.
Figure 50.
Figure 51.
Figure 52.
Figure 53.
Figure 54.
Figure 55.
Figure 56.
Figure 57.
Figure 58.
Figure 59.
Figure 60.
Figure 61.
Figure 62.
Figure 63.
Figure 64.
Figure 65.
Figure 66.
Figure 67.
Figure 68.
Figure 69.
Figure 70.
Figure 71.
Figure 72.
Figure 73.
Figure 74.
Figure 75.
Figure 76.
Figure 77.
Figure 78.
Figure 79.
Figure 80.
Figure 81.
Figure 82.
Figure 83.
Figure 84.
Figure 85.
Figure 86.
Figure 87.
Figure 88.
Figure 89.

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 4 of 314

Rename Table dialog ........................................................................................................... 79
Copy Table dialog ................................................................................................................ 80
Delete Table dialog ............................................................................................................. 81
Import table(s) dialog.......................................................................................................... 82
CSV export dialog ................................................................................................................ 85
EDS export dialog ................................................................................................................ 86
JSON export dialog .............................................................................................................. 87
XTCE export dialog .............................................................................................................. 88
Manage Groups dialog ........................................................................................................ 89
New Group dialog ............................................................................................................... 90
Table type editor ................................................................................................................. 92
New table type dialog ......................................................................................................... 94
Data Type Editor dialog ....................................................................................................... 99
Example pointer to a structure data type ........................................................................... 99
Structure name pop-up ..................................................................................................... 100
Input Type Editor dialog .................................................................................................... 101
Macro Editor dialog........................................................................................................... 104
Example of macro name selection pop-up dialog in a macro value cell........................... 105
Assign Message IDs dialog ................................................................................................ 106
Reserved Message ID Editor dialog................................................................................... 107
Example Show all IDS dialog ............................................................................................. 108
Example Duplicate Message IDs dialog ............................................................................. 109
Project data field management dialog .............................................................................. 109
Example Select Data Field(s) dialog .................................................................................. 110
Example Show/Edit Data Fields dialog .............................................................................. 111
Padding adjustment dialog ............................................................................................... 113
Structure table showing highlighted padding variables ................................................... 114
Example padding adjustment progress/cancellation dialog ............................................. 114
Example variable paths & names dialog ........................................................................... 116
Example command information dialog ............................................................................. 117
Search tables dialog .......................................................................................................... 118
Manage Links dialog .......................................................................................................... 119
New Link dialog ................................................................................................................. 120
Copy Link(s) dialog ............................................................................................................ 121
Example link copy failure dialog........................................................................................ 122
Telemetry Scheduler dialog .............................................................................................. 123
Telemetry message auto-fill progress/cancellation dialog ............................................... 124
Assign telemetry message names and IDs dialog ............................................................. 125
Application Scheduler dialog ............................................................................................ 127
Application time slot auto-fill progress/cancellation dialog ............................................. 128
Rate Parameters dialog ..................................................................................................... 129
Application Parameters dialog .......................................................................................... 130
Manage Script Associations dialog.................................................................................... 132
Execute Script(s) dialog ..................................................................................................... 135
Halt script execution dialog .............................................................................................. 135
Script selection dialog ....................................................................................................... 136
Retrieve Script(s) dialog .................................................................................................... 137
Delete Script(s) dialog ....................................................................................................... 138
Script search dialog ........................................................................................................... 139
About dialog ...................................................................................................................... 140
4

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Figure 90.
Figure 91.
Figure 92.
Figure 93.
Figure 94.
Figure 95.

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 5 of 314

XTCE export script method flow ....................................................................................... 156
Structure table for import/export format examples ........................................................ 225
Command table for import/export examples ................................................................... 226
Structure table type definition for import/export example ............................................. 227
Command table type definition for import/export example............................................ 228
Data field, data type, and macro definitions for import/export example ........................ 229

Tables
Table 1.
Table 2.
Table 3.
Table 4.
Table 5.
Table 6.
Table 7.
Table 8.
Table 9.
Table 10.

Command line arguments ....................................................................................................... 16
Structure column names and input data types....................................................................... 24
Command column names and input data types ..................................................................... 27
Variable tree icons .................................................................................................................. 30
Default primitive data types ................................................................................................... 31
Web data access commands ................................................................................................... 51
XML special data fields ............................................................................................................ 86
Overridable XTCE export methods ........................................................................................ 155
Data access method applicability code definitions ............................................................... 157
Script data access methods................................................................................................... 221

5

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 6 of 314

1.0 Description
The Core Flight System (CFS) Command and Data Dictionary (CDD) utility, or CCDD, is a software tool for
managing the command and telemetry data for CFS and CFS applications. CCDD is written in Java™ and
interacts with a PostgreSQL database, so it can be used on any operating system that supports the Java
Runtime Environment (JRE) and PostgreSQL. CCDD is released as open source software under the NASA
Open Source Software Agreement, version 1.3, and is hosted on GitHub.
The CCDD application uses tables, similar to a spreadsheet, to display and allow manipulation of
telemetry data structures, command information, and other data pertinent to a CFS project. The data is
stored in a PostgreSQL database for manipulation and data security. The PostgreSQL database server
can be run locally or centralized on a remote host for easier access by multiple users. Data can be
imported into the application from files in comma-separated values (CSV), JavaScript Object Notation
(JSON), electronic data sheet (EDS), and extensible markup language (XML) telemetric and command
exchange (XTCE) formats. Data can be exported from the application to files in CSV, JSON, EDS, and
XTCE formats. The CCDD tables also allow simple cut and paste operations from the host operating
system’s clipboard. To make use of the project’s data, CCDD can interact with Java Virtual Machine
(JVM)-based scripting languages via a set of supplied data access methods. Using scripts, the user can
translate the data stored in the CCDD’s database into output files. Example scripts for creating common
CFS related output files are provided in four of these scripting languages. An embedded web server can
be activated, allowing web-based application access to the data. Figure 1 shows the basic relation
between CCDD and external sources.
JSR-223 Scripts
JavaScript,
Python, Ruby,
Groovy, Scala,
etc.

Script Access

Output Files
C headers, ITOS
record and
display, etc.

CSV Files

CCDD

JSON Files

Project
Database

XML Files
EDS
XTCE
Clipboard
Web
Applications

Embedded
Web Server

Legend
Data output
Data input
Data request

Figure 1. CCDD inputs and outputs
Questions or comments concerning this document or the CCDD application should be addressed to:
Johnson Space Center
Software, Robotics, and Simulation Division
Spacecraft Software Engineering Branch, Mail Code ER6
Houston, TX 77058

6

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 7 of 314

2.0 Requirements
CCDD is written based on the following Java and PostgreSQL versions:


JavaSE 1.7
o Developed in Linux using JavaSE 1.7 and tested on CentOS 6 Linux, Microsoft Windows 7,
and Apple OS X using JavaSE 1.8



PostgreSQL 8.4

CCDD comes with the following Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) driver, embedded Jetty web server,
and JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) versions:


JDBC driver 9.4-1207 (type 4)



Jetty 9.2.18.v20160721



JSON simple 1.1.1

Scripting language testing was performed using the following languages and versions:


JavaScript (ECMAScript) 1.8 (Mozilla Rhino 1.7 release 3)



JavaScript ECMA – 262 Edition 5.1 (Oracle Nashorn 1.8.0_131)



Python 2.7 (Jython 2.7 )



Ruby 9.0.1.0 (JRuby 9.0.1.0)



Groovy 2.4.4 (Groovy Scripting Engine 2.0)



Scala 2.12.4 (Scala REPL 2.0) - requires Java 1.8

EDS and XTCE XML schema versions:



EDS 1.3.112.4.17.1
XTCE 1.1

Compatibility with other versions, in particular earlier ones, is not guaranteed.

3.0 Installation
To install CCDD copy the Java archive (jar) file CCDD.jar, the user’s guide file
CCDD_Users_Guide.pdf, and the library folder CCDD_lib and its contents to a folder. The
application requires read/write access to a folder so that event log file(s) can be created; the default
folder for the log files is the file from which the application is executed though this can be changed (see
paragraph 4.2.5 for further information on event logs and paragraph 4.1 for changing the log file path).
Java and PostgreSQL must be installed before the application can be used.



To install Java, go to www.java.com and locate the installation instructions appropriate for the
operating system on which the application is to be run.
The PostgreSQL relational database management system is available for download from
www.postgresql.org. The format appropriate for the target operating system must be used.
Once installed, PostgreSQL must be configured prior to use by the application. Configuration
includes setting up the PostgreSQL server as a background service, creating database users and
roles within the PostgreSQL server, and setting the desired level of password authentication.
Extensive information on configuring PostgreSQL is available from www.postgresql.org.

The CCDD_lib folder contains versions of the library files required by CCDD for PostgreSQL interaction,
the embedded web server, and XML import/export format conversions. Updated versions of these
7

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 8 of 314

libraries can be used in place of those in this folder as described in paragraph 4.1. Information on these
libraries can be found at the following:






The PostgreSQL JDBC driver is located at jdbc.postgresql.org. Note that version of Java installed
determines which JDBC driver to use.
Jetty must be installed in order to use the web server. Jetty is located at
http://www.eclipse.org/jetty/. Note that version of Java installed determines which Jetty
version to use.
The JSON conversion library is located at https://code.google.com/archive/p/json-simple.
Information regarding EDS is located at http://www.ccsds.org.
Information regarding XTCE is located at http://www.omg.org/space/xtce.

CCDD supports the use of JVM-based scripting languages. At least one of these languages must be
installed for the application to make use of CCDD’s project-data-to-script-language interface. Only the
scripting language(s) intended for use with the application need to be installed. The application was
tested with five of the available languages: JavaScript, Python, Ruby, Groovy, and Scala. Details are
provided in this in subsequent sections of this guide on the use of these five scripting languages;
installation and use of other languages should be similar. The CCDD package provides examples of
common scripts in the JavaScript, Python, Ruby, and Groovy languages.
The scripting languages are not part of the CCDD package and must be installed separately on the
platform from which the CCDD application is launched. The following links can be used to find further
information on downloading and installing the scripting languages.






JavaScript® is part of the JRE download and installation from www.java.com, so no further
installation is necessary to use this scripting language. More information on JavaScript can be
found at developer.mozilla.org.
Python™ scripting is implemented using Jython, the Python implementation for Java. Jython can
be downloaded from www.jython.org.
Ruby scripting is implemented using JRuby, which implements Ruby in Java. JRuby is available
for download from jruby.org.
Groovy can be downloaded from www.groovy-lang.org.
Scala can be downloaded from www.scala-lang.org.

4.0 Operation
4.1

Getting Started

To run the application open a command prompt window and type:
java –classpath class_paths CCDD.CcddMain [args…]

where class_paths includes the paths and .jar file names for the CCDD application (CCDD.jar) and
supporting libraries, separated by colons (:) with no intervening spaces, and args are optional
command line arguments in the form:
[<- or />command [value] […]]

Versions of the JDBC driver, Jetty server, and JSON conversion libraries are included in the CCDD_lib
folder. If the default version is incompatible with the installation or an updated version is desired then
the defaults can be overridden by including the library path(s) and .jar file name(s) in the
class_paths argument (or by overwriting the file(s) in the CCDD_lib folder). The library files
needed are shown below;  is the specific version number of the installed file that is part of the
file’s name.
8

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 9 of 314

/postgresql-.jar
/lib/jetty-http-.jar
/lib/jetty-io-.jar
/lib/jetty-security-.jar
/lib/jetty-server-.jar
/lib/jetty-servlet-.jar
/lib/jetty-util-.jar
/lib/servlet-api-.jar
/json-simple-.jar

The library class path(s) must be specified for each scripting language other than JavaScript. The library
files required by Ruby, Python, Groovy, and Scala are shown below;  is the specific version
number of the installed file that is part of the file’s name. Library files for other scripting languages
should follow a similar format.
/lib/jruby.jar

Note: the JRuby reference must precede the other scripting language library references
jython.jar
/lib/groovy-.jar:/lib/groovy-jsr223.jar
/lib/scala-compiler.jar

Note: If running CCDD in Java 9 or 10 the startup command must be amended by adding the option to
include the module containing the JAXB library:
java --add-modules java.xml.bind –classpath class_paths CCDD.CcddMain [args…]

Each command line argument consists of a command, preceded by either a ‘-‘ or ‘/’, followed by a space,
then the command value. The available commands and acceptable values are described in Table 1. The
commands can be entered in any order. If the same command is entered more than once then each
instance is applied/executed in the order of appearance on the command line. The commands are not
case-sensitive, so “-user” is the same as “-USER”, “-User”, etc.
The import and export commands require one or more sub-commands. The sub-commands are
listed in Table 1 directly beneath the entries for the export and import commands. The sub-commands
have the same constraints as the commands, as described in the previous paragraph. However, the
entire list of sub-commands must be bounded by single or double quotes. For example, the arguments
for an export command would look similar to:
export “-tablePaths tableName -filePath /user/name/exportFolder -shutdown”

Single quotes may be used to bound command values within the export sub-command string if the
string is bounded by double quotes, and vice versa.

9

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Command

backup

command

events

export

export sub-commands

classification1

classification2

classification3

endianess

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 10 of 314

Description
Value
Sets the file path and name
to which to automatically
backup the project
database once it is
successfully connected.
File path and name of the
The extension “.dbu” is
project backup file
automatically appended to
the file name if not already
present. Only applies to
the first successful
connection
“true” to display event log
command messages in the main
Selects whether or not to
application window; “false” to
display event log command
hide event log command
messages
messages. The value text is
case insensitive
“true” to display all event log
Selects whether or not to
messages in the main
display all event log
application window; “false” to
messages
hide all event log messages.
The value text is case insensitive
Quoted (single or double) string
Exports the specified
containing one or more export
table(s) to the specified file sub-commands. See paragraph
4.9.3.8 for details
(XTCE only) Sets the first
level classification used in
the XML headers. See
Text
paragraph 4.9.3.8.4 for
details
(XTCE only) Sets the second
level classification used in
the XML headers. See
Text
paragraph 4.9.3.8.4 for
details
(XTCE only) Sets the third
level classification used in
the XML headers. See
Text
paragraph 4.9.3.8.4 for
details
Sets the appropriate XML tags
(EDS, XTCE) See paragraph
to indicate the endianness of
4.9.3.8 for the description
the table data; “big” for big
of the Endianess Big and
endian, “little” for little endian.
Little radio buttons
The value text is case insensitive

10

Default Value

None

true

true

None

DOMAIN

SYSTEM

INTERFACE

big

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Command

export sub-commands

externalFileName

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description
(EDS, XTCE) See paragraph
4.9.3.8.4 for the
description of the Enter
script file name input field

Version 1.4.14
Page 11 of 314

Value
Default Value
Name of the script, including its
folder path, containing the
export methods that replace
None
the internal EDS or XTCE export
methods. Omit this command
to use the internal methods

See paragraph 4.9.3.8 for
details. The file path is
required by the export
command when exporting Path for the folder into which
filePath
in the EDS or XTCE formats, the export file is placed
or in the CSV or JSON
formats when
singleFile is true
Determines the output file
format: “csv” for CSV, “eds” for
See paragraph 4.9.3.8 for
format
EDS, “json” for JSON, or “xtce”
details
for XTCE. The value text is case
insensitive
See paragraph 4.9.3.8 for
the description of the
“true” or “false”. The value text
includeProjectFields
Include project data fields is case insensitive
check box
(CSV, JSON) See paragraph
4.9.3.8 for the description “true” or “false”. The value text
includeReservedMsgIDs
of the Include reserved
is case insensitive
message IDs check box
(CSV, JSON) See paragraph
4.9.3.8 for the description “true” or “false”. The value text
includeVariablePaths
of the Include variable
is case insensitive
paths check box
(EDS, XTCE) See paragraph
4.9.3.8 for the description “true” or “false”. The value text
isHeaderBigEndian
of the Headers are big
is case insensitive
endian check box
See paragraph 4.9.3.8 for
the description of the
“true” or “false”. The value text
overwriteFile
Overwrite existing file(s)
is case insensitive
check box
See paragraph 4.9.3.8 for
the description of the
“true” or “false”. The value text
replaceMacros
Substitute macro values
is case insensitive
for macro names check
box

11

None

csv

false

false

false

true

false

false

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Command

singleFile

export sub-commands

tablePaths

validationStatus

version

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description
(CSV, JSON) See paragraph
4.9.3.8 for the description
of the Store in Multiple
files and Single file radio
buttons
Sets the paths for one or
more tables or table
groups to export. At least
one table or group is
required by the export
command. See paragraph
4.9.3.8 for details
(EDS, XTCE) Sets validation
status used in the XML
headers. See paragraphs
4.9.3.8.2 and 4.9.3.8.4 for
details
(EDS, XTCE) Sets the
version used in the XML
headers. See paragraphs
4.9.3.8.2 and 4.9.3.8.4 for
details

12

Version 1.4.14
Page 12 of 314

Value

Default Value

“true” or “false”. The value text
false
is case insensitive
Names of the table(s) and/or
group(s) to export. Group
names must be preceded by
‘Group:’. If multiple
tables/groups are specified the
table/group names must be
separated by a plus (+)

None

Text

Working

Text

1.0

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Command

execute

fail

host

import

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 13 of 314

Value
Default Value
Script association name or
script file name and associated
table(s). Script file paths are
required if the script is in a
folder other than the one from
which the application is
executed. If the script requires
one or more tables to be
specified then the table name(s)
and/or group name(s) are
Runs the supplied script
placed after the script name
association(s), or script(s)
and a colon. Group names must
using the supplied table(s)
be preceded by ‘Group:’. If
and/or group(s). The
multiple tables/groups are
application’s graphical user
specified the table/group
None
interface (GUI) is not
names must be separated by a
displayed; exits upon
plus (+) character. When
completion of the script(s).
multiple scripts are run each
See paragraph 4.9.5.1 for
definition, as described above,
more detail
is separated by a semicolon (the
string describing the
associations must be bounded
by quotes in this case;
alternately, multiple execute
commands can be issued from
the command line). Bounding
the value with quotes allows
spaces and the semicolon to be
used
“true” to display event log fail
Selects whether or not to
messages in the main
display event log fail
application window; “false” to
true
messages
hide event log fail messages.
The value text is case insensitive
Previous
session’s
Sets the name of the
PostgreSQL server host name.
PostgreSQL host
PostgreSQL server’s host
The host name is case sensitive
(localhost for
the first use)
Quoted (single or double) string
Imports the table(s) from
containing one or more export
None
the specified file(s)
sub-commands. See paragraph
4.9.3.8 for details

13

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Command

import sub-commands

appendExistingFields

fileName

openEditor

replaceExisting

useExistingFields

laf

logPath

mainSize

password

port

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description
See paragraph 4.9.3.7 for
the description of the
Append existing data
fields check box
See paragraph 4.9.3.7 for
details. The file name is
required by the import
command

Version 1.4.14
Page 14 of 314

Value

Default Value

“true” or “false”

false

Name of the file, including the
folder path, containing the
tables to import. The file
extension determines the
format (“csv”, “eds”, “json”, or
“xtce”)

None

See paragraph 4.9.3.7.
“true” or “false”
Ignored if the GUI is hidden
See paragraph 4.9.3.7 for
the description of the
“true” or “false”
Replace existing tables
check box
See paragraph 4.9.3.7 for
the description of the Use
“true” or “false”
existing field if duplicate
check box
“Look and feel” name (e.g.,
Sets the application look &
“Nimbus”, “Windows”, etc.).
feel
The names are case sensitive
Sets the path to the folder
where the session event
log is stored. This path
Path to the folder in which to
only applies to the current
store the session event log
session, and does not alter
the one stored in the
program preferences
Main application window size in
pixels. The parameter format
must be in the form
widthxheight where width and
Sets the main application
height are positive integer
window’s size
values. A width or height less
than the minimum allowed (750
for width, 400 for height) is
replaced by the minimum value
Password for user name for
Sets the user’s PostgreSQL
PostgreSQL. The password is
password
case sensitive
Sets the port of the
PostgreSQL server’s host

14

PostgreSQL server port. The
server port must be blank or a
positive integer

false

false

false
Previous
session’s L&F
(Metal for the
first use)
None (the folder
in which the
application is
started is used)

750x400

None
Previous
session’s
PostgreSQL port
(5432 for the
first use)

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Command
project

scriptOutPath

server

shutdown

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 15 of 314

Value

Selects the project
database to which to
initially connect

Default Value
Previous
Project database name. The
session’s project
project’s database name is case
name (none for
sensitive
the first use)

Sets the path to the folder
where the script output
files should be stored. The
scripts can access this path
and use it to set the folder
for the output files. This
command may be used
more than once in order to
set the path for different
execute commands. The Path to the folder in which to
store the script output files
path remains in effect for
the execute commands
until another
scriptOutPath
command is used to
change it. This path only
applies to the current
session, and does not alter
the one stored in the
program preferences
“true” to display event log web
server messages in the main
Selects whether or not to
application window; “false” to
display event log web
hide event log web server
server messages
messages. The value text is
case insensitive
Disables display of the GUI
and forces the application
to exit following
completion of the
command line commands.
This command is provided
for use with running script None
associations, and importing
or exporting tables via the
command line options so
that these operations can
be performed without user
interaction

15

None (the folder
in which the
application is
started is used)

true

None

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Command

ssl

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description
Enables or disables a
secure socket layer (SSL)
connection to the
PostgreSQL server. SSL
must be set to “on” if the
server expects an SSL
connection, and “off” if it
does not

Version 1.4.14
Page 16 of 314

Value

Default Value

“off” to disable SSL; “on” to
enable SSL. The value text is
case insensitive

Previous
session’s SSL
state (off for the
first use)

“true” to display event log
status messages in the main
application window; “false” to
true
hide event log status messages.
The value text is case insensitive
“true” to display event log
success messages in the main
application window; “false” to
true
hide event log success
messages. The value text is
case insensitive
Previous
User name for PostgreSQL. The session’s user
user name is case sensitive
name (none for
the first use)

status

Selects whether or not to
display event log status
messages

success

Selects whether or not to
display event log success
messages

user

Sets the user name to use
when connecting to the
PostgreSQL server

version

Displays the CCDD version
number and build date,
then terminates the
application. Any other
commands are ignored

webport

Set the port for the
embedded web server.
Valid port number for the web
See paragraph 4.9.1.6.2 for server to listen to for queries
more detail

Previous
session’s web
server port
(7070 for the
first use)

webserver

“nogui” to start the application
and enable the web server
Enables the embedded
without displaying the user
web server. See paragraph interface; “gui” to start the
4.9.1.6.1 for more detail
application, enable the web
server, and display the user
interface

nogui or gui

Table 1.

Command line arguments

The following is an example of starting the application in Linux. In this example the CCDD application is
installed in the current folder, the default libraries in the CCDD_lib folder are used, and the script
library files are installed in the folder /opt. The project initially opened is “myProject” by user
“userName”:
java -classpath ./CCDD.jar:/opt/jruby-9.0.1.0/lib/jruby.jar:/opt/jython2.7
.0/jython.jar:/opt/groovy-2.4.4/lib/groovy-2.4.4.jar:/opt/groovy-2.4.4/

16

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 17 of 314

lib/groovy-jsr223-2.4.4.jar:/opt/scala-2.12.4/lib/scala-compiler.jar
CCDD.CcddMain -project myProject -user userName

To make execution easier an alias can be created. Using the example above the Linux alias command
is as follows:
alias CCDD=’java -classpath ./CCDD.jar:/opt/jruby-9.0.1.0/lib/jruby.jar:/o
pt/jython2.7.0/jython.jar:/opt/groovy-2.4.4/lib/groovy-2.4.4.jar:/opt/g
roovy-2.4.4/lib/groovy-jsr223-2.4.4.jar:/opt/scala-2.12.4/lib/scalacompiler.jar CCDD.CcddMain’

For Microsoft Windows, the doskey command can be used to create an alias (the individual class paths
must be separated by semi-colons instead of colons):
doskey CCDD=java -classpath "class_paths" CCDD.CcddMain $*

Having created an alias, the application can then be started by simply typing:
CCDD [args…]

An invalid command or command parameter results in program termination. An invalid parameter
displays an error message at the command prompt. An invalid command or a valid command without
an associated parameter produces the following output at the command prompt:
usage:
java -classpath  CCDD.CcddMain [[<- or />]  [...]]
Command line arguments:
Command

Value

Description

----------------------backup

--------------------------------backup file name

-------------------------------------Backup project on connecting

command
events

true or false
true or false

Show command events
Show events

execute

[association name] or
[" or ']script file name[:table1

Execute script(s)

or Group:group1[+...[+tableN or
Group:groupN]]][;...][" or ']
export

''

Export tables, etc. in CSV, EDS, JSON,
or XTCE format

classification1
classification2

text (default: DOMAIN)
text (default: SYSTEM)

Classification level 1 (XTCE)
Classification level 2 (XTCE)

classification3
endianess

text (default: INTERFACE)
big or little (default: big)

Classification level 3 (XTCE)
Endianess (EDS, XTCE)

externalFileName

external export script file name

External export script file name
(EDS, XTCE)

filePath

export file name

Export file path + name (required for
EDS, XTCE, and for CSV, JSON if

export sub-commands:
--------------------

exporting to a single file). This
path is in effect for the current
session only
Export file format

format

csv, eds, json, or xtce

includeProjectFields
includeReservedMsgIDs

true or false (default: false)
true or false (default: false)

Include project data fields
Include reserved message ID list

includeVariablePaths

true or false (default: false)

(CSV, JSON)
Include variable path list (CSV, JSON)

isHeaderBigEndian

true or false (default: true)

Force telemetry & command header to
big endian (EDS, XTCE)

overwriteFile

true or false (default: false)

Overwrite existing file(s). If the

(default: csv)

17

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 18 of 314
GUI is hidden then any existing
files are always overwritten

replaceMacros
singleFile

true or false (default: false)
true or false (default: false)

Replace macros with values
Store in single file (CSV, JSON)

tablePaths


text (default: Working)

Validation status (EDS, XTCE)

version
fail

text (default: 1.0)
true or false

Version (EDS, XTCE)
Show fail events

host
import

host name
''

Set PostgreSQL server host
Import tables, etc. from a CSV, EDS,

validationStatus

JSON, or XTCE file
import sub-commands:
-------------------appendExistingFields

true or false (default: false)

Append existing data field(s) if
table exists. Only used if

fileName

import file name

replaceExisting is true
Import file name (required)

openEditor
replaceExisting

true or false (default: false)
true or false (default: false)

Open an editor for each imported table
Replace existing table(s)

useExistingFields

true or false (default: false)

Use existing data field if imported
one matches. Only used if
replaceExisting and
appendExistingFields are true

laf
logPath

look & feel
file path

Load look & feel
Set event log file path. This
path is in effect for the
current session only

mainSize
password

widthxheight
user password

Set main window size
Set user password

port
project

port number
project name

Set PostgreSQL server port
Select CCDD project

scriptOutPath

file path

Set the script output file path. This
command may be used more than once.
This path is in effect for the
current session only

server

true or false

Show web server events

shutdown

Shutdown the application after
completing the command line
commands (e.g., script
execution(s), table imports, or
table exports. The GUI is not
displayed

ssl
status

on or off
true or false

Enable/disable SSL
Show status events

success
user

true or false
user name

Show success events
Set user name

version
webport

port number

Display CCDD version
Set web server port

webserver

nogui or gui

Enable web server

Once the application is executed the CCDD main window appears as shown in Figure 2. If password
authentication is enforced (see paragraph Error! Reference source not found.) and a password is not
supplied on the command line then the Select User dialog appears (see paragraph 4.9.1.1), allowing the
18

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 19 of 314

user and password to be entered. The graphical user interface (GUI) “look and feel” (L&F) can be
selected by the user from a list of those installed on the operating system. If the L&F is changed then
the application window and dialogs may differ in appearance (but not function) from those shown in the
figures below. See paragraph 4.9.1.7.1 on how to alter the L&F.

Figure 2. CCDD main window
The main window header contains the program name and version number. The main window is divided
into a menu bar along the top and a session event log display area underneath. See paragraph 4.2.5 for
further information on the event log. The window can be resized as desired. Each menu contains one
or more menu items or sub-menus. A menu item that is grayed-out indicates that the affected item is
not available at that time; for example, if no project database is open then the table commands are not
available. A description of each of the menu items is provided in section 4.9.

4.2
4.2.1

Database
Setup

CCDD interacts with a PostgreSQL database. A description of installing and configuring the PostgreSQL
software and server is beyond the scope of this document; see the PostgreSQL web site at
www.postgresql.org for this information.

4.2.2

Authentication

The password authentication configuration for the PostgreSQL server affects the behavior of the CCDD
application. Password authentication is controlled via the pg_hba.conf file. Super user status is
required in order to make changes to this file. The location of this file can be determined by executing
the “SHOW hba_file;” command in the PostgreSQL server command line utility psql. There are a
number of authentication methods described in the documentation on the PostgreSQL web site; e.g.
“trust”, “password”, “md5”, etc. The methods can be applied to all users or to individual users based on
the connection type (local or remote). When set to “trust” no password is required to log into the
server and access a database. The methods “password” and “md5” are similar in that the user must
19

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 20 of 314

provide a password to log into the server. This is preferred in multi-user scenarios to control who may
access the server and databases.

4.2.3

Roles

PostgreSQL allows only the owner of a database element (table, sequence, etc.) to make changes to that
object. This would be problematic if multiple users require the capability to make updates. The
restriction is overcome by means of roles. Every user login is a role in the server. Group roles can be
created to which other roles (e.g., users) are assigned membership; any role belonging to the group
inherits the privileges assigned to the group role. The PostgreSQL administrator must create a role for
each user (the user’s login identity), and one or more group roles that are used as the owner role when
a project is created. The administrator must also assign membership in the group role to the
appropriate users. Role creation and maintenance is performed outside the CCDD application, and must
be completed prior to creating a project database. When a project database is created, one of the
group roles is assigned as the owner (see paragraph 4.9.2.3; note that for a single-user project the user’s
role can be selected as the owner). Since all elements of the database are owned by the selected group,
all members of the group have write privileges to these elements. Other roles (users) not in the group
are prevented from changing the project elements. To control the ability of a specific user within the
group to alter the database, CCDD implements individual user access levels – see paragraph 4.2.5.

4.2.4

Connection recovery

If a database transaction fails due to a lost connection an attempt is made to reestablish the connection.
If successful then the transaction is automatically repeated. If the reconnection attempt is unsuccessful
then the error condition is propagated to the calling method. The PostgreSQL server timeout value,
used when attempting to reestablish the server connection, is a program preference value (see
Appendix E.2).

4.2.5

Project access control

It’s desirable sometimes to allow users access to the data within a project, but not allow these users to
alter the data. CCDD implements user access levels to accomplish this. This is intended only as a low
level security measure to prevent inadvertent alteration of project data and does not prevent access to a
project’s database and/or alteration of the data via other applications. The three access levels are
administrative, read/write, and read only. When a project is created the user creating the project is
automatically granted administrative privileges. Users with administrative access can assign access
levels to the other users associated with the project. A user with read only access can still alter the
contents of any of the editors in CCDD, but is unable to store the changes. Users granted read/write
access have full access to the project, but are not allowed to alter access levels for any user. The enable
state or operational capability for a command menu item is based on the user’s access level.
Following project creation only the project’s creator has a defined access level. Users that are not
explicitly assigned an access level have read only privileges. Therefore, all other users with a role in the
project can’t alter the project’s data until the project’s administrator assigns them read/write or
administrative privileges via the user access level manager - see paragraph 4.9.2.11.

4.3

Event Log

The application automatically records all interactions with the PostgreSQL and web servers. The
information includes the exact commands issued to the server and the server responses (success, or
failure with supporting information). All events are logged to the session’s log file, even if the GUI is
disabled.

20

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 21 of 314

When the GUI is enabled the main application windows displays the current session’s event log.
Previous sessions’ event logs can be reviewed using the Read log command; see paragraph 4.9.1.3. The
log automatically scrolls to the latest entry when an event is logged. Each log entry contains the
following information arranged in a tabular format:
Index

This is a sequential number assigned to each log entry, beginning with 1 and incrementing
by one as transactions occur with the database.

Server

Name or address of the computer hosting the PostgreSQL server and the port number.

Project

Name of the project database to which the transaction applies.

User

Name of the user that initiated the transaction.

Data/Time Date (month/day/year) and time stamp (hours:minutes:seconds) when the transaction
occurred.
Type

One of five log entry types:
Command Indicates a PostgreSQL command issued to the database.

Message

Success

Indicates the database transaction completed successfully.

Fail

Indicates the database transaction or web server command failed.

Status

Indicates the log entry provides application status information.

Server

Indicates a web server command.

The text in this column is dependent on the message Type. For a Command type the text is
the PostgreSQL command issued to the database. If a data base transaction succeeds then a
Success type message indicates what was accomplished by the database command. A Fail
type message provides details on the cause of the transaction or web server failure. Failed
transactions are rolled back so that no change is made to the database. The Status type
message shows the results for an application operation (for example, the database table
consistency check). A Server command displays web server command information. The
message length displayed is limited by default to 250 characters in order to prevent bogging
down the application. Truncated messages are denoted by a trailing ellipsis (…) followed by
the number of truncated characters in parentheses. The full text of the message can be
viewed by double clicking the right mouse button while the mouse pointer is over a log
entry row – a log entry viewer is opened showing the full message text for that row.

Beneath the logged entries are entry filter check boxes that can be used to determine which messages
are displayed, based on the message type(s). If a message type’s check box is unchecked then messages
of that type are hidden. Checking the box restores the messages. Messages for hidden types are still
logged even if not currently displayed. The Server check box only appears once the web server is
activated. The All check box affects the other check boxes – unchecking it clears the other check boxes,
and checking it selects the others. If none of the check boxes are selected no log entries are displayed.
Note that for the single log entry viewer the filter check boxes are not displayed.
A large number of Command log entries are generated during normal program operation. The display of
these events can slow program execution under some circumstances (for example, when exporting a
large number of tables). Deselecting the Command check box hides the command entries, making the
GUI more responsive. The check box can be reselected, causing the command entries to be displayed, if
the entries need to be reviewed. A command line option can be used to deselect the check box at
program startup.

21

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

4.4

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 22 of 314

Mouse and Keyboard Navigation

The application’s menus, dialogs, and GUI components can be manipulated using the mouse pointer,
mouse buttons, and mouse wheel, as well as with the keyboard. Keyboard mnemonics are provided for
the menu items and dialog buttons. These are accessed by pressing the Alt key in addition to another
key; i.e., Alt+key, where key is the underlined character in the menu or button text (the key case is
ignored). For example, pressing Alt+F or Alt+f in the main application window opens the File menu. The
Tab and arrow keys can be used to navigate between the components in a dialog or window, and the
pressing the Enter or space key actuates a control (e.g., a button or check box). See Appendix E.1 for a
list of special keys and key sequences.
When a dialog containing a table is initially displayed it has no table row selected. A row can be selected
by positioning the mouse pointer over a cell in the row and pressing the left mouse button, or by using
the keyboard. To select an initial row with the keyboard press the Tab key, then the Enter or Space key
when the table has the keyboard focus (which it does initially); this selects the table’s topmost visible
row and sets the focus to that row’s leftmost column. The up and down arrow keys can then be used to
change the selected row and the left and right arrows can change the selected column. The selected cell
is highlighted. Multiple cell selection behavior is dependent on the particular table, but in general
behaves as follows. Multiple, contiguous cells can be selected using a combination of the
mouse/keyboard and the Shift key. Highlight the starting cell, then either (a) continue to press the left
mouse button and drag the pointer, (b) hold the Shift key and left-click the mouse on another row (the
two rows, plus any in between, are highlighted), or (c) hold the Shift key and press the arrow key to
highlight as many cells as desired. Individual cells can be selected/deselected by pressing the Ctrl key
and selecting the cell with the mouse. The entire table may be selected by pressing Ctrl-A. For row
operations (e.g., Move up or Delete row) the row(s) indicated by the highlighted cell(s) are affected.
Similarly, for column operations (e.g., Move left) the column(s) indicated by the highlighted cell(s) are
affected. Once one or more cells are selected the highlighted data can be copied by pressing Ctrl-C. To
paste the data into another application (e.g., spreadsheet or text document) or another table use the
Ctrl-V or Ctrl-I key sequence.
Navigation within a table can be accomplished via mouse or keyboard. Note that some of these keys
perform different functions if a cell is actively being edited. The Insert key inserts a row at the current
selection point and the Delete key erases the contents of the currently selected cell(s) (see above
paragraph concerning cell selection). Pressing the Ctrl-Delete deletes the currently selected rows. The
Home and End keys change the cell selection to the first or last column, respectively, of the currently
selected row. The Page Up and Page Down keys scroll the table up or down one page, respectively,
(unless the entire table is already visible) changing the cell selection to the currently selected column,
with the row one page up or down from its previous position.
Table data entry is initiated by double clicking the left mouse button while the mouse pointer is over the
cell to be edited. The Enter or Space keys may also be used to initiate editing on the currently selected
cell (the Space key initiates editing as well as inserts a space into the cell at the end of any existing text).
Pressing the Enter key while editing a cell stores the text in the cell and initiates editing in the next cell,
moving left to right until the last column is reached, at which point editing moves to the first column in
the next row below unless the end of the table is reached. Protected cells, denoted by a gray
background color, are skipped. A cell containing a check box does not allow moving to the next cell via
the Enter key; instead, the check box state is toggles with each press of the Enter key.
While cell editing is active the Insert key inserts a space to the right of the text cursor, and the Delete
key deletes the character to the right of the text cursor. The Home and End keys move the text cursor
to the beginning and end of the cell, respectively. If the table cell’s input type (see 4.7 for information
on input types) supports multiple lines then pressing Alt-Enter inserts a line break.
22

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 23 of 314

Pressing the Escape key while editing terminates editing of the cell and removes any changes made to
the cell.
For most tables in the application, row sort order, column width, and column position are useradjustable. The table rows can be sorted by column by positioning the mouse pointer over the column’s
header and pressing the left mouse button. The rows are sorted in ascending order, depending on the
selected column’s contents, and an icon appears beside the column name indicating the sort direction.
Selecting the column again sorts in descending order (with a corresponding change in the sort direction
icon), and a third selection restores the rows to their original order and removes the sort direction icon
(further column header selection repeats this sequence). Only one column can be sorted at a time –
selection of another column removes the sort from the first sorted column before applying the sort to
the newly selected one. The column width may be resized by positioning the mouse pointer over the
right border of the column header (the mouse pointer changes to indicate resizing is possible), pressing
and holding a mouse button, then moving the mouse left or right; release the mouse button to exit
resizing. Automatic resizing, based on the widest of the contents of the cells and header, is
accomplished by double clicking a mouse button when the resize cursor appears. The column order may
be changed by positioning the mouse pointer over a column header, pressing and holding the left mouse
button, then dragging the column to the new location.
Certain dialogs contain a tabbed pane and multiple tabs (example, the table and link editors). The tab
order can be rearranged by positioning the mouse pointer over the tab, pressing and holding the left
mouse button, and moving the mouse pointer. The pointer icon changes and a transparent copy of the
tab appears that follows the pointer, but is constrained by the tabbed pane’s header area. As the copy
is moved the insertion point is indicated by a thicker line appears beside the tab where the dragged tab
will be moved if the mouse button is released. For the table editor dialog, if the pointer is moved
outside the bounds of the dialog and the mouse button released then the table editor represented by
the tab is removed from the editor dialog. If the pointer is over another editor dialog then the tab is
added to that dialog at the position indicated by the insertion indicator. However, if the button is
released while the pointer isn’t over a table editor dialog then a new editor dialog is created and the tab
is placed within it.
Details specific to navigation in certain windows and dialogs are provided in the components’
descriptions in later sections.

4.5

Data Tables

The CCDD data is stored in the project’s database in the form of tables. The tables consist of a twodimensional array of columns and rows. The columns define the content of the cell in each row, much
like the data in a spreadsheet. For example, a table may have a column titled “Description” which
indicates that the cells in that column contain descriptive text concerning the parameter defined in each
specific row. There is no constraint on the number of tables in the project’s database, nor is there a
constraint on the table’s number of columns and rows.

4.5.1

Table types

Every data table is built from a table type definition which defines the table’s columns. Think of a table
type as the blueprint from which other tables are created. Two types of tables are available by default
upon creation of a project: Structure and Command. Structure tables represent C-program data
structures containing information on variables. Command tables are designed to contain information
pertinent to CFS commands. Other table types may be created by the user to contain data that doesn’t
fit into the predefined types (see paragraph 4.9.3.10 for information on the table type editor). All tables
of a given type share the same column definitions. Data in tables of any type are accessible via the
scripts (see paragraph 4.10 for information regarding script access).
23

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 24 of 314

Every table that is created from a table type is considered a prototype. A prototype determines the
columns and default data for all instances of that table. Each prototype table itself constitutes an
instance of that table, and in many cases the prototype is the only instance. However, in the case of
structure tables, multiple instances can exist – one for every reference to the structure from within
another structure. Each of these derive their columns and initial data values from their prototype table.
A prototype table that is not referenced from within another table is considered a root table. A table
that references another table is that table’s parent, and the referenced table is a child of the parent.
The root table is also a parent if it contains a reference to another table. It’s common for structure
tables to have a parent-child relationship. It’s possible for tables of other types to have such a
relationship as well, though less likely.
4.5.1.1 Structure tables
Structure table rows represent C-program variables and related information. The variables can either be
of a primitive data type (e.g., integer, char, double) or can be a reference to another structure. These
child structures can in turn reference other structures, and so on, to any depth required by the user.
The only constraint is that no circular references are allowed, wherein a structure references itself
somewhere in its hierarchy. Ultimately only references to primitive data types exist as the end point of
any path from the root structure, through its child structures, to a variable.
Certain columns are inherent to structures and must be present for the table to be recognized as a
structure. The default names for these columns are “Variable Name”, “Data Type”, “Array Size”, “Bit
Length”, and “Rate”. The column names can be changed if desired; it’s the column’s input type that
identifies the column (see paragraph 4.7 for more information on input types). Therefore, for a table to
be treated as a structure it must include at a minimum the columns with the input types “Variable
name”, “Primitive & Structure”, “Array index”, “Bit length”, and “Rate”. Other columns, “Description”,
“Units”, and “Enumeration”, are automatically included for structure tables; these additional columns
can be altered, or even deleted. Columns containing other variable information can be added at the
user’s discretion. Table 2 shows the default structure column names and the corresponding input types.

1

Default Column Name

Input Type

Variable Name

Variable name1

Description

Description

Units

Units

Data Type

Primitive & Structure1

Array Size

Array index1

Bit Length

Bit length1

Rate

Rate1

Enumeration

Enumeration

A table must contain this input types to be
identified as a structure

Table 2. Structure column names and input data types
Only one variable name, data type, array size, and bit length column is allowed per table type definition.
The table can have multiple rate and enumeration columns.

24

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 25 of 314

The array size and bit length cell values are mutually exclusive for a variable; only one can be assigned
(or neither). If array size is specified then the bit length cell for that variable is grayed out and cannot be
selected. Conversely, if a bit length is entered then the array size cell is grayed out.
The bit length and enumeration cells are valid only for data types that have a base type of “signed
integer” or “unsigned integer” (see paragraph 4.5.4 for information on data types). If a non-integer data
type is selected in the data type column then the bit length and enumeration cells for that row are
grayed out and cannot be edited. Conversely, if the bit length or enumeration cell is not empty then the
data type for that row only displays integer data types.
If an array size is specified a row is inserted automatically into the table for each array member. Arrays
may have one or more dimensions, each with a minimum size of 2. For multi-dimensional arrays the
size of each dimension is specified in the array size column, separated from one another by commas.
For example, a three dimensional array, n, with dimension sizes of 2, 3, and 4 would have the array size
specified as “2, 3, 4” (the array text is automatically formatted with spaces). The first array member
would be n[0][0][0], the second n[0][0][1], and so on until the last member, n[1][2][3], is reached; this
array would have a total of 24 members (= 2 x 3 x 4). When a structure table is open any arrays are
initially collapsed; in other words only the array definition row is shown. The display of the array
member rows can be toggled in one of two ways, via the Expand arrays command (see paragraph
4.9.3.2.3.5) or by positioning the mouse pointer over any cell in the array size column and doubleclicking the right mouse button. When expanded, the array members for all arrays are displayed
beneath their respective array definition row. The variable name column shows the variable name with
the array index (or indices) appended, and the overall array dimension size(s) is displayed in the array
size column. See Figure 3 for an example of an expanded array definition.
array definition

array members

Figure 3. Example array display
Note that the variable name, data type, and array size are grayed out and cannot be altered in the array
member rows; however, individual values may be assigned to a member for the other columns in the
table. The exception is the bit length column – an array definition or member cannot be assigned a bit
length. To change the array member names or data type make the change to the array definition row;
the member rows are changed as well. Changing the array definition row’s array size value increases or
decreases the member rows as needed, and clearing the array size cell removes all of the member rows
for that variable.
The string data type is a special instance of the character base data type. If no array size is specified
then the string variable is simply a single character. If an array size is supplied then the first (rightmost)
array dimension determines the string length in characters. A string behaves as other array variables
except that column values (e.g., description) may not be assigned to array members of the string other
than the first one (i.e., one ending with an array index of zero). Arrays of string variables are allowed, as
with other data types.
If a data type cell references a structure then the specific instance of the structure table it represents
can be opened by double-clicking the right mouse button while the mouse pointer is positioned over the
data type cell. The table is opened in its own tab in the same editor window (see paragraph 4.9.3.2 for
25

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 26 of 314

more information on the table editor). If this is attempted on a structure reference in a prototype table,
and the prototype table is itself referenced in another structure table, then the dialog in Figure 4 is
displayed, indicating that the prototype of the selected structure, and not a specific instance, was
opened (‘a_structure_table‘ and ‘a_child_table‘ in the figure are replaced by the prototype and child
table names respectively). Once a structure is referenced by another one it is no longer a root structure
table, and therefore can’t have its own child tables, only those that are part of the hierarchy of the root
structure to which the structure’s prototype belongs.

Figure 4. Example dialog
As mentioned above, a child table inherits the data values of its prototype table. If a child table’s data
value is edited it overrides the inherited value, producing a “custom” value for the child. Even if the
child’s prototype values are subsequently changed the child retains its “custom” values. Special action
must be taken to remove the child’s custom value and have it use the prototype value – see paragraph
4.9.3.2.2.8.2.
The user may create other table types that also represent a structure table. If a table contains the
default structure input data types then the table is treated as a structure table.
4.5.1.2 Command tables
Command tables contain CFS command information. Certain columns are inherent to command tables
and must be present for the table to be recognized as a command table. The default names for these
columns are “Command Name” and “Command Code”. The column names can be changed if desired;
it’s the columns’ input type that identifies the column (see paragraph 4.7 for more information on input
types). Therefore, a command table must include columns with the “Command name” and “Command
code” input types. Other columns (“Description”, “Arg 1 Name”, “Arg 1 Description”, “Arg 1 Units”, “Arg
1 Data Type”, “Arg 1 Array Size”, “Arg 1 Enumeration”, “Arg 1 Minimum”, and “Arg 1 Maximum”) are
automatically included for command tables; these additional columns can be altered, or even deleted.
Only a single command name and command code column is allowed per table type definition. Columns
containing other command information, such as those to describe more command arguments (name,
data type, enumeration, minimum, maximum, etc.) can be added at the user’s discretion. Table 3 shows
the default command column names and the corresponding input types.

26

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

1

Version 1.4.14
Page 27 of 314

Default Column Name

Input Type

Command Name

Command name1

Command Code

Command code1

Description

Description

Arg 1 Name

Argument name

Arg 1 Description

Description

Arg 1 Units

Units

Arg 1 Data Type

Primitive

Arg 1 Array Size

Array index

Arg 1 Enumeration

Enumeration

Arg 1 Minimum

Minimum

Arg 1 Maximum

Maximum

A table must contain this input types to be
identified as a command

Table 3. Command column names and input data types
The order in which the columns are defined in the command table type definition determines which
columns are associated with a particular command argument. See paragraph 4.9.3.10 for details on
defining columns for a table type definition. Any column defined prior to the first column with the input
type “Argument name” is assumed to apply to the command in general. All column definitions between
two columns with the input type “Argument name” (or the last argument name column and the end of
the table type definition) are assumed to be associated. For the default command table type definition
the Description column is considered generic, and all of the columns following “Arg 1 Name” are
associated with the first (and only) command argument. If a subsequent command argument is added it
would begin with a column of input type “Argument name”, placed after all of the first argument’s
associated columns, and followed by any column definitions associated with the new argument. It is
suggested that any extra command argument sets are named in a manner similar to the default
argument 1 names (e.g., Arg 2 Name, Arg 2 Data Type, etc.) so that the association is apparent to the
user.
The command argument enumeration cells are valid only for data types that have a base type of “signed
integer” or “unsigned integer” (see paragraph 4.5.4 for information on data types). If a non-integer data
type is selected in the argument’s data type column then the argument’s associated enumeration cell in
the same row is grayed out and cannot be edited. Conversely, if the argument’s enumeration cell is not
empty then the argument’s associated data type for that row only displays integer data types.

4.5.2

Table groups

Data tables can be assigned to user-defined groups (see paragraph 4.9.3.9 for details on assigning tables
to a group). These groups are a method of relating tables to each other. For example, all of the tables
for a specific CFS application or subsystem can be assigned to a group. The groups are used in filtering
the table tree (see paragraph 4.5.3 concerning tree filtering). A table can be assigned to more than one
group, or to none. The application scheduler uses the groups designated as CFS applications when
producing the scheduler table (see paragraph 4.9.3.9 for details on designating a group as an
application, and paragraph 4.9.4.3). Groups can also be assigned data fields. If a group is specified as
27

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 28 of 314

representing a CFS application a number of data fields are automatically assigned (these can be edited,
removed, or additional fields added as desired). See paragraph 4.6 for more details on data fields.

4.5.3

Table tree

The table tree displays the data tables using a tree representation. Depending on the operation (e.g.,
Edit, Rename, etc.) there are one or two top level branches in the tree. The first, labeled Prototypes, is
an alphabetical arrangement of the prototype tables. Since it displays prototypes only it is a single level
in depth (not including any filtering; see below). The second top level branch that may be displayed,
Parents & Children, shows the root tables and, if applicable, their children as sub-branches, and the
children of those tables as further sub-branches, etc. See Figure 5 and Figure 6.

Figure 5. Table tree

Figure 6. Table tree expansion
28

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 29 of 314

Selecting the symbol beside a branch in the tree causes that branch to expand (if collapsed) or to
collapse (if expanded). Selection can be made with the mouse pointer, or by using the tab key and
up/down arrows to highlight the branch’s name, then pressing the right arrow to expand or left arrow to
collapse the branch. Positioning the mouse pointer over a branch name and double left-clicking toggles
between expanded and collapsed view for that branch. Selecting one or more branches and pressing
Ctrl-E causes the selected branches and all of their child branches to expand (if collapsed) or collapse (if
expanded). The first branch selected determines if any other selected branches are expanded or
collapsed. Hovering the mouse over an item in the tree displays a pop-up tool tip showing the
description of the item (if it has one; for a table this is the text from the table’s description field; see
Figure 35).
Below the tree are one or more check boxes. The Expand all check box is available for every tree;
selecting this check box causes all of the tree branches to be displayed. Clearing the check box collapses
all of the branches down to the initial level.
The names displayed in the tree for structure and primitive variables are in the format data
type.variable name (see paragraph 4.5.3.1). For structure variables the data type is the name of the
structure defining the variable; for primitive variables (e.g., integers, floats) the data type is the name of
the primitive. Color is used to highlight the data type. The Hide data type check box appears with table
trees that display structure and primitive variables. When unchecked, the tree displays the variables in
the full format as described. When check, the data type portion of the name is not displayed.
The remaining check boxes are used to filter the tree contents. There are two filter methods, by groups
and by types. Depending on the operation one, both, or neither of these check boxes may be available.
If the Filter by group check box is selected then sub-branches are inserted at the level below the
Prototypes and Parents & Children branches. These sub-branches are the groups defined by the user
(see paragraphs 4.5.2 and 4.9.3.9). Tables belonging to the group are displayed as sub-branches of the
group branch. A special group, labeled “All tables”, appears in the tree below the user-defined group
sub-branches. The “All tables” group is an automatically defined group that displays all tables, including
those that are not a member of a group, so that every table is still available for selection in the table
tree while the group filter is applied. Deselecting the check box removes the group branches.
If the Filter by type check box is selected then sub-branches are inserted at the level below the
Prototypes and Parents & Children branches. These sub-branches are the table types: structure,
command, and any others defined by the user (see paragraphs 4.5.1 and 4.9.3.10). Tables of a given
type are displayed as sub-branches of the table type branch. In other words, all of the Structure type
tables appear under a Structure branch, all Command type tables under a Command branch, and so on
for each defined table type. Deselecting the check box removes the type branches.
Both the group and type filters may be applied simultaneously. The branches are first divided by group.
Each group is then sub-divided by table type.
4.5.3.1 Variable tree
Another form of the table tree is the variable tree. The variable tree displays only the project’s structure
tables. These are displayed in the same manner as in the table tree, except that the variables belonging
to the structure tables are also shown as branches of their parent structure. Variable trees are used
where selection of variables is required; e.g., in the links manager (paragraph 4.9.4.1) and the telemetry
scheduler (paragraph 4.9.4.2). Like the table tree, variable trees allow filtering by group.
Variable names are displayed in the tree in the format:
.[:bit length]
Examples: float.bq[1], uint16.faultBits:12
29

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 30 of 314

The node icons used in the variable tree indicate if the variable is a bit-wise variable or not (i.e., has a bit
length assigned), if the variable is bit-packed with one or more variables, and if the variable belongs to a
link (see Table 4). Paragraph 4.5.5 provides details on bit-packed variables.
Icon

Variable type
Non-bit-wise variable
Linked non-bit-wise variable
Bit-wise variable
Linked bit-wise variable
Packed bit-wise variable
Linked and packed bit-wise variable
Table 4. Variable tree icons

4.5.4

Data types

The structure and command tables, and possibly and user-defined table types, contain data type
columns. This column is used to set the data type for the referenced parameter (e.g., structure variable
or command argument). The data type is either a primitive type, a reference to a structure, or a pointer.
Each primitive data type is derived from one of five base data types: signed integer, unsigned integer,
floating point, character, and pointer. The base type, along with the size in bytes, determines the
characteristics and usage of the data type. For example, a bit length can be assigned to a variable only if
its data type has an integer base type (signed or unsigned), and the bit length is less than or equal to the
data type’s size (in bits).
A project database is automatically provided with a number of primitive data types. These can be
altered or deleted. The default primitive types are shown in Table 5.
Data Type
Name

C-Language
Data Type

Number
of Bytes

Base Type

int8_t

signed char

1

signed integer

int16_t

signed short int

2

signed integer

int32_t

signed int

4

signed integer

int64_t

signed long int

8

signed integer

uint8_t

unsigned char

1

unsigned integer

uint16_t

unsigned short int

2

unsigned integer

uint32_t

unsigned int

4

unsigned integer

uint64_t

unsigned long int

8

unsigned integer

float

float

4

floating point

double

double

8

floating point

char

char

1

character

string

char (array)

>1

character

30

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

address

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

void *

Version 1.4.14
Page 31 of 314

4

pointer

Table 5. Default primitive data types
A data type with a base type of ‘character’ is considered a string if the byte size is set to greater than 1.
The byte size value in this case is otherwise unused by the application. The application treats a string as
an array of characters. An array of data type ‘string’ is treated specially by the application. See
paragraph 4.5.1.1 for details.
To the application a pointer represents an address and the actual data type and C type names are
irrelevant. However, the application does allow creation of pointers with distinctive names. This is
useful, such as in a generated header file to create typedef statements for subsequent use in
assigning data types to variables (versus using the void * data type and type casting each variable
appropriately). The application allows creation of any number of pointer data types.
In a data table, when a data type column cell is selected it displays a drop down menu showing the data
types. The data types available depend on the usage. In general, in a structure table the data types
include primitive types and the names of structures that are not referenced in the hierarchy of the
structure being edited (this prevents creating a circular reference). If the structure variable has a bit
length or enumeration value then the data types available are limited to primitive types with an integer
base type (signed or unsigned). For a command argument only primitive types are displayed, and if the
argument has an enumeration value then the data types are limited to primitive types that have an
integer base type (signed or unsigned).
The data type manager (paragraph 4.9.3.11) is used to create, modify, and delete the primitive data
types.

4.5.5

Bit fields

Variables with an integer (signed or unsigned) data type may be assigned as bit fields. A bit field is
identified by having a value entered in the structure data table’s Bit Length column. Variables with bit
lengths specified that are co-located in the table and have the same data type are assumed to be packed
together; i.e., these variables occupy the same byte or bytes. The number of variables and bits that are
packed is based on the data type’s byte size and the bit length of each variable. The bits representing a
variable must be contained within a single data type’s set of bits. For example, a uint16 is two bytes, or
16 bits, so bit field variables totaling 16 or fewer bits are packed. If three variables of type uint16 are colocated, with bit lengths of 2, 12, and 5, then the first two variables are packed together (2 + 12 < 16),
and the third variable occupies its own pair of bytes since its 5 bits won’t fit within the first packed pair’s
2 unused bits.
Bit-packed variables must have the same telemetry downlink rate. Since the variables are packed
together they are downlinked together, even if only a subset of the variables is desired. The table editor
accounts for bit-packing by enforcing a common rate among variables that are packed together. In
other words, it changes the rates, if needed, of packed variables so that they match. The check for, and
update to, a common rate takes place each time an edit is made to the table. In order to prevent two
variables from being packed together a padding variable must be added between them with the
appropriate bit length to ensure the two variables no longer fit within the bit size of the variables’ data
type.
When transferring variables, such as between trees in the link manager or between the variable tree
and messages in the telemetry manager, those that are packed together are automatically moved as a
unit, even if not explicitly selected.

31

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

4.5.6

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 32 of 314

Enumerations

Enumerations allow associating a text label with an integer value, and optionally other attributes.
Enumerations are useful, for example, in displays, since descriptive label text can be substituted for an
ambiguous numeric value.
The format for an enumeration is as follows:
<1st enum value>  <1st enum label> [ ]
[ <2nd enum value>  < 2nd enum label> [ ]][[…] [ 
 < nth enum label> [ ]]]
The enumeration value/label and pair separator characters are at the discretion of the user. The
application detects these characters automatically.
The label can contain multiple attributes (e.g., color, limit, etc.) – use the value/label separator character
to delineate each attribute. Below is an example of an enumeration with three possible values (0, 1, and
2):
0 | Off | red, 1 | On | green, 2 | Standby | yellow
In this example the enumerated values 0, 1, and 2 correspond to the labels “Off”, “On”, and “Standby”
and the colors “red”, “green”, and “yellow” respectively. The value/label separator is the “|” character,
and the pair separator is the comma (“,”). Any spaces and/or tabs bounding the separator characters
are ignored.
The structure and command tables contain an enumeration column by default. The enumeration’s
integer value is the value of the parameter described in the same row of the table (the variable name for
a structure table and the argument name for a command table). The enumeration parameter’s data
type must be an integer type (signed or unsigned). The structure and command table editors enforce
this constraint by not allowing text to be entered into an enumeration cell for which the associated data
type is not an integer, and by only displaying integer types in the data type cell if the associated
enumeration cell is not blank. Data type and enumeration column associations are determined by their
respective input type designation (see paragraph 4.7) and are paired based on their order in the table’s
type definition. Command tables may have one or more command arguments, each with a data type
and enumeration (see paragraph 4.5.1.2); these are automatically paired when both are present in a
given argument. The EDS and XTCE XML conversions (see paragraphs 4.9.3.8.2 and 4.9.3.8.3) also check
that the data type is valid for an enumeration, generating an error message if an enumeration is
associated with a non-integer data type.

4.5.7

Macros

A macro is a text string used to represent a number or text. Once defined, a macro can be used to
replace part or all of the contents of a data table cell. This allows a commonly used string of text to be
defined once, then used in as many tables and table cells as desired. If the text subsequently needs to
be altered then only the macro’s definition need be changed, instead of having to locate and change
each table cell where the text is found. An example for such usage would be an enumeration used in
multiple cells and/or tables.
Macros are created and their values set or altered using the macro editor, described in paragraph
4.9.3.12. A macro name, when entered into a cell, must be bounded on either side by a pair of ‘#’
characters (##, with no intervening spaces) in order for the macro to be recognized. Text that’s entered
into a cell bounded by the macro delimiters is only recognized as a macro if the macro is defined. If the
macro isn’t recognized then the characters are treated as any other text string. If the macro is
32

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 33 of 314

subsequently defined the cell automatically recognizes the text string as a macro. Macros can also be
entered using the Insert macro command in the table editor; see paragraph 4.9.3.2.2.6.
A special type of macro is the sizeof(data type) call. The sizeof() call returns the size in bytes of the
specified primitive or structure data type. sizeof() can be used in the same locations as a macro. The
macro identifier characters (##) are not used with the sizeof() call.
Multiple macros can be inserted into a cell. However, a macro can’t be inserted within another macro
(the macro into which the second macro is inserted is no longer recognized as a macro in this case).
Text containing a macro and/or sizeof() call is evaluated as a mathematical expression if the resulting
expansion of the macro(s) and sizeof() call(s) in the text is in a valid expression format. Mathematical
expressions may contain numbers (including floating point values), the operators ‘+’ (addition or sign,
based on context), - (subtraction or sign, based on context), ‘*’ (multiplication), and ‘/’ (division),
parentheses (‘(‘ and ‘)’) for nesting expressions, and spaces (which are ignored).
As an example assume two macros are defined, MACRO_A with a value of “2” and MACRO_B with a
value of “3”. The text “(##MACRO_A## + 4) / ##MACRO_B”, when the macros are expanded, is “(2 + 4) /
3”. Since this is a valid mathematical expression the resulting text is “2” since (2 + 4) / 3 = 2. Multiple
expressions can exist in the same text if each is separated from the other by a comma (,). For example,
the text “#MACRO_A, sizeof(float) * 3” when expanded is “2, 4 * 3” (using the value for MACRO_A
stated previously and assuming a float is 4 bytes). Each portion of the text, when separated at the
comma, is a valid mathematical expression, so the resulting text is “2, 12”. This format is useful when
setting the array size for a multi-dimensional array variable.
If the mouse pointer is hovered over a cell containing a macro a tool tip pop up appears displaying the
contents of the cell with each macro name replaced by its value. All of the macros in a data table can be
temporarily replaced by their corresponding values using the Show macros command in the table
editor; see paragraph 4.9.3.2.2.7.
When a table’s data is retrieved for use in a script or via the web server the option exists to retain the
macro names in place of the macro values. See paragraphs 4.10 and 4.9.1.6 for details. An example of
use for this is when creating C header files, where a #define statement is used to set a constant that
determines array variable size(s). The macro name can be used to set the #define constant’s name
and value. In the array definition(s) the macro name is retained instead of the using the value so that
the #define constant determines the array size (note that the macro delimiter characters must be
removed in this example).

4.6

Data Fields

Data fields are input fields created by the user for entering information associated with the component
to which the field belongs. The fields are assigned names and an input type that constrains the values
that can be entered into the field. Data fields can be associated with a project’s data tables, groups, and
to the project as a whole.
A data field can be used to enter a piece of information for a data table that doesn’t fit with a table’s
row and column format. An example is a message identification (ID) number for a root structure table –
the message ID applies to the entire table, not a specific row within it. A column could be added for
information such as the message ID, but having the same value repeated for each row is both wasteful
in storage as well as prone to errors (if every value doesn’t match). Any number of data fields (including
none) can be associated with each table. Default data fields may be assigned to a table type, so that
every table created of that type automatically has the default fields in place. Fields can also be assigned
to individual tables – there is no requirement for the tables to have the same fields.

33

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 34 of 314

Similarly, table groups can be assigned data fields. For example, a group can be created that consists of
all of the tables for a specific CFS application, so that the group represents the application. Applications
have data associated with them that isn’t appropriate for storage in a table, such as the application
schedule rate or execution time. In this case a data field can be assigned to the group to hold the
information. Groups designated as CFS applications are automatically assigned certain data fields; see
paragraph 4.9.3.9.
Some data associated with a project is applicable to the entire project. Examples include the project’s
name and description, or the number of central processing units (CPUs) supported. For these cases the
project-level data fields are appropriate. Paragraph 4.9.3.15 provides information on adding data fields
at the project level.

4.6.1

Data field editor

This section provides details on use of the data field editor (Figure 7). See paragraph 4.9.3.10.4.1 for
information regarding adding default data fields to table types, paragraph 4.9.3.2.5.1 for information on
adding fields to a particular table, and paragraph 4.9.3.15 for information on adding project-level fields.
In each case the editor operation is the same.

Figure 7. Data field editor
There are five or six columns in the field editor (depending on context):
Field Name

This is the name of the data field. The name can be of any length and can contain letters,
numerals, and punctuation characters. When the data field is displayed the field name is
the label shown immediately to the left of the input field that is used to contain the field’s
value. The field name is also used if the data field is referenced from a script (see
paragraph 4.10). The field name is required.

Description The field description is use to describe the content of the data field. The description
appears as tool tip text whenever the mouse pointer hovers over the field in a table,
group, or table type editor. HTML tags may be entered to provide formatting for the
displayed tool tip text. This column may remain blank.
Size

The field size defines the width, in characters, of the data field’s input text field. Due to
padding and font differences, the actual field width may appear slightly larger. The size
must be a positive integer, and is required. If a boolean input type or one with selection
items is used in the Input Type column then the size is ignored; a boolean field is

34

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 35 of 314

displayed as a check box, and the longest selection item determines the combo box width
for a field with selection items.
Input Type

The field input type constrains the type of value entered into the data field’s input text
field. If the value entered into the data field doesn’t conform to field’s specified input
type then a warning message dialog is displayed and the field reverts to its previous value.
The input types are selectable from the combo box pull-down menu that appears when a
cell in the Input Type column is selected. See paragraph 4.7 for information on the
available input types. A field with a boolean input type is displayed as a check box. The
input type defaults to “text.”

Required

The Required column displays a check box, initially unselected. Selecting the check box
indicates that the field is required. When the field is displayed in the table or table editor
the input text field is highlighted in yellow as long as the field’s input text field value is
empty. The application does not enforce the user to input data into the fields marked
“required”; the highlighting is used merely as a reminder that the field value is considered
necessary and should be filled. A boolean (check box) data field does not display the
highlighting.

Applicability This column only appears when assigning default data fields in the table type editor for a
structure table type, or when editing the fields for a prototype or root structure table.
If the data field editor is invoked from the table type editor then it allows defining fields
that are propagated to new and existing structure tables. Select the applicability for a
field from the combo box pull down menu that appears when the applicability cell is
selected. All tables indicates that the field will be added to all structure tables (root and
child tables), Roots only implies that only root tables have the field added, and Children
only means that only child tables have the field added. The default is All tables.
If the data field editor is invoked from a prototype or root structure table then all fields
assigned to the table, regardless of the applicability setting, are displayed in the editor.
For example, if the table has both Roots only and Children only fields assigned then only
one of these types is displayed in the table’s editor since a table can only be a root or a
child, but not both. However, a table can change from a root to a child, and vice versa;
when this happens the types of fields that are displayed are changed to match. The field
editor displays all of the fields, whether applicable or not, so that these can be altered by
the user.
The order that the rows appear in the field editor determines the order of appearance in the table
editor, group manager, or table type editor. Field definition rows may be rearranged as desired by first
selecting a cell in one or more rows, then pressing the Up or Down buttons to move the selected row
relative to the ones not selected. The editor columns can be sorted as described in paragraph 4.4;
however, the sorted order does not dictate the field display order.
Line separators and line breaks may be inserted as rows using the Separator and Break buttons
respectively. Without these breaks the data fields, when displayed in a table, group manager, or table
type editor, are arranged end to end, wrapping to the next line when the width of the editor is reached.
The line break forces the next data field to the next row regardless of the editor width constraint. The
line separator does the same, except that a dividing line is drawn between the rows where the separator
is inserted. These breaks can be used to aid in grouping related data fields.
The field editor button commands are described below:

35

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 36 of 314

Ins Row

The editor is initially empty unless the table editor, group manager, or table type editor
from which it’s invoked has any previously defined fields. To add a field first select the
Ins Row button; a new field definition row is inserted into the editor. Additional rows
can be added in the same manner. The insertion point is dependent on the currently
selected row in the editor; if no row is selected then the new row is added at the
bottom. The empty row has the Field Name and Size columns highlighted in yellow.
The highlighting indicates that these columns are required and must have values
assigned.

Del Row

One or more field definition rows may be deleted by first selecting a cell in the target
row(s), then pressing the Del Row button. The selection of multiple rows is constrained
to contiguous rows; i.e., rows cannot be skipped.

Up

The order that the rows appear in the field editor determines the order of appearance
in the table editor, group manager, or table type editor. Field definition rows may be
rearranged as desired by first selecting a cell in one or more rows, then pressing the Up
button to move the selected row(s) up a row relative to the ones not selected.

Down

Similar to the Up button action, except that selected row(s) are moved down a row
relative to the ones not selected.

Separator

Inserts a line separator below the currently selected field’s row.

Break

Inserts a line break below the currently selected field’s row.

Undo

Undoes the last action performed (typing, paste, insert, delete, redo, etc.).

Redo

Reverses the last action undone (typing, paste, insert, delete, redo, etc.).

Update

Applies the data field definitions currently displayed in the field editor to the table
editor, group manager, or table type editor from which the field editor was invoked.
Any existing fields that are in the table editor, group manager, or table type editor are
deleted and replaced by the new definitions. However, these changes are not stored in
the database – this is only accomplished when the Store button in the table editor,
group manager, or table type editor is selected.

Close

Closes the field editor window. If any changes made have not been applied using the
Update button then a dialog appears allowing the user to confirm discarding the
updates or to cancel closing the editor.

4.7

Input Types

Data table columns and data fields are assigned an input type in the table type editor (see paragraph
4.9.3.10) and the data field editor (see paragraph 4.6.1) respectively. The input type constrains the type
of value entered into a data table cell or data field. Leading and trailing white space characters (spaces,
tabs, etc.) are ignored and eliminated when the text is formatted (except for the two Text input types
that specifically preserve these characters; spaces between characters in a text string are always
retained). Leading plus (+) signs and zeroes are allowed for non-negative integer and floating point
values, but are ignored and eliminated.
Some input types constrain the allowable values to one or more selection items (the Variable reference
type, for example, and custom input types defined by the user that are provided a selection item list).
The list items are displayed in a drop down menu in the table cell or data field. An empty cell/field is an
allowable entry for input types with selection items and a blank item is automatically prepended to the
list. These cells and fields use an item matching feature that allows for quickly pruning the selection
item list based on the characters entered into the field or cell. As the user enters text those list items
36

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 37 of 314

not matching the text are removed from the list. Wildcard characters are allowed. A ‘?’ matches a
single character and a ‘*’ matches one or more characters. The matching operation assumes a ‘*’ is at
the end of the entered text. Matching is case sensitive. For example, given the list below, if the match
criteria entered is ‘*az’ then the first four items constitute a match, whereas the remaining two items do
not.
az
azq
a,az,b[0]
a,az,b[1]
b,Az
b,a,z
A blank item is always retained as the first item in the list. If editing ends (e.g., by selecting another field
or cell) then the first item in the list that matches the current match text is entered into the field/cell. If
no item in the list matches the match text then the field/cell is blanked. The match text can be used to
reduce the number of items in the list, then the mouse or keyboard (i.e., arrow keys) used to select an
item from the list.
Customized input types may be defined using the input type editor; see paragraph 4.9.3.12.
In the table type or data field editor select the row in the Input Type column corresponding to the data
table column or data field. A combo box pull down menu appears with the input types, both default and
custom, listed in alphabetical order. The default input types are:
Alphanumeric

This type allows letters, numerals, and underscore characters. A numeral may
not begin the text string. Alphanumeric text is appropriate for variable
names.

Alphanumeric (multi)

Allows multiple Alphanumeric inputs, separated by one or more white space
character(s).

Argument name

Special format used to designate a command table argument name column.
This type has the same constraints as the Alphanumeric type.

Array index

Special format used to designate the array size column. Allows one or more
integer values (each greater than 1), separated by commas. For the array size
column each value represents an array dimension size (e.g., if the array size is
2, 3, 4 then the associated array size is defined by arrayName[2][3][4]).

Bit length

Special format used to designate the structure table bit length column. This
type has the same constraints as the Positive integer type.

Boolean

A check box is used to represent data table cells and data fields of this type.

Command code

Special format used to designate the command table command code column.
This type has the same constraints as the Hexadecimal type.

Command name

Special format used to designate the command table command name column.
This type has the same constraints as the Alphanumeric type.

Command reference

Displays a drop down menu containing information for every command in the
project (name, code, table, and number of arguments). Only a command
from the list, or no selection, is allowed.

Description

Special format used to designate a description column. This type has the
same constraints as the Text type.
37

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 38 of 314

Enumeration

Special format used to designate a column containing enumerated values.
This type allows letters, numerals, and punctuation characters.

Floating point

This type allows floating point values to be entered; i.e., values with decimal
components in the form “#.###” (e.g., 3.14).

Hexadecimal

This type allows only hexadecimal digits to be entered (0 – 9, A – F, and a – f).
The hexadecimal digits may optionally be preceded by “0x”.

Hexadecimal range

Allows one or two Hexadecimal values. If two values are entered they must
be separated by a hyphen (-).

Integer

The integer data type allows input of any integer value: positive, negative, or
zero.

Integer > 1

Only integer values greater than 1 are allowed for this type.

Maximum

Special format used to designate a column containing maximum values. This
type allows boolean, integer, floating point, and hexadecimal values
depending on the data type associated with it. If the associated data type is
missing or blank then the maximum value cell is blanked and cannot be
edited. The maximum column is automatically paired with a minimum
column (if present); if multiple minimum columns are present then pairing is
done in order of column appearance in the table type definition. When paired
the minimum value is constrained to be less than or equal to the maximum
value.

Message name & ID

Used to designate a table column or data field as representing a telemetry or
command message name and ID. The contents must be in the format
[] . The field may be blank, contain only the
message ID, or contain the message name and ID (examples:
GNC_NOOP_MID 0x1234 or 0xa001). The constraints for the message
name are identical to the Alphanumeric type. The constraints for the
message ID are identical to the Hexadecimal type, except that the ‘#’
character may be appended to the ID number. This character flags the
message ID as being protected from overwriting by the automatic message ID
assignment command. Assigning this type to a table column or data field
enables the application to recognize the information as representing a
message name and ID; see paragraph 4.9.3.14.3 for more information on how
this input type is used.

Message reference

This type causes a combo box pull down menu to appear when the table cell
or data field is selected. The menu contains all of the currently defined
message ID names, associated message ID numbers, and the message owners
(table, group, or telemetry scheduler) in the format  (ID:
, owner: .

Minimum

Special format used to designate a column containing minimum values. This
type allows boolean, integer, floating point, and hexadecimal values
depending on the data type associated with it. If the associated data type is
missing or blank then the minimum value cell is blanked and cannot be edited.
The minimum column is automatically paired with a maximum column (if
present); if multiple maximum columns are present then pairing is done in

38

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 39 of 314

order of column appearance in the table type definition. When paired the
minimum value is constrained to be less than or equal to the maximum value.
Negative float

Similar to the Floating point type, except that only negative values are
allowed.

Negative integer

Similar to the Integer type, except that only negative integer values are
allowed.

Non-negative float

Similar to the Floating point type, except that only zero or negative values are
allowed.

Non-negative integer

Similar to the Integer type, except that only zero or negative values are
allowed.

Non-zero hexadecimal

Similar to the Hexadecimal type, except that a value of zero (0x0) is excluded.

Number

Identical to the floating point type, except that a trailing ‘.0’ isn’t added for
integer values.

Positive float

Similar to the Floating point type, except that only positive, non-zero values
are allowed.

Positive integer

Similar to the Integer type, except that only positive, non-zero integers are
allowed.

Primitive

This type causes a combo box pull down menu to appear when the cell is
selected. The menu contains all of the primitive data types. This selection is
not available in the data field editor.

Primitive & Structure

This type causes a combo box pull down menu to appear when the cell is
selected. The menu contains all of the primitive data types along with the
names of all the prototype structure tables. This is primarily for use in
defining the Data Type column in structure tables but can be used elsewhere.
This selection is not available in the data field editor.

Rate

Special format used to designate telemetry sample rate columns. Allows
positive integer values and values in the form “1 / #” where # is a positive
integer value.

Text

This type allows letters, numerals, and punctuation characters. Text is the
default data type.

Text (multi-line)

This type allows letters, numerals, punctuation, and new line characters, the
latter allowing for multiple lines of text in a data field. The field initially
displays as a single row, but the number of rows increases as new line
characters are entered. This type behaves identically to Text if used as a table
column’s input type.

Text (spaces)

Identical to the Text type except that leading and trailing white space
characters are preserved.

Text (multi-line, spaces) Identical to the Text (multi-line) type except that leading and trailing white
space characters are preserved. This type behaves identically to Text (spaces)
if used as a table column’s input type.
Units

Special format used to designate a column containing units (e.g., degrees F,
rpm, m/s). This type has the same constraints as the Text type.
39

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 40 of 314

Variable name

Special format used to designate a variable name column. This type has the
same constraints as the Alphanumeric type.

Variable path

This is a special format valid only in a structure table type definition. If a
column in the table is assigned this type then the table’s path is combined
with the variable name and data type to produce the variable’s full path. The
column can be edited, in which case the manually entered value overrides the
automatically generated path. The characters that separate each structure
reference in the path, and the data types and variable names, and whether or
not the data type is displayed, are set using the Show variables command
menu command; see paragraph 4.9.3.17.

Variable reference

Displays a drop down menu containing every structure and variable in the
project. Only a structure or variable name from the list, or no selection, is
allowed.

XML: Application ID

Name of the variable in the telemetry and command header structure tables
that contains the application ID. This type has the same constraints as the
Alphanumeric type. Used during XML import and export to determine the
location from which to retrieve or where to store the application ID.

XML: Command Header Name of the structure table representing the command header. This type has
the same constraints as the Alphanumeric type. Used during XML import and
export to indicate the command header table.
XML: Function Code

Name of the variable in the command header structure table that contains the
command function code. This type has the same constraints as the
Alphanumeric type. Used during XML import and export to determine the
location from which to retrieve or where to store the command function
code.

XML: Telemetry Header Name of the structure table representing the telemetry header. This type has
the same constraints as the Alphanumeric type. Used during XML import and
export to indicate the telemetry header table.

4.8

Data Streams

CCDD supports the definition and use of multiple data streams. In this context a data stream refers to
an uplink/downlink path; for example, serial, Ethernet, radio, etc. Each data stream has its own set of
rate parameters (see paragraph 4.9.4.4). Addition of a stream is accomplished by adding a new sample
rate column to a structure table definition (see paragraph 4.9.3.10 for information on altering a table
type). A rate column is designated by assigning the column an input type of ‘Rate’ (see paragraph 4.7
for information on input types). A telemetry parameter can be assigned a rate in each of the defined
data streams. The link manager (paragraph 4.9.4.1) allows linking telemetry parameters for allocation in
the downlink messages. These linkages are specific to a data stream. The data stream can be assigned a
name different from its associated rate column name in the rate parameter dialog (paragraph 4.9.4.4).

4.9

Command Menu

The following paragraphs describe the main application window’s menu commands.

4.9.1

File

The File menu provides selections for connecting to the database, altering the database connection
properties, reading, printing, and searching the application logs, enabling the web server, updating the
application’s overall appearance, and exiting the program.
40

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 41 of 314

4.9.1.1 Select user
When the Select user command is issued, if any table editor or the table type editor is open and has
unsaved changes then a confirmation dialog first appears, allowing the user to choose whether to
discard the unsaved changes and continue with the user change, or to cancel the user change. If there
are no unsaved changes or if the user confirms discarding the changes then the editors are closed and
the Select User dialog is displayed. The dialog allows entering the user name and/or user password.
The appearance of the dialog is dependent on whether or not a connection is currently established with
the PostgreSQL server. If no connection exists then the dialog appears as in Figure 8, and both the user
and user password must be entered. If a connection to the server does exist (i.e., if changing to another
user from one already connected to the server) then the dialog appears similar to that in Figure 9. For
this case the user text field is replaced by radio buttons providing an alphabetized list of the users
registered in the PostgreSQL server.
Select or type in a user name and, if required by the server, provide the password in the Password field,
then select the Okay button. An attempt is then made to establish a connection as the indicated user
with the most recently selected or open project’s database. If a project’s database is open when the
user is changed and the newly selected user does not have access privileges to this project then the
database is closed. Select the Cancel button to exit the dialog without changing the user.

Figure 8. Select User dialog (no server connection)

Figure 9. Select User dialog (server connected)
4.9.1.2 Database server
The Database server command is used to set the PostgreSQL database connection properties. When
the command is issued, if any table editor or the table type editor is open and has unsaved changes then
a confirmation dialog first appears, allowing the user to choose whether to discard the unsaved changes
and continue with the server change, or to cancel the server change. If there are no unsaved changes or
41

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 42 of 314

if the user confirms discarding the changes then the editors are closed and the Database Server dialog is
displayed (see Figure 10). The dialog allows entering the PostgreSQL server host name and server port
number, and to enable or disable secure sockets layer (SSL) authentication.

Figure 10. Database server dialog
The dialog allows selection of a PostgreSQL server on the local or a remote host. Enter the server host
name and the server port number, set the Enable SSL check box appropriate to the target connection’s
encryption requirements, and then select the Okay button. The host text field uses auto-completion to
fill in the host string. The previous 30 host names are remembered by default, including those from
previous sessions (the number of remembered host names can be changed via the Preferences dialog).
If the host field is empty then the default host name, localhost, is used. The default port number for the
PostgreSQL server is 5432. An attempt is then made to establish a connection to the server on the new
host as the current user. Select the Cancel button to exit the dialog without changing the database
server properties.
The SSL selection must match that of the target or else the connection will not be established. Note:
When SSL is enabled no certificate validation is performed by the JDBC driver.
4.9.1.3 Read log
The Read log command causes the Open Event Log file selection dialog to be displayed. Navigate to the
location of the desired CCDD event log file, highlight it using the mouse or keyboard controls, and select
Open to open the log in a window similar to the main program window. The log file names are in the
format CCDD-YYYYMMDD-hhmmss.log, where YYYYMMDD is the year, month, and day, and hhmmss is
the hour, minute, and second when the log was created. Select Cancel to close the file selection dialog
without opening a log file. See paragraph 4.2.5 for details on the event log columns and filter selections.
The log window may be resized. The Search button displays the event log search dialog (see paragraph
4.9.1.5); the log can be searched for a user-specified text string. Select the Print button to open a
printer selection dialog in order to print a copy of the log to the selected printer. Select Close to close
the log window.
4.9.1.4 Print log
The Print log command causes a dialog to appear allowing selection of a printer in order to print a copy
of the current session’s event log; i.e., the log displayed in the main application window.
4.9.1.5 Search log
The Search log dialog provides a means of searching the current session’s event log for a specified text
string (see Figure 11). Case sensitivity for the search is governed by the Ignore text case check box.
The Allow regular expression check box, when checked, allows the use of a regular expression to define
the search pattern in the search text field. A regular expression can be formulated to find multiple
matching conditions (for example, the search for a.c would match any string that has a single character
between the characters ‘a’ and ‘c’). Information regarding the use of regular expressions is beyond the
42

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 43 of 314

scope of this document; however, resources and tutorials can be found online. When unchecked, the
search text is matched as typed in the search text field.
Enter the search text in the input field and select the Search button. The search results are displayed in
the table at the bottom of the search dialog. The first column, Log Index, shows the log entry’s index
number where a match is found. The second column, Column Name, provides the column where the
match occurs in the event log. The last column, Context, displays the string from log entry containing
the search text, with the search text highlighted. The full length of the log message text is searched (and
displayed, if a match is found), even if the message is truncated in the event log due to length
restrictions. Pressing the Ctrl-F key sequence while the main application window has the focus also
displays the event log search dialog.
The search text field uses auto-completion to fill in the search string. The previous search strings (those
for the event log, tables, and scripts) are remembered, including those from previous sessions. The
number of remembered search strings can be changed via the Preferences dalog, and defaults to 30.
Case sensitivity for auto-completion is based on the Ignore text case check box selection state.
The input text can be changed and the Search button pressed again to initiate another search of the log.
The search results can be output to a file or printer by selecting the Print button. To exit the search
dialog select the Close button.

Figure 11. Search event log dialog
4.9.1.6 Web server
The embedded web server allows web-based applications access to a project’s data. The web server
must be started before any requests are made. If the application is running the Enable server command
(paragraph 4.9.1.6.1) is used to start and stop the server. The server is disabled by default. Command
line options are available to allow the server to be started at program start-up, with or without the GUI
enabled. See Table 1 for the web server command line arguments.
43

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 44 of 314

All requests are directed to the currently open project database. The query format is:
host:port/component>
The host name is the network name or IP address on which the CCDD application, with the web server
active, is operating (‘localhost’ if active on the same machine as the requesting application). The port
number is the port to which the server is assigned to listen (the default is 7070; this can be changed via
command line command or menu option). The component, attribute, and name portions of the request
determine the data returned. Data for tables, groups, applications, and the telemetry and application
scheduler is available. Data may be requested for a single table, group, or application, or for all of the
given component. Lists containing the names of all tables, groups, or applications can be requested.
Table 6 contains the recognized component, attribute, and name combinations.
The data is returned to the requesting application in JSON “key”:”value” pair format per the Output
column in Table 6. For the initial request the user is prompted for a valid PostgreSQL server user name
and password. Additionally, this user must have read access to the project open in the CCDD application
hosting the web server.
If a table contains macro references then the table values default to replacing the macro names with the
corresponding macro values, as defined in the macro editor (see paragraphs 4.5.7 and 4.9.3.12 for more
information relating to macros). Requests can be made to return the table data with the macro names
displayed in place of the macro values by appending ;macro (or ;macros – either is case insensitive) at
the end of the name portion of the request, or at the end of the attribute portion if there is no name
portion. For example, the request table?=;macro returns the table data for all tables with the macro
names displayed, and the request telemetry?;macros returns the telemetry information for all tables
with the macro names displayed in those JSON “key”:”value” pairs that are taken directly from table
cells.
Variable paths, formatted as single strings, can be requested as part of a structure table’s data (see
paragraph 4.9.3.17 for more information on variable paths). The variable paths are attached to the
table data as an additional column named “Variable Path”. The format for returning the paths is similar
to the variable command (see Table 6):
;path<,,,>
If the variable path member separator character(s), hide data type flag, and data type and variable name
separator character(s) are not provided then the default values – “_”, false, and ”_”, respectively – are
used. The command is case insensitive and must be placed at the end of the name portion of the
request, or at the end of the attribute portion if there is no name portion. It may be used in conjunction
with the macro command described above. For example, the request:
table?data=;path,”_”,”false”,”.”
would convert the variable path rootStruct,parentStruct.structVar,int.primVar to
rootStruct_parentStruct.structVar_int.primVar, and the request:
table?data=;path,”_”,true,”_”
would convert the variable path rootStruct,parentStruct.structVar,int.primVar to
rootStruct_structVar_primVar.

44

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Request
Component

Attribute

Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Returned Information
Type, description, size (if a structure),
data, and data fields for the specified
data table (table name is case
insensitive), or for all tables if table
name is omitted

all (or blank)



table

data

description

Version 1.4.14
Page 45 of 314

Output1,2
{"Table Name":"table name","Table
Type":"type","Table
Description":"description","Table Size":size,"Table
Data":[{“first row column name”:“first row column
value”,<,”first row next column name:”first row
next column value{“second row column
name”:“second row column value”,<,”second row
next column name:”second row next column
value”<,…>>}<,…>],”Data Field”:[{"Field
Name":”field name”,“Description”:”field
description”,”Size”:”field character length”,“Input
Type”:”input data type”,”Required”:”true or
false”,”Applicability”:”field
applicability”,“Value”:”field value”}<,next field’s
data…>]}



Data for the specified data table (table
{“Table Name”:“table name”,"Table Data":[{“first
name is case insensitive), or for all tables row column name”:“first row column value”,<,”first
if table name is omitted
row next column name:”first row next column
value{“second row column name”:“second row
column value”,<,”second row next column
name:”second row next column value”<,…>>}<,…>]}



Description for the specified table (table {“Table Name”:“table name”,"Table
name is case insensitive), or for all tables Description":"description"}
if table name is omitted

45

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Request
Component

Attribute

Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Returned Information

Version 1.4.14
Page 46 of 314

Output1,2

Data field information for the specified
table (table name is case insensitive), or
for all tables if table name is omitted

{“Table Name”:“table name”,”Data Field”:[{"Field
Name":”field name”,“Description”:”field
description”,”Size”:”field character length”,“Input
Type”:”input data type”,”Required”:”true or
false”,”Applicability”:”field
applicability”,“Value”:”field value”}<,next field’s
data…>]}

fields



names



Names of all tables of the specified table
type (table name is case insensitive), or
for all table types if table type is omitted

{“Table Type”:”table type”, “Table Names”:[“table
name”<,”next table name”<,…>>]}
{“Table Name”:"table name",”Byte Size”:size}



Size (in bytes) for the specified structure
table (table name is case insensitive), or
for all tables if table name is omitted

,,
,<,search
table column
names>

Search for the specified text in the
project database tables. Set the ignore
case flag to true to ignore case when
matching the text (defaults to false if not
provided). Set the allow regular
expression flag to allow a regular
expression in the search text. Set the
data table cells only flag to return only
those matches within the data table
cells (otherwise matches in the internal
tables are returned as well; defaults to
false if not provided). Optionally
constrain the search to specific data
table columns by appending a commaseparated list of column names (the
names are case sensitive)

[{“Table / Object”:”table
name”,”Location”:”location within
table”,”Context”:”table cell contents containing the
matching search text”}<,…>]

size

search

46

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Request
Component

Attribute

Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 47 of 314

Output1,2

Returned Information

proto_table

Same requests as for table above, except only table information for prototype tables is returned

root_table

Same requests as for table above, except only table information for root tables is returned

instance_table

Same requests as for table above, except only table information for instance tables is returned
Description, associated table(s), and
data field(s) for the specified group, or
for all groups if group name is omitted

{"Group Name":"group name","Group
Description":"description","Group Table":[“table
name”<,”next table name<,…>>”],”Group Data
Field”: [{"Field Name":”field
name”,“Description”:”field
description”,”Size”:”field character length”,“Input
Type”:”input data type”,”Required”:”true or
false”,”Applicability”:”field
applicability”,“Value”:”field value”}<,next field’s
data…>]}

all (or blank)



tables



Table(s) associated with the specified
group (group name is case sensitive), or
for all groups if group name is omitted

{"Group Name":"group name","Group
Table":[“table name”<,”next table name<,…>>”]}



Description for the specified group
(group name is case sensitive), or for all
groups if group name is omitted

{"Group Name":”group name”,”Group
Description”:”group description”}

Data field information for the specified
group (group name is case sensitive), or
for all groups if group name is omitted

{"Group Name":"group name",”Group Data Field”:
[{"Field Name":”field name”,“Description”:”field
description”,”Size”:”field character length”,“Input
Type”:”input data type”,”Required”:”true or
false”,”Applicability”:”field
applicability”,“Value”:”field value”}<,next field’s
data…>]}

Names of all groups

{"Group Names":["first group name"<,"second
group name"<,"…">>]}

group
description

fields

names



47

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Request
Component
application

Attribute

Name

Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Returned Information

Version 1.4.14
Page 48 of 314

Output1,2

Same requests as for group above, except only group information for groups representing a CFS application is returned

telemetry
scheduler

Telemetry scheduler's copy table entries
,
,
,


application

variable

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide

 or blank

,
,


{"Stream Name":"stream name","Header
Size":”size”,”Optimized”:”true or false”,"Copy
Table":[{”Input Message ID”:”input ID”,“Input
Offset”:”input byte offset”,”Output Message
ID”:”output ID”,“Output Offset”:”output byte
offset”,”Number of Bytes”:”output size in
bytes”,”Root Table”:”root table name”,“Variable
Path”:”variable path”}
<,next row<,…>>]}

Application scheduler's schedule table
entries

This command is currently ignored

The variable path and name in the
format used by the application paired
with the converted path and name
(dependent on the input parameters). If
no variable path and name is supplied
then every variable in the project along
with its converted form is returned

{“variable path and name (application
format)”:”variable path and name (user-specified
format)”[,…]}

48

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Request
Component

telemetry

command

Attribute

Name

<,
, >

all (or blank)



Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Returned Information

Version 1.4.14
Page 49 of 314

Output1,2

Structure table name, variable name,
data type, data stream information,
enumeration information, and all other
data associated with the variable for the
telemetered variables in the structure
tables belonging to the specified group
(or application), or for all structure
tables if group name is omitted. Filters
can be specified for the data stream
name and/or the sample rate so that
only those telemetered variables
matching the filter(s) are returned

{"Structure Table Name":"table name from which
the variable is taken",”Variable Name”:”variable
name”,"Data Type":"variable’s data type","Data
Streams":[{"Stream Name":"first stream’s
name","Sample Rate":"variable’s sample rate in
this stream"}<,next stream’s
data<,…>>],"Enumerations":[{"Enumeration
Name":"first enumeration’s name","Enumeration
Value":"first enumeration’s value"}<,next
enumeration’s data<,…>>]}

Command table name, command name,
command code, command description,
and for each of the command’s
arguments the argument name, data
type, enumeration, minimum value,
maximum value, and any other
argument data, for the commands in the
command tables belonging to the
specified group (or application), or for
all command tables if group name is
omitted

{"Command Table Name":"table name from which
the command is taken",”command name column
name”:”command name”, ”command code column
name”:”command code”,<”command description
column name”:”command
description”>,”Arguments”:[{"first argument’s
name column name”:”first argument’s name”,"first
argument’s data type column name”:”first
argument’s data type”,"first argument’s
enumeration column name”:”first argument’s
enumeration”,"first argument’s minimum value
column name”:”first argument’s minimum
value”,"first argument’s maximum value column
name”:”first argument’s maximum value”<,first
argument’s other column data>}<,next argument’s
data<,…>>]}

49

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Request
Component

Attribute

Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Returned Information

Version 1.4.14
Page 50 of 314

Output1,2

Table type definitions

{“Table Type Definition”:[{“Column Name”:,”type
name”,” Description”:”type description”,”Input
Type”:”input data type”,”Unique”:”true or
false”,”Required”:”true or false”,”Enable if
Structure”:”true or false”,”Enable if Pointer”:”true
or false”}]}

User-defined input type definitions

{“Input Type Definition”:[{"Type Name":"input type
name”,”Description”:”input type
description”,”RegEx Match”:”regular expression
constraining the entered values”,”Selection
Items”:”list of text strings from which to select,
separated by line feed characters”,”Value
Format”:”value format option: Text, Array,
Boolean, Float, Integer, or Hexadecimal”}<,next
input type definition<,…>>]}

Data type definitions

{“Data Type Definition”:[{"Type Name":"userdefined name”,”C Name”:”C-language
name”,”Size”:”size in bytes”,”Base Type”:”base
data type”}<,next data type definition<,…>>]}

Macro definitions

{“Macro Definition”: ”:[{“Macro Name":”macro
name",”Value”:"macro value”}<,next macro
definition<,…>>]}

Message ID owners, names, and values

{“Message ID Owner, Name, and Value”:
[{“Owner":”message ID owner",”Message ID
Name”:"message ID name”,”Message
ID”:"message ID value”}<,next message ID<,…>>]}

table_type

input_type

data_type

macro

message_id

50

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Request
Component

Attribute

Name

shutdown
1
2

Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Returned Information

Get the active project's information
(name, database name, description, lock
status, current user name, project
owner name, and project data fields)

project_info

authenticate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide

user name

user password

Determine if the specified user
credentials are valid for the currently
open project database

Version 1.4.14
Page 51 of 314

Output1,2
{"Project":"project name",”Database”:”database
name”,"Description":"project
description","Status":"locked or
unlocked","User":"user name",”Owner”:”owner
name”,”Project Data Field”:[ {"Field Name":”field
name”,“Description”:”field
description”,”Size”:”field character length”,“Input
Type”:”input data type”,”Required”:”true or
false”,”Applicability”:”field
applicability”,“Value”:”field value”}<,next field’s
data…>]}
true if the credentials are valid; false otherwise

Close the web server and project
database, and exit the CCDD application
Only those JSON “key”:”value” pairs that are members of a JSON array (i.e., that are enclosed by brackets ([]) in the output)
have their original order preserved; other pairs may appear in any order.
If Name is omitted in a table, proto_table, root_table, instance_table, group, or application request then a JSON array is
returned in the format [<,second output<,…>>], with each array member representing a table, group, or
application.
Table 6. Web data access commands

51

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 52 of 314

4.9.1.6.1 Enable server
Selecting the Enable server command toggles between starting and stopping the web server. When
enabled, the web server allows CCDD to respond to web-based queries. When disabled, the server
ignores web queries.
4.9.1.6.2 Select port
The Select port command displays a dialog (Figure 12) that allows selection of a port number for the
embedded web server. Enter the server port number, then select the Okay button. If the web server is
active then it’s automatically restarted using the new port number. Select the Cancel button to exit the
dialog without changing the server port.

Figure 12. Web Server dialog
4.9.1.7 Preferences
The Preferences command displays the Preferences dialog (Figure 13), which allows altering the
application’s display characteristics. This includes choosing the “look and feel” (L&F), fonts, colors, sizes,
and spacing values applied to the program’s GUI components. The dialog has a separate tab for each of
the selection types. Once updates to the preferences are completed press the Close button to exit the
dialog. The preference changes are saved so that the updated characteristics are used when the
application is opened again. See Appendix E.2 for details on the stored preferences.

Figure 13. Preferences dialog; look and feel preferences
4.9.1.7.1 L&F
The L&F can be changed via the L&F tab (Figure 13). L&Fs change the shape and color scheme of the
graphical components (see Figure 14), though the basic layout remains the same. The default is
52

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 53 of 314

“Metal”, the standard L&F provided with Java. The list of L&F selections displayed in the dialog is
dependent on the available L&Fs loaded on the host machine. When the radio button associated with
the desired L&F is selected the Preferences dialog, main application window, and any other open CCDD
windows are immediately redrawn to reflect the L&F chosen.

Figure 14. Example look and feel differences
4.9.1.7.2 Font
The Font tab displays the selection controls for the various fonts used in the application (Figure 15).

Figure 15. Font preferences
Each font is represented by a button with a sample of the font’s text beside it. Hovering the mouse
pointer over the font button displays a tool tip describing the font’s use in more detail. To alter a font
press its associated button – a font selection dialog appears (Figure 16). The font, style, and size are
selected from the lists; the Sample field displays a sample of text using the chosen font settings. Select
Update to change the selected font. The font change is implemented immediately in all of the
application’s open windows. Select Default to use the font’s default settings. Press the Close button to
exit the font selection dialog.

53

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 54 of 314

Figure 16. Font selection dialog
4.9.1.7.3 Color
The Color tab displays the selection controls for the various colors used in the application (Figure 17).

Figure 17. Color preferences
Each color is represented by a color box with a description beside it. Hovering the mouse pointer over
the color box or description displays a tool tip describing the color’s use in more detail. To alter a color
select its associated box – a color selection dialog appears (Figure 18). The actual appearance of the
color selection dialog varies based on the chosen L&F. However, the basic color selection for each is the
same – use the mouse to operation alter the color parameters via the dialog’s buttons, sliders, wheels,
input fields, etc. Select Update to change the selected color. The color change is implemented
54

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 55 of 314

immediately in all of the application’s open windows. Select Default to use the color’s default settings.
Press the Close button to exit the color selection dialog.

Figure 18. Color selection dialog
4.9.1.7.4 Size
The Size tab displays the selection controls for the various size values used in the application (Figure 19).

Figure 19. Size preferences
Each size value is represented by an input field with a description and default value button on either
side of it. Hovering the mouse pointer over the description or input field displays a tool tip describing
the size value’s use in more detail. The description includes the minimum and maximum values allowed.
To alter a size value enter a valid value into its associated input field. Selecting the size value’s
associated Default button (which displays the default value) enters the size value’s default value into
the input field. Select Update to implement the altered size value(s). Although size changes are
implemented immediately, these are not apparent until the size value is used (e.g., the log message
length applies to event messages subsequently logged).
55

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 56 of 314

4.9.1.7.5 Spacing
The Spacing tab displays the selection controls for the various spacing values used in the application
(Figure 21).

Figure 20. Spacing preferences
Each spacing value is represented by an input field with a description and default value button on either
side of it. Hovering the mouse pointer over the description or input field displays a tool tip describing
the spacing value’s use in more detail. The description includes the minimum and maximum values
allowed. To alter a spacing value enter a valid value into its associated input field. Selecting the spacing
value’s associated Default button (which displays the default value) enters the spacing value’s default
value into the input field. Select Update to implement the altered spacing value(s). As indicated by the
note at the bottom of the dialog changes to spacing values are not applied to the application’s open
windows. These must be closed and reopened to use the updated values. Since this includes the main
window, the application must be restarted in order for the spacing values to affect it.
4.9.1.7.6 Path
The Path tab displays the selection controls for the various folder paths used in the application (Figure
21).

56

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 57 of 314

Figure 21. Path preferences
Each path is represented by an input field with a description and path selection button on either side of
it. Hovering the mouse pointer over the description or input field displays a tool tip describing the
path’s use in more detail. To alter a path either enter it into its associated input field or press its
Select… button to display a folder chooser dialog; once selected in the dialog the path appears in the
input field. Select Update to implement the altered path(s). Paths can be absolute or relative. Relative
paths are based on the folder in which the application is executed. Note that path selection in other
dialogs (for example, the Script Manager or Open Event Log dialogs) updates the respective path if
changed in the dialog. Path selection via command line argument also updates the path preference.
The Script output path is a special case. It does not directly affect the output location of files generated
by scripts. Instead, a script may obtain the Script output path via an access method (see paragraph
4.10.7) and use it to set the location of any output files(s).
4.9.1.7.7 Other
The Other tab displays program preferences that don’t conform to those in the other tabs (Figure 22).

57

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 58 of 314

Figure 22. Other settings
Each setting is represented by an input field with a description and default selection button on either
side of it. Hovering the mouse pointer over the description or input field displays a tool tip describing
the setting’s use in more detail. To alter a setting value enter a valid value into its associated input field.
Selecting the setting’s associated Default button enters the setting’s default value into the input field.
Select Update to store the altered setting value(s).
4.9.1.8 Exit
Choosing the Exit command displays a dialog so that the user can confirm whether or not to exit the
application. Select Okay to exit CCDD. If there are unsaved changes to a table editor or the table type
editor then the user is queried whether or not to continue. If Okay is selected the open editors are
closed (any unsaved changes are discarded), the main application window is closed, and the application
exits. Select Cancel to close the dialog without exiting the application.

4.9.2

Project

The Project menu contains commands for interacting with the project databases.
Each project has a locked/unlocked status flag. This flag is checked by the application when attempting
to access a project. Project access is required for the Open, New, Rename, Copy, and Delete commands
described in this section. If the flag indicates the project is unlocked the command proceeds. If the flag
indicates the project is locked, the project access is denied and the specified operation is terminated.
Access failure results in display of a database error dialog and the failure is written to the event log. The
lock status is set to “locked” for an open project database. When the project database is closed (e.g.,
when exiting the CCDD application) the flag is set to “unlocked”. Abnormal termination of the CCDD
application can result in a project database retaining a locked status. The Unlock command (paragraph
4.9.2.9) allows clearing a project’s lock status.
Note: In the project dialogs below, only those project databases for which the current user is allowed
access are displayed.

58

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 59 of 314

4.9.2.1 Open
Selecting the Open command results in a dialog being displayed that shows the CCDD project databases,
along with their descriptions, that are available in the PostgreSQL server (see Figure 23). The currently
open project database is shown selected and grayed out. Other projects that are open in another
instance of the CCDD application are also grayed out and have their associated radio button disabled.
Select a project’s radio button and then the Open button to open the selected project’s database. The
currently open project is first closed, along with any open table or table type editors. If the editors have
any unsaved changes then a confirmation dialog appears, allowing the user to choose whether to
continue with the project change, discarding the unsaved changes, or to cancel the project change.
Select Cancel to allow the currently opened project to remain open.

Figure 23. Select Project dialog
4.9.2.2 Close
When the Close command is selected the currently open project database is closed, along with any open
data table or table type editors. If the editors have any unsaved changes then a confirmation dialog
appears, allowing the user to choose whether to discard the unsaved changes and continue with closing
the project, or to cancel closing the project.
4.9.2.3 New
The Create Project dialog (see Figure 24) appears when the New command is chosen, which allows
creation of a new CCDD project database. A project owner must be selected from the list of available
roles stored in the server, and a name supplied for the new project. Optionally, a description can be
entered for the project.
The choice of owner should take into account the number of users that require access to the project’s
database. If only a single user needs access then that user can be selected as the owner. If multiple
users need access then a group role should be created and this role assigned as the owner. All users
requiring access would then need to be made members of this group role. Note that any user with
super user status can access the project’s database regardless of the owner. See paragraph Error!
Reference source not found. for further information regarding setup of the PostgreSQL server.
The project name can contain any character except a semi-colon (;). The project name is used to create
the project’s PostgreSQL database name. To meet the PostgreSQL naming constraints all letters are
changed to lower case, any non-alphanumeric characters are converted to underscores, and an
underscore is prepended to the resulting name if it begins with a numeral. If the resulting database
59

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 60 of 314

name length exceeds 63 characters (the maximum allowed by PostgreSQL) then the name is truncated
to the maximum length. The project and derived database names must be unique; these may not be the
same as another project/database name existing in the server. The description can contain any
character and, optionally, can be formatted using HTML tags.

Figure 24. Create Project dialog

4.9.2.4 Rename
When the Rename command is selected the Rename Project dialog is displayed (see Figure 25). This
dialog allows an existing project to be renamed, its description to be altered, or both. When one of the
radio buttons representing a project’s database is selected the name and description appear in the fields
below the radio button panel. Projects that are open in another instance of the CCDD application
cannot be renamed and are grayed out with their radio button disabled. Only a project’s administrator
may rename a project, so radio buttons for projects for which the user is not an administrator are also
disabled. See paragraph 4.9.2.3 for constraints on the project name and description. When the Rename
button is selected the project and description are updated. If the currently open project is renamed any
open table editors are closed; if an editor has unstored changes then a dialog first appears allowing the
user to confirm discarding the changes or canceling the rename operation. Note that this dialog can, if
desired, be used to alter only the project’s description (the description can also be edited using the
Manage project fields command in the Data menu; see paragraph 4.9.3.15). Selecting the Cancel
button closes the dialog without making any alterations.

60

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 61 of 314

Figure 25. Rename Project dialog

4.9.2.5 Copy
When the Copy command selected the Copy Project dialog is displayed (see Figure 26). This dialog
allows an existing project’s database to be copied. Only a project’s administrator may copy a project –
the radio buttons for those projects which the user does not have administrator access are disabled.
The exception is that a user with read/write access may copy the currently open project. When one of
the radio buttons representing a project is selected the name and description appear in the fields below
the radio button panel. The project name has the text “_copy” automatically appended, though the
copy’s name and description can be altered as desired. See paragraph 4.9.2.3 for constraints on the
project name and description. The Append date and time to project name check box, if selected,
replaces the text “_copy” with the current date (year, month, and day) and time (hours, minutes, and
seconds) stamp. Deselecting the check box removes the data and time stamp and appends the text
“_copy” again. When the Copy button is selected the selected project’s database is copied, using the
copy name and description. Selecting the Cancel button closes the dialog without making a copy.

61

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 62 of 314

Figure 26. Copy Project dialog
4.9.2.6 Delete
The Delete command allows one or more project databases to be deleted. The Delete Project(s) dialog
(Figure 27) appears when the command is issued. Projects that are open, in this or another instance of
the CCDD application, cannot be deleted and are grayed out with their associated radio button disabled.
Only a project’s administrator may delete a project, so radio buttons for projects for which the user is
not an administrator are also disabled. After selecting a project (or projects) to delete, selecting the
Delete button removes the project database(s) from the server. Selecting the Cancel button exits the
dialog without deleting any projects. If Delete is selected a confirmation dialog is displayed for each
selected project; selecting Okay continues with the delete operation for that project, and Cancel ignores
the indicated project and does not delete it.

62

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 63 of 314

Figure 27. Delete Project dialog
4.9.2.7 Backup
The Backup command allows a user with read/write or administrator access to create a backup of the
currently open project’s database. A file selection dialog is displayed for choosing the location and
name of the backup file (Figure 28). The backup file extension is ‘.dbu’. The Append date and time to
file name check box, if selected, appends the current date (year, month, and day) and time (hours,
minutes, and seconds) stamp to the file name. Deselecting the check box removes the data and time
stamp. Select the Backup button to proceed; if the file selected already exists an overwrite confirmation
dialog appears. The backup file is created using the PostgreSQL pg_dump command. This produces a
PostgreSQL script file, in plain ASCII text, that has all of the commands necessary to create the project’s
database as it currently exists. The backup file makes it easy to transfer the database between servers
and platforms. The Restore command, detailed in paragraph 4.9.2.8, uses the file generated by the
Backup command to recreate a project’s database. Selecting the Cancel button exits the dialog without
creating a backup.

Figure 28. Backup Project dialog
63

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 64 of 314

4.9.2.8 Restore
The Restore command allows (re)creating a project’s database on a server using a PostgreSQL script file
created using the Backup command (see paragraph 4.9.2.7). Using the dialog that appears, navigate to
the desired backup file, select it, and press the Restore button; the project database recorded in the
script file is restored to the server. The name of the restored database is its original name with
“_restored” appended, and the owner is set to its original owner.
If the name of the restored project’s database would match that of an existing database then a
sequence number is appended to the restored database’s name. For example, if the database abc is
restored and the database abc_restore already exists then the database is restored as abc_restore1; if
abc_restore1 already exists then abc_restore2 is used, and so on until an unused name is found.
4.9.2.9 Unlock
The Unlock command allows the locked status to be changed to “unlock” for a project database. This
command is intended to be used to remove a lock from a project that remains locked after abnormal
termination of the CCDD application. The Unlock Project(s) dialog (Figure 29) appears when the
command is issued. Though all projects are displayed, only those that are locked have their associated
check box enabled.
The locked/unlocked status is displayed beside the project database name along with the name(s) of the
user(s) that have active connections to the project. A project is shown as “Current” if opened by the
current instance of the CCDD application and is shown as “in use by” the current user. “Locked” is
displayed if a project is in use by another instance of the CCDD application or was open when the
application terminated abnormally. “Unlocked” indicates that no other instance of the CCDD application
has the project open. Other applications may have active connections to the project (e.g., the
PostgreSQL command line interface application, psql). The users for these non-CCDD connections are
also shown in the “in use by” list. Referring to Figure 29, project abc is unlocked with no active
connections, project cdd_db_pk is open by user new_user in this instance of the CCDD application,
project test2 is not open by CCDD but does have an active connection from another application by user
rmcclune, and project test_project is open by user new_user in another instance of CCDD.
After selecting a project (or projects) to unlock, selecting the Unlock button unlocks the project
database(s). Selecting the Cancel button exits the dialog without altering the project lock statuses.
Warning: Removing a project’s lock allows concurrent access to the project from more than one instance
of the CCDD application. This may produce unexpected results or corruption of the project
database if the multiple instances make updates to the update.

64

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 65 of 314

Figure 29. Unlock Project(s) dialog
4.9.2.10 Verify
The Verify command performs a consistency check on the currently open project database. This check
ensures that the project’s data tables are consistent with the table type definitions and that the
information within a table is valid. Errors in the tables should not arise from interactions with the CCDD
application. However, changes to the project’s database from another application (e.g., psql) or using a
version of the CCDD application that differs from the one used to create the project could result in the
introduction and flagging of errors. The user is alerted to any potential problems and, where possible, is
given the option to make corrections to the project’s tables, ignore the problem and continue the check,
or to cancel the check. There are three areas of verification performed, described in the following
paragraphs. No changes are made to the project database until the user selects and confirms applying
the updates at the end of the check. Since the project database can be altered by the verification it is
recommended that the project be backed up or copied prior to allowing any updates to the database.
The internal table check verifies the project database’s internal tables. These tables are for use by the
CCDD application and are not directly viewable or editable by the user from within the application. The
verification checks that the tables contain the expected number of columns and that the columns have
the expected names and data types. Extraneous internal tables – tables with names conforming to the
internal table naming scheme – are also detected; these tables can be created by the application’s
automatic update feature and can be ignored.
The path reference check verifies that the table and variable references in the internal tables are valid.
Many of the internal tables store references to tables, and in the case of structure tables the table
reference can include one or more child tables and associated variable names. When changes made to a
table the references in the internal tables are updated as well. If any table or variable references no
longer exist these references can be removed upon confirmation by the user.
The table type check compares each data table to its table type definition, verifying that the number of
columns, column names, and column order match. Each data table is checked to see if its type matches
one of the defined table types, and if so, that it contains only those columns defined for that type. If
updating is confirmed then missing columns are added (devoid of data) and extra columns are
eliminated (including the data in them). If the table’s type is not defined then the entire table is deleted,
along with its contents, when the update is applied. If the internal data type of the column doesn’t
match the expected one then the column data type is corrected with no loss of the column’s data.
65

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 66 of 314

The table data check performs a check of the data within each table. In doing so it opens and inspects
each data table and can generate a considerable number of database queries as is evidenced in the
event log. Depending on the number of tables and the amount of data within them this operation can
take a while. Each data value is checked to ensure it isn’t null (empty cells in a data table contain blanks
instead of nulls) and that it is compatible with the input type as defined in the table’s type definition
(e.g., no alphabetical characters in an integer cell). A check is made that each row in the table contains a
row index (these indices are hidden from display in the table editor), that the row indices begin at 1, and
there are no gaps in the index values. For structure tables containing array variables the check looks for
missing array definitions (i.e., an array member without a corresponding array definition) and missing
members (e.g., an array with an array size of 3 having only two members). Any columns in the table
marked as unique (via the table type manager) are checked for duplicate values. If a duplicate is found
and updating is confirmed then the value is replaced with a blank.
Note that certain inconsistencies may prevent a complete check of a project. For example, if a column is
missing from a data table then the table’s data can’t be loaded (an error dialog is displayed) and checked
until the missing column is added at the end of the verification check. For this case the column should
be allowed to be added during the first verification check, then a second verification performed so that
the data within the affected table is checked. Inconsistencies ignored during the table data verification
section may lead to subsequent inconsistency detection that otherwise wouldn’t exist. An example
would be ignoring a missing array definition when multiple array members are present – an issue is
raised for each array member if the missing definition is ignored, whereas if updated the subsequent
missing definition warnings won’t occur.
While the check is being conducted a dialog appears (Figure 30) showing the verification progress. This
dialog allows halting the verification by pressing the Halt button. No changes are made to the project
database if the Halt button is pressed.

Figure 30. Verification and termination dialog
When the verification steps are complete, if any issues are detected then a dialog appears detailing the
issues and the corrective action to be taken (Figure 31). Only users with administrative privileges (see
paragraph 4.2.5) are allowed to implement the corrective actions (the Okay button is disabled for other
users). After selecting the check box(es) in the Corrective Action column (or using the Select all check
box to toggle selection of all of the issues), selecting Okay applies the corrective action(s) to the project
database to address the issues flagged to be updated. Selecting Print allows outputting the list to a
printer. Selecting Cancel exits the verification check without making any changes.

66

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 67 of 314

Figure 31. Example Perform Corrections dialog
4.9.2.11 Manage users
The Manage User Access Level dialog (Figure 32) provides a means to assign the level of access for each
user of the current project. This command is enabled only for users with ‘Admin’ level access (see
below). The creator of a project database is automatically granted administrator privileges. A user
belonging to the project, but not explicitly assigned an access level, is granted ‘Read Only’ privileges.

Figure 32. Manage User Access Level dialog
The editor column descriptions are as follows:
User Name

This cell, when selected, displays a drop down menu containing all users registered in
the PostgreSQL server. The current user is excluded from the list since a user can’t
change their own access level.

Acess Level

This cell, when selected, displays a drop down menu containing the available access
levels. These capabilities allowed by these levels are as follows:
67

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 68 of 314

Admin

In addition to the Read/Write access capabilities described below, the
Manage users command is enabled so that the user may grant, alter, or
remove a user’s access to the project. Also, any issues detected during
project verification (paragraph 4.9.2.10) may only be implemented by
an administrator.
Read/Write
The user has full read/write access to the project database. All
command menu and editor capabilities are enabled, except for the
Manage users command. However, project verification updates may
only be implemented by an administrator.
Read Only
The user has full read access to the project database, but all commands
that can alter the database data are disabled. This doesn’t prevent the
user from altering the contents of any of the editors, but such changes
are not persistent.
Each row in the table defines a user access level assignment. The rows can be sorted by selecting the
column headers, as with other table editors in the application. Every assignment requires a value in the
User Name and Access Level columns. The assignment for the current user is grayed out and can’t be
altered; only another user with administrative privileges can change or delete the current user.
The button commands are described below:
Ins Row

Inserts an empty row below the currently selected cell’s row. If cells in multiple rows
are selected then the new row is inserted below the lowest one. If no cell is selected
then the new row is inserted at the end of the table.

Del Row

Deletes the row associated with each currently selected cell. If cells in multiple rows are
selected then each of the rows is deleted. If no row is selected then this has no effect.
The row containing the current user’s access level (Admin by definition) cannot be
deleted.

Up

Move the row(s) of the currently selected cell(s) up one row relative to the remaining
rows. The order of the access level assignments in the editor has no effect on program
operation. The capability to arrange the rows is solely for the user to group the users as
desired.

Down

Move the row(s) of the currently selected cell(s) down one row relative to the remaining
rows. The order of the access level assignments in the editor has no effect on program
operation. The capability to arrange the rows is solely for the user to group the users as
desired.

Undo

Undoes the last action performed (typing, paste, insert, delete, redo, etc.).

Redo

Reverses the last action undone (typing, paste, insert, delete, undo, etc.).

Store

Stores the changes made to user access levels into the database.

Close

Closes the user access level manager window. If any changes have not been stored then
a dialog appears allowing the user to confirm discarding the updates or to cancel closing
the dialog.

4.9.2.12 Recently opened project(s)
The remaining commands in the Project menu are the names of the most recently opened projects.
Selecting one of these items opens the specified project. Note that the attempt to open the project is
made in the currently attached PostgreSQL server.
68

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

4.9.3

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 69 of 314

Data

The Data menu has the commands for manipulating the data tables that contain a project’s data.
4.9.3.1 New table(s)
The New Table command allows creation of a new data table. This command is enabled only for a user
with read/write or administrator access. The New Table dialog (Figure 33) displays the defined table
types and input fields for the table name and its description.

Figure 33. New Table dialog
A table type must be selected along with a valid table name. The description is optional and can be
added or altered later using the table editor. Table names must be unique within a project. Though
upper and lower case characters may be used, the name must still be unique if all of the characters are
forced to lower case. The name must begin with a character or underscore (_) and can only contain
characters, numerals, and underscores. Name length is constrained by PostgreSQL to a maximum of 63
characters. Also, the name may not match a primitive data type (e.g., double, or int8), a PostgreSQL
reserved word, or begin with a pair of underscores (this is used to designate internal tables created by
the CCDD application). A warning dialog appears if any constraint is violated.
Multiple tables of the same type may be created by entering more than one name in the table name
field with each name separated by a comma. The new tables created in this manner share the
description entered in the description field (if any). The descriptions can be added or altered later using
the table editor.
Selecting Create causes the table(s) to be created and stored in the database. Each table created has
the columns defined by the selected table type and initially has no rows. If the type chosen has default
data fields, then the new table inherits these fields and their default values. The new table(s) can then
be opened using the Edit command (see paragraph 4.9.3.2).
4.9.3.2 Edit table(s)
The Edit table(s) command displays the data table selection dialog (Figure 34).

69

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 70 of 314

Figure 34. Edit Table dialog
The selection dialog has a table tree (see paragraph 4.5.3) from which one or more tables are selected
for editing. Pressing the Open button opens the selected table(s) in a table editor (see Figure 35 for an
example). Positioning the mouse pointer over a table name in the tree and double right-clicking can also
be used to open the selected table. The Cancel button closes the table selection dialog without opening
a table.
Menu bar
Table tab(s)

Table data

Description
Data field(s)
Buttons

Figure 35. Example table editor
The table editor provides the means by which data is added to, altered, or removed from a data table.
The editor is divided into six main sections.

70

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Menu bar

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 71 of 314

The first section is the menu bar, which contains the commands, described in the
following paragraphs, for manipulating the table contents.

Table tab(s) The second section has one or more tabbed panes, each representing a data table’s
contents. The tab names indicate the table to which the tab applies. A prototype or root
table shows only the prototype/root name. For a structure table’s child table the tab
displays a name in the format root : structure.variable where root is this table’s root table
name, structure is the name of the prototype structure represented by this table, and
variable is the variable name that references this child table in the child’s immediate
parent structure. An asterisk beside the table name in the tab indicates that a change has
been made to the table that hasn’t been stored in the project database. Hovering the
mouse pointer over the tab name produces a pop-up tool tip showing the table’s type,
root table, and complete structure and variable path.
Table data

The columns displayed in the tabbed pane’s table are determined by the table type of the
table being edited. The table columns can be sorted and repositioned as described in
paragraph 4.4; however, the sorted order does not dictate the actual table data row
order. See paragraph 4.9.3.2.4 for the menu commands for repositioning the columns. If
the column order change is stored in the database then it is restored when the table is
reopened. Column ordering is preserved separately for each user.

Description This section contains the table description. The description is initially empty (unless set
when the table was first created). The text entered here is used as a tool tip when the
mouse pointer hovers over the table’s name in the table tree. Letter, numeral, and
punctuation characters may be entered. Additionally, HTML tags can be inserted to
provide additional formatting to the tool tip text.
Data field(s) This section displays any data field(s) assigned to the table. See paragraph 4.6 for details
concerning data field creation.
Buttons

The remaining section has a series of buttons that perform some of the more commonly
used commands. Certain buttons may be disabled depending on the table displayed in
the editor. The buttons are as follows:
Ins Row Inserts a new row in the table. See paragraph 4.9.3.2.3.1.
Del Row Deletes the selected row(s) from the table. See paragraph 4.9.3.2.3.2.
Up

Moves the selected row(s) up one row. See paragraph 4.9.3.2.3.3

Down

Moves the selected row(s) down one row. See paragraph 4.9.3.2.3.4.

Left

Moves the selected column(s) left one column. See paragraph 4.9.3.2.4.1

Right

Moves the selected column(s) right one column. See paragraph 4.9.3.2.4.2.

Undo

Undoes the last action performed (typing, paste, insert, delete, redo, etc.).

Redo

Reverses the last action undone (typing, paste, insert, delete, redo, etc.).

Store

Stores the currently displayed table’s contents (cell data, description, and data
fields) in the database. See paragraph 4.9.3.2.1.3.

Close

Closes the currently displayed table’s editor. See paragraph 4.9.3.2.1.8.

The following paragraphs provide details on the commands available in the table editor menu bar.

71

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

4.9.3.2.1

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 72 of 314

File menu

4.9.3.2.1.1
Edit table(s)
The Edit table(s) command displays the Edit Table dialog (Figure 34). The table(s) opened from this
dialog appear in the current table editor under their own tabs.
4.9.3.2.1.2
Edit prototype
If the currently displayed table in the editor is a child table then issuing the Edit prototype command
opens the child’s prototype table in the current table editor under its own tab.
4.9.3.2.1.3
Store current
The Store current command stores the currently displayed table’s contents, including the table’s cell
data, description, data fields, row order, and column order, into the database if changes have been
made since the table was opened or since the last store operation. This command is enabled only for a
user with read/write or administrator access. If no changes have been made then no action is taken;
otherwise a confirmation dialog appears allowing the user to choose between continuing with the store
operation and canceling it.
4.9.3.2.1.4
Store all
Selecting the Store all command is similar to the Store current command (paragraph 4.9.3.2.1.3) except
that all tables in the table editor are stored to the database if changes have been made. This command
is enabled only for a user with read/write or administrator access. A confirmation dialog appears
allowing the user to choose between continuing with the store operation and canceling it.
4.9.3.2.1.5
Import data
The Import data command provides a means of inserting data and/or data fields from a CSV, EDS XML,
JSON, or XTCE XML formatted file into the table currently displayed in the table editor. The import file
may contain information for multiple tables, but only the data (and fields for CSV and JSON imports) for
the first table defined in the file are imported. A dialog appears (Figure 36) allowing the user to choose
the import file based on file format. The Export table and Export table(s) commands produce files
compatible with the import command; see paragraphs 4.9.3.2.1.6 and 4.9.3.8; Appendix C contains
details on the file formats.
The Overwrite existing cells check box, if selected, causes the imported data to overwrite data in the
existing cells, beginning at the currently selected row. If unchecked, rows are inserted into the table at
the currently selected row (or at the end of the table if no cell is selected) to contain the imported data.
The Use existing field if duplicate check box, if selected (the default), causes any imported data fields to
be ignored if the table already has a field of the same name. If unchecked, then the existing data field is
replaced by the imported one.

72

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 73 of 314

Figure 36. Import data and fields into an existing table dialog
For CSV and JSON imports the data type and macro definitions in the import file, if present, are ignored.
The table type definitions are evaluated in the event the table from which the data is imported is
otherwise undefined. If a column name is missing in the table type definition a dialog appears alerting
the user to the error. The user can elect to ignore this table type definition and continue with the
import, ignore any remaining table type errors in this import file and continue, or cancel the import.
Following the import any table type additions are removed.
For CSV and JSON imports the column names in the import file associated with the row data are
compared to those in the table’s table type definition columns in order to insert the cell values into the
proper column. If the column name associated with a cell value isn’t recognized as one belonging to the
table’s table type definition then that cell value is ignored and a dialog appears alerting the user to the
discrepancy. The user can elect to ignore the unrecognized column name and continue with the import,
ignore any remaining unrecognized column names in this import file and continue, or cancel the import.
For EDS AND XTCE imports the data is placed in the structure or command table based on the table’s
table type definition column input types (for example, a variable name is placed in the column with the
Variable name input type, regardless of its position in the table).
4.9.3.2.1.6
Export table
The Export table command provides a means of outputting the current table’s definition to a file in CSV,
EDS, JSON, or XTCE format. This is equivalent to the Export table(s) command in the main window’s
Data menu - see paragraph 4.9.3.8 for details. The dialog that appears when is similar to that for the
Export table(s) command, except there is no table tree.
4.9.3.2.1.7
Print current
The Print current command outputs the currently displayed table to a printer or file selected by the user
from the printer dialog that appears. The table’s data fields are also output on a separate page.

73

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 74 of 314

4.9.3.2.1.8
Search
Selecting the Search command causes a search dialog to be displayed (see Figure 37). This dialog allows
searching for matching text in the currently active table editor. The search dialog remains on top of the
table editor dialog. If the editor dialog has multiple tabs, then when another tab is selected the search
criteria are applied to the new active table editor. If a window other than that for the table editor dialog
or search dialog is selected the search dialog is hidden; the dialog becomes visible again when the table
editor dialog is selected. Pressing the Ctrl-F key sequence while the table editor dialog window has the
focus also displays the search dialog.
Case sensitivity for the search is governed by the Ignore text case check box.
The Allow regular expression check box, when checked, allows the use of a regular expression to define
the search pattern in the search text field. A regular expression can be formulated to find multiple
matching conditions (for example, the search for a.c would match any string that has a single character
between the characters ‘a’ and ‘c’). Information regarding the use of regular expressions is beyond the
scope of this document; however, resources and tutorials can be found online. When unchecked, the
search text is matched as typed in the search text field.
Enter the search text in the input field and select the Search button. Any matching text in the table is
highlighted and the total number of matches, including multiple matches in a single cell, is displayed
beside the search text field’s label. If the search text field is empty and the Search button is pressed, or
if the search dialog is closed, then any search match highlighting is removed.
The search text field uses auto-completion to fill in the search string. The previous search strings (those
for the event log, table, and script) are remembered, including those from previous sessions. The
number of remembered search strings can be changed via the Preferences dalog, and defaults to 30.
Case sensitivity for auto-completion is based on the Ignore text case check box selection state.
If the table contains one or more instances of the search text then the search dialog’s Previous and Next
buttons are enabled. These buttons cause the table cell selection to move from the currently selected
cell to the previous or next cell containing a search match, wrapping to the end or beginning of the table
if needed. The table scrolls, and for a structure table array members are expanded, if necessary for the
selected cell’s row to be visible.
The input text can be changed and the Search button pressed again to initiate another search of the
table. To exit the search dialog select the Close button.

Figure 37. Data table search dialog

74

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 75 of 314

4.9.3.2.1.9
Close current
The Close current command closes the currently displayed table’s editor tab. If this is the last table in
the editor then the editor window is also closed. If any changes to the table’s data, description, data
fields, row order, or column order have been made, but not stored in the database, then a confirmation
dialog appears allowing the user to choose between continuing with the close operation, discarding the
changes, or canceling it, keeping the table editor open.
4.9.3.2.1.10 Close all
The Close all command performs a similar operation to the Close current command (paragraph
4.9.3.2.1.8) except all tables in the editor are closed as well as the editor. For unstored changes in any
of the tables, only a single confirmation dialog appears; if confirmed, the changes in all tables in the
editor are discarded.
4.9.3.2.2

Edit menu

4.9.3.2.2.1
Copy
The Copy command places the contents of the highlighted cell(s) into the operating system’s clipboard.
This information can then be pasted into another table cell or input field within the application, or into
applications other than CCDD. The Ctrl-C keys perform the same operation.
4.9.3.2.2.2
Paste
The Paste command places the contents of the operating system’s clipboard into one or more table
cells, if a cell is selected, or into an input field if a field is selected. The paste location within the table is
determined by the leftmost and uppermost highlighted cell. If the table contains collapsed arrays then
the arrays are expanded prior to pasting the data. The rows and columns of the copied cells are then
placed into the editor beginning at this location and extending down and to the right, overwriting the
existing data in the cells. If insufficient columns exist for the pasted data then the excess column data is
ignored. Extra rows are inserted at the bottom of the table to provide room for data that would be
placed below the editor’s last row. See paragraph 4.9.3.2.2.3 on inserting copied data without
overwriting the existing cell contents. If data from multiple cells is pasted into an input field then
content from each cell is concatenated, separated by a space, and the result is pasted into the field. The
Ctrl-V keys perform the same operation.
4.9.3.2.2.3
Insert
The Insert command behaves similarly to the Paste command (paragraph 4.9.3.2.2.2) except that no
editor data is overwritten. Instead, rows are inserted, beginning at the row below the upper- and
leftmost highlighted cell, to accommodate the pasted values. The Ctrl-I keys perform the same
operation.
4.9.3.2.2.4
Undo
The Undo command performs the same action as the Undo button. The command undoes the last
action performed (typing, paste, insert, delete, redo, etc.) in the currently displayed table editor. The
Ctrl-Z keys perform the same operation.
4.9.3.2.2.5
Redo
The Redo command performs the same action as the Redo button. The command reverses the last
action undone (typing, paste, insert, delete, redo, etc.) in the currently displayed table editor. The Ctrl-Y
keys perform the same operation.

75

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 76 of 314

4.9.3.2.2.6
Insert macro
The Insert macro command provides a convenient means to insert a macro into a table cell. Editing
must first be initiated in the cell. Position the text cursor within the cell at the point where the macro is
to be inserted, or select any existing text the macro is to replace, then select the Insert Macro
command. A pop-up list appears displaying all macros with values that are consistent with the input
type of the cell being edited (see Figure 38; see paragraph 4.7 for information on input types). Use the
mouse or keyboard to highlight the macro to insert. If the mouse pointer is hovered over a macro name
in the pop up a tool tip pop up appears displaying the macro’s value. Once the desired macro is
highlighted either press the left mouse button or the Enter key. The macro name is inserted into the
table cell, replacing any selected text, bounded by the macro delimiter characters (##), and highlighted
to aid in distinguishing it from the non-macro text (see Figure 38). Press the Escape key to remove the
macro pop up dialog without inserting a macro.
The Ctrl-M keys can be used in place of the Insert macro command. While editing a cell, position the
text cursor or highlight one or more characters to be replaced, then press Ctrl-M. The pop-up list
appears as described above.

Figure 38. Example of macro name display and pop-up dialog in a data table
4.9.3.2.2.7
Show macros
The Show macros command, when checked, temporarily replaces every macro with its corresponding
value in each table of the editor dialog. No editing of the table may take place while the command is
selected (all tables cells are grayed out and most of the editor menu commands and buttons are
disabled). Deselecting the Show macros command restores the macros and enables normal editing and
commands.
Pressing Ctrl-Shift-M produces a similar effect, causing the currently selected table to display all cells
containing a macro to replace the macro with its value; releasing the Ctrl-Shift-M keys restores the
macro names in the cells.
4.9.3.2.2.8
Clear selected
The Clear selected sub-menu contains commands for replacing the contents of the selected cell(s) in the
currently displayed table.
4.9.3.2.2.8.1 With blanks
The With blanks command replaces the values in the selected cell(s) with a blank. Pressing the Delete
key performs the same action.
4.9.3.2.2.8.2 With prototype
The With prototype command is only available if the table editor is displaying a child table. This
command replaces the value in selected cell(s) with the contents of the corresponding cell in the table’s
prototype table. Pressing the Shift-Delete keys performs the same action. A special indicator flag (Ø) is
prepended to the cell value and highlighted (see Figure 39 for an example). If the table changes are
stored or the cell is subsequently edited this indicator is removed.
76

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 77 of 314

Figure 39. Special indicator flag example
4.9.3.2.3

Row menu

4.9.3.2.3.1
Insert row
The Insert row command performs the same action as the Ins Row button. The command causes an
empty row to be inserted below the currently selected cell’s row. If cells in multiple rows are selected
then the new row is inserted below the lowest one. If no cell is selected then the new row is inserted at
the end of the table. The Insert key performs the same operation.
A row may not be inserted within an array. If an array definition or member cell is selected then the
new row is inserted below the last array member.
4.9.3.2.3.2
Delete row(s)
The Delete row(s) command performs the same action as the Del Row button. This command deletes
the row associated with each currently selected cell. If cells in multiple rows are selected then each of
the rows is deleted. If no row is selected then this command has no effect. The Delete key performs the
same operation.
A row may not be removed from within an array. If an array definition or member cell is selected then
the entire array – definition and members – is deleted.
4.9.3.2.3.3
Move up
The Move up command performs the same action as the Up button. This command causes the row(s) of
the currently selected cell(s) to move up one row relative to the remaining rows. Only prototype tables
may have their rows reordered; reordering the prototype’s rows affects the row ordering for all tables
based on the prototype. Reordering the rows is recognized as a table change and is preserved in the
database via use of the Store command (menu or button).
Arrays cannot be split by use of the Move up command. If an array definition or member cell is selected
then the array moves up as a unit.
4.9.3.2.3.4
Move down
The Move down command performs the same action as the Down button. This causes the row(s) of the
currently selected cell(s) to move down one row relative to the remaining rows. Only prototype tables
may have their rows reordered; reordering the prototype’s rows affects the row ordering for all tables
based on the prototype. Reordering the rows is recognized as a table change and is preserved in the
database via use of the Store command (menu or button).
Arrays cannot be split by use of the Move down command. If an array definition or member cell is
selected then the array moves down as a unit.
4.9.3.2.3.5
Expand arrays
The Expand arrays command is only available for those tables containing a column with an input type of
“Array index” (e.g., the Array Size column in the default Structure table type). This command toggles
display of array members in the table. When enabled, each array member is displayed in its own row in
the table beneath the array’s definition row. When disabled, the array members are hidden, though the
array’s definition row continues to be displayed. Array member visibility can also be toggled by
positioning the mouse pointer over any cell in the array size column (except the column header) and
double right-clicking.
77

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 78 of 314

4.9.3.2.3.6
Array overwrite
The Array overwrite command is a submenu with three mutually exclusive selections: Overwrite all,
Overwrite empty, and Overwrite none. The selection governs pasting of data into array member cells
already containing values. Overwrite all, the default, overwrites any existing values with the pasted
values. Overwrite empty only pastes values into cells that are currently empty; paste values are
discarded if the target cell is occupied. Overwrite none prevents pasting values into array member cells.
4.9.3.2.4

Column menu

4.9.3.2.4.1
Move left
Issuing the Move left command moves the column(s) of the selected cell(s) to the left one column
relative to the remaining columns. Reordering the columns is recognized as a table change and is
preserved in the database separately for each user via use of the Store command (menu or button).
4.9.3.2.4.2
Move right
Issuing the Move right command moves the column(s) of the selected cell(s) to the right one column
relative to the remaining columns. Reordering the columns is recognized as a table change and is
preserved in the database separately for each user via use of the Store command (menu or button).
4.9.3.2.4.3
Reset order
The Reset order command restores the column order for the currently displayed table to the default
order. The default order is established by the order of the column definitions in the table type editor for
the table’s type.
4.9.3.2.5

Field menu

4.9.3.2.5.1
Manage fields
The Manage fields command allows the user to create, alter, and delete data fields for the table
represented by the active table editor tab. See paragraph 4.6 for information regarding data fields and
use of the data field editor.
The fields manipulated by the field editor are displayed below the table editor table and description
when the Update button is pressed. After the field editor is closed values can be entered into the data
fields. The table editor’s Store button or command must be used to store the changes in the project
database and apply them to the table.
4.9.3.2.5.2
Clear values
The Clear values command clears the contents of all of the currently displayed table’s data fields. A
confirmation dialog is first displayed. Selecting Okay causes all of the data field values to be blanked.
Selecting Cancel exits the dialog without affecting the data field values.
4.9.3.3 Recent
This sub-menu contains the names (with paths) of the most recently opened tables. Selecting one of
these items opens the specified table. Note that the attempt to open the table is made in the currently
open project.
4.9.3.4 Rename table
The Rename table command allows a prototype data table to be renamed. This command is enabled
only for a user with read/write or administrator access. Child tables cannot be renamed using this
dialog. Child tables are instances of a prototype table assigned as a variable, so a child table’s name is a
combination of its prototype table name and the variable name in its parent table’s prototype.
78

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 79 of 314

Therefore, child table names can only be altered by changing the name of the child table’s prototype
table, or changing the name of the variable representing the child table in its parent table’s prototype
table.
The Rename Table dialog (Figure 40) appears, displaying a table tree showing the prototype tables and
input fields for providing the selected table’s new name and description. See paragraph 4.5.3 for details
on the table tree. A table is first selected from the tree; the table name and description (if any) appear
in the input fields. After altering the name and description fields as desired the Rename button is
selected to change the table’s name and description. See paragraph 4.9.3.1 for details on table name
constraints. The new name and description are immediately reflected in all parent and child tables,
including those appearing in open table editors. The description is optional and can be added or altered
later using the table editor. Select the Cancel button to exit the dialog without making a change to a
table name.

Figure 40. Rename Table dialog
4.9.3.5 Copy table
The Copy table command allows a prototype data table to be copied. This command is enabled only for
a user with read/write or administrator access. The Copy Table dialog (Figure 41) appears, displaying a
table tree showing the prototype tables and input fields for providing the name and description of the
selected table’s copy. See paragraph 4.5.3 for details on the table tree. A table is first selected from the
tree; the table name appears in the input field with “_copy” appended and its description, if any,
appears in the description field. After altering the name and description fields as desired the Copy
button is selected to create the table’s copy. See paragraph 4.9.3.1 for details on table name
constraints. The description is optional and can be added or altered later using the table editor. Select
the Cancel button to exit the dialog without copying a table.

79

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 80 of 314

Figure 41. Copy Table dialog
4.9.3.6 Delete table(s)
The Delete table command allows one or more prototype tables to be deleted. This command is
enabled only for a user with read/write or administrator access. The Delete Table dialog (Figure 42)
appears, displaying a table tree showing the prototype tables. See paragraph 4.5.3 for details on the
table tree. After one or more tables is selected from the tree the Delete button is selected to delete the
table(s). A confirmation dialog appears and if Okay is selected all instances of the deleted table, both
parent and child tables, are deleted from the project database, including those appearing in open table
editors. Select the Cancel button to exit the dialog without deleting a table.

80

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 81 of 314

Figure 42. Delete Table dialog
4.9.3.7 Import table(s)
The Import table(s) command allows importing information from CSV, EDS, JSON, and XTCE formatted
files in order to create tables in the project database. This command is enabled only for a user with
read/write or administrator access. CSV and JSON import files can contain information for tables of any
type (structure, command, and other user-defined types), table type definition(s), data type
definition(s), macro definition(s), reserved message IDs, and variable paths. EDS and XTCE XML import
files are restricted in the information contained, so only basic information for structure and command
tables can be imported from files in these formats. When the command is selected a dialog appears
allowing the user to choose the location of the import file(s) (see Figure 43).

81

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 82 of 314

Figure 43. Import table(s) dialog
The Replace existing tables check box allows the user to choose whether to replace any existing tables
with the same name with the import file data. If selected, the Append existing data fields check box is
enabled, which indicates if replaced tables that have data fields have the existing fields appended to
those imported. If this check box is selected then the Use existing field if duplicate check box is
enabled, which determines whether to use the existing data field or the imported one in the event that
the data fields have the same name.
The Open editor for each imported table check box, if selected, causes a table editor dialog to be
opened, and a table editor displayed for each table imported from the file. If a large number of tables is
imported, then multiple table editor dialogs may be created, based on the number of rows of tabs taken
up by the table names in the dialog. The maximum number of tab rows is user-adjustable via the
Preferences dialog (see paragraph 4.9.1.7.4); the default is 15.
The remaining check box, Backup project before importing, determines if a backup of the project
database is created prior to continuing with the import operation.
More information regarding the permissible formats for the import file are described in Appendix C.
When a structure table is imported, if it has a variable with a data type that is a reference to another
structure and the prototype for this child structure doesn’t already exist in the project and isn’t defined
in the import file(s), then the prototype table is created. This auto-generated prototype is a copy of the
child structure; i.e., it’s created using the same structure table type definition as the child structure and
contains all of the information in the child.
4.9.3.7.1 Importing table types
When importing from EDS or XTCE XML formatted files a single structure and/or a single command table
type is created on which all of the structure and command tables are based. If more than one command
82

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 83 of 314

table definition is present in the import file then the one with the largest number of arguments
determines the command table type definition (these argument entries are empty for command tables
requiring fewer arguments). The table type definition names are ‘Structure’ and ‘Command’ with with
‘EDS_’ or ‘XTCE_’ prepended and are guaranteed to be unique (a numeral is appended to the table type
definition name as needed to differentiate the new type from an existing one).
CVS and JSON formatted files must either use a table type definition already defined in the target
project database, or contain a definition for each type of table imported. If a table type present in the
import file has the same name as one already present in the project then the column definitions must
match (other than for the column descriptions), otherwise an error dialog appears; if the error is ignored
then this table type definition is skipped. Note that any tables in the import file using this type won’t
successfully be imported. Three options are available to overcome the table type collision: (1) change
the existing type’s name, (2) change the type’s name in the import file (including any references in any
table definitions using it), or (3) alter the existing table type to match the imported type (adding,
removing, or altering the column definitions as needed). Once the changes are made the import can be
performed again.
When importing a table type column definition the inputs are expected in the same order as they
appear in the table type editor (see Figure 50). If the number of inputs is fewer or more than those
expected, or the column name is blank, then an error dialog appears; if the error is ignored then this
table type definition is skipped. If the input type is blank then it defaults to ‘Text’, but if the input type is
present and isn’t one recognized by the application (see paragraph 4.7) a warning error dialog appears;
if the error is ignored then the input type ‘Text’ is used. The inputs representing the check box columns
evaluate to ‘true’ if the input is ‘true’ (case insensitive); otherwise ‘false’ is used, regardless of the actual
value supplied.
4.9.3.7.2 Importing data fields
When importing from EDS and XTCE XML formatted files certain data fields are created if the
information is present in the import file. These fields are the application (or message) ID for root
structure tables and command tables, and the system path for each table (root or instance).
When importing a data field definition from a CSV or JSON formatted file the inputs are expected in the
same order as they appear in the data field editor (see Figure 7). This includes an input for the
“Applicability Type”, even if the data field isn’t associated with a structure table type definition. An
additional input containing the field’s value is expected as the last input. If the number of inputs is
fewer or more than those expected, or the field name is blank, then an error dialog appears; if the error
is ignored then this data field is skipped. If the input type is blank then it defaults to ‘Text’, but if the
input type is present and isn’t one of the recognized ones a warning dialog appears; if the error is
ignored then the input type ‘Text’ is used. The input representing the check box column evaluates to
‘true’ if the input is ‘true’ (case insensitive); otherwise ‘false’ is used, regardless of the actual value
supplied. If the applicability type is blank then it defaults to ‘All tables’, but if the applicability type is
present and isn’t one of the recognized ones a warning dialog appears; if the error is ignored then the
applicability type ‘All tables’ is used.
4.9.3.8 Export table(s)
The Export table(s) commands allow outputting a project’s data table information in one of four
formats: CSV, JSON, EDS XML, and XTCE XML. The CSV and JSON formats include information for the
table type definition(s), data type definition(s), macro definition(s), reserved message IDs, variable
paths, and table definition(s). This allows these formats to exchange detailed project information with
another CCDD project. The XML formats only export a subset of the information that appears in the
project’s structure and command data tables.
83

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 84 of 314

Each export dialog, shown in the following sections, differs in options and inputs. The common features
are as follows. At the top of the dialog is a table tree for selecting the tables to export; below the tree
are the various tree filters – see paragraph 4.5.3 for more details. The dialog includes an input field for
specifying the export path or file. The CSV and JSON formats allow for storing the output either
combined into a single file or with each table in its own file based on the selection of the radio buttons
(Store in Multiple files or Single file). The EDS and XTCE output is to a single file only. The output file
name or path must be entered in the export file/path field, or selected from the file chooser dialog that
appears when the Select… button is pressed. For multiple tables with output to individual files the file
names are automatically assigned based on the table names. If an output file already exists then the
table isn’t exported unless the Overwrite existing file(s) check box is selected or the user confirms
overwriting each file (via a dialog that appears during the export operation).
The dialogs for the EDS and XTCE exports contain a pair of radio buttons, Endianess Big and Little, that
are used to determine the flags set in the export file that indicate if the data is in big or little endian
format. If little endianness is selected then the check box Headers are big endian is enabled. If
selected, the telemetry and command header table variables are flagged as big endian (as an example,
the CFS CCSDS headers are always big endian). This check box is selected by default.
The following inputs allow for modifying what other information is included in the export file and only
apply to CSV and JSON exports. When the Substitute macro values for macro names check box is
selected the table cells containing macro references have the references replaced with the
corresponding macro value. The macro definitions are not stored in the export file(s) in this case. The
Include reserved message IDs check box, when checked, causes the message IDs in the reserved
message ID editor (see paragraph 4.9.3.14.2) to be exported. If the Include project data fields check
box is selected then all of the project-level data field definitions are included in the output. If the
Include variable paths check box is selected then the variable path, in both application and user-defined
formats, for each variable is included in the output. The remaining inputs become active when this
check box is selected. These inputs behave identically to those described in paragraph 4.9.3.18.
The column data in an exported table file may be imported into an existing table using the Import data
command (paragraph 4.9.3.2.1.5). The Import table(s) command (paragraph 4.9.3.7) imports the entire
contents of the export file into the current project, creating tables, table type definitions, and data field
definitions (and data type definitions, macros, reserved message IDs, and variable paths in the case of
CSV and JSON formatted files) as described in the file. Details on the allowable formats of the export file
are described in Appendix C.
4.9.3.8.1 CSV
The Export table(s) - CSV command allows exporting one or more selected tables in CSV format. See
Appendix C.1 for details on the file format.

84

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 85 of 314

Figure 44. CSV export dialog
4.9.3.8.2 EDS
The Export table(s) - EDS command allows outputting one or more selected tables in EDS XML format.
Only certain data for structure and command tables is exported; other table types are ignored. Any
macros are expanded in the exported data. See Appendix C.2 for details on the file format.
Four special project-level data fields are utilized by the EDS format (see paragraph 4.9.3.15 for
information on assigning project-level fields). These fields are described in Table 7. The names of the
fields can be whatever the user desires; the input types determine how the fields are used during the
export process. The telemetry and command header table names indicate which tables represent the
telemetry and command header structures, respectively. All root structure tables reference a single
telemetry header in the export file, and all command tables reference a single command header in the
export file. If a field is missing or its contents is empty the export is still performed, but certain data may
be missing. For example, without the header fields or the application ID and function code fields the
export operation can’t determine where to place the ID and function code values in the export file, so
these values are ignored. The contents of the four data fields are stored as device metadata in the
export file. Application ID and command function code use default values if not specified in the data
fields.

85

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 86 of 314

Figure 45. EDS export dialog
Input Type

Description

XML: Application ID

Name of the variable containing the application ID in the structure tables
representing the telemetry and command headers

XML: Command Header

Name of the structure table representing the command header

XML: Function Code

Name of the variable containing the command function code in the
structure table representing the command header

XML: Telemetry Header

Name of the structure table representing the telemetry header
Table 7. XML special data fields

4.9.3.8.3 JSON
The Export table(s) - JSON command allows outputting one or more selected tables in JSON format. See
Appendix C.3 for details on the file format.

86

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 87 of 314

Figure 46. JSON export dialog
4.9.3.8.4 XTCE
The Export table(s) - XTCE command allows outputting one or more selected tables in XTCE XML format.
Only certain data for structure and command tables is exported; other table types are ignored. Any
macros are expanded in the exported data.
The Use external methods check box, when checked, indicates that the script, named in the Enter script
file name input field, is used to perform some or all of the XTCE conversion. The process is identical to
performing the export operation via script association (see paragraph 4.10.7 for details on modifying the
XTCE conversion via a script). However, not all of the script data access methods are available when
using the external methods feature from the export dialog – any method referencing the table names,
rows, table data, etc. is not accessible.
The XTCE dialog has additional inputs for defining certain XTCE attributes and classification levels that
are used when constructing the output file. Default values are provided, but can be changed as desired.
The attributes are used to construct the XML Header elements. See Appendix C.4 for details on the file
format.
Four special project-level data fields are utilized by the XTCE format (see paragraph 4.9.3.15 for
information on assigning project-level fields). These fields are described in Table 7. The names of the
87

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 88 of 314

fields can be whatever the user desires; the input types determine how the fields are used during the
export process. The telemetry and command header table names indicate which tables represent the
telemetry and command header structures, respectively. All root structure tables reference a single
telemetry header in the export file, and all command tables reference a single command header in the
export file. The command tables all reference a single command header in the export file. If a field is
missing or its contents is empty the export is still performed, but certain data may be missing. For
example, without the header fields or the application ID and function code fields the export operation
can’t determine where to place the ID and function code values in the export file, so these values are
ignored. The contents of the four data fields are stored as ancillary data in the root system in the export
file. Application ID and command function code use default values if not specified in the data fields.

Figure 47. XTCE export dialog

88

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 89 of 314

4.9.3.9 Manage groups
The Manage groups command allows data tables to be assigned to user-defined groups. These groups
can be used to filter the tables in the table trees used in other dialogs, making it easier to locate tables
that are related (e.g., by a vehicle subsystem or CFS application). Groups can be added, altered, or
deleted. When the command is selected a dialog similar to that in Figure 48 appears.

Figure 48. Manage Groups dialog
The upper left of the dialog contains a table tree (under the Tables heading). The upper right shows the
groups and their trees (under the Groups heading). Both trees have the Expand all and Filter by type
check boxes (see paragraph 4.5.3 for further details). The Groups tree has an additional filter, Filter by
application, which causes the groups to be divided into two sub-trees, Application and Other. The
Application sub-tree displays only those groups that represent a CFS application (see below for more
details), and the Other sub-tree shows the remaining groups. In between the tree panes are arrows for
moving tables in and out of the group(s). Each tree also has one or more check boxes, to
89

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 90 of 314

expand/collapse the tree and to filter the tree information. Below the trees is a check box for indicating
that the group represents a CFS application and an input field for adding a description for the group.
This description is used as text for a tool tip that appears in the table trees whenever the mouse pointer
hovers over a group name.
The space separating the table and group trees delineates a split pane control that is used to resize
these panels relative to one another. Position the mouse pointer between the two tree panels and
when the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow press and hold the left mouse button. Space
permitting, the adjoining panes can be resized by moving the mouse pointer left or right. Release the
mouse button to exit resizing.
If a variable is selected in the Tables tree then every group to which it belongs is selected automatically
in the Groups tree. If multiple tables are selected in the Tables tree then any selected groups are
deselected. Selecting a non-grouped table deselects any highlighted group in the Groups tree.
To create a group select the New button and provide a group name and description in the input dialog
that appears (Figure 49). The group name may not be blank, nor is the name allowed to match that of
an existing group (including the automatically supplied group’s name, ‘All tables’, which does not appear
in the Groups tree). The group name may contain alphanumeric, spaces, and punctuation characters;
there is no length constraint. If the Group represents a CFS application check box is selected then the
group is automatically assigned a number of data fields appropriate for a CFS application (the fields may
be altered using the Fields button after the group is created; a group’s classification as a CFS application
can be altered later – see below). These fields are Schedule Rate, Execution Time, Execution Priority,
Message Rate, Wake-Up Name, Wake-Up ID, HK Send Rate, HK Wake-Up Name, HK Wake-Up ID, and
SCH Group. The contents of these fields is used when populating the scheduler table created with the
application scheduler (paragraph 4.9.4.3). If Okay is selected the new group’s name appears in the
group tree.

Figure 49. New Group dialog
To add tables to a group select the group in the Groups tree using the mouse or keyboard. Then, in the
Tables tree, expand the tree as needed and select one or more tables using the mouse or keyboard.
Multiple tables can be selected simultaneously by holding the Ctrl or Shift keys down when making a
selection. Selecting a structure table automatically includes its child tables (and their children, etc.).
Choosing a child table automatically includes its parent table, and its parent’s parent, etc., up to the root
table, but does not include any of its siblings (i.e., tables having the same parent and at the same tree
level as the chosen table). Finally, select the right arrow button in the center of the dialog. The table(s)
chosen appear in the selected group, and the group’s tree is expanded to show the table(s) added. Note
that the table hierarchy is preserved in the group’s tree. More tables can be assigned to the group as
described above.

90

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 91 of 314

To remove tables from a group expand the group’s tree and select the table(s) to remove using the
mouse or keyboard. Then select the left arrow button in the center of the dialog to delete the tables
from the group. A table’s children (and their children, etc.) are removed along with the chosen table.
To delete a group, first select it in the Groups tree, then select the Delete button. Multiple groups can
be removed simultaneously if desired by highlighting them while using the Shift or Ctrl keys.
To rename a group, select a single group from the Groups tree, then press the Rename button. An input
dialog appears with the name of the selected group in the input field. Alter the name as desired and
select Okay to change the group’s name. The renamed group name may not be blank, nor is the name
allowed to match that of an existing group. Select Cancel to exit the input dialog without affecting the
group’s name.
To copy a group and its member tables, select a single group from the Groups tree, then press the Copy
button. An input dialog appears with the name of the selected group in the input field with the text
“_copy” appended. Alter the name as desired and select Okay to create a copy of the selected group.
The copy has all of the tables assigned to it that are assigned to the original. The group name of the
copy may not be blank, nor is the name allowed to match that of an existing group. Select Cancel to exit
the input dialog without copying the group.
Data fields (see paragraph 4.6) may be assigned to a group. A group must first be selected in the Groups
tree; this enables the Fields and Clear buttons. Select Fields to display the data field editor (see
paragraph 4.6.1 for details on it use) for the currently selected group. Once a field is created it can have
a value assigned, and the values for existing fields may be altered if desired. The data field values for
the currently selected group can be cleared by selecting the Clear button.
A group’s description can be added or changed by first selecting the group in the Groups tree. The
current description for the group appears in the Description input field. The description can then be
changed as desired.
When a group is selected a check box appears above the description field allowing the group’s
classification as a CFS application to be changed. If checked a number of default fields are automatically
added below the description field, unless these fields are already present. Deselecting the check box
does not remove these fields.
Changes made in the group manager (group additions or deletions, table assignments, data field
updates, or changes to descriptions) are stored in the database only when the Store button is pressed.
If changes have been made a confirmation dialog first appears. Select Okay to store the updates; select
Cancel to exit the confirmation dialog without altering the database.
Select the Close button to exit the group manager dialog. If there are any unsaved group changes a
dialog appears requesting confirmation to discard the changes. Select Okay to exit the group manager,
losing any unsaved changes. Select Cancel to return to the group manager dialog.
The group manager button commands are summarized below:
New

Create a new group.

Delete

Delete the selected group(s).

Rename

Rename the selected group.

Copy

Create a copy of the selected group, including its member tables and data fields.

Fields

Invokes the data field editor in order to create, alter, and delete data fields for the
selected group.

91

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 92 of 314

Clear

Replace the values in all data fields with blanks and deselect any check box data field for
the selected group.

Undo

Undoes the last action performed (table assignment, typing, paste, insert, delete, redo,
etc.) on the selected group.

Redo

Reverses the last action undone (table assignment, typing, paste, insert, delete, undo,
etc.) on the selected group.

Store

Stores the changes made to the groups in the group manager into the project database.

Close

Closes the group manager window. If any changes have not been stored then a dialog
appears allowing the user to confirm discarding the updates or to cancel closing the
dialog.

4.9.3.10 Manage table types
The Manage table types command opens the table type editor (Figure 50). The editor window can be
broken down into the following sections: the menu bar, table type tab(s), column definitions, type
description, and buttons. An additional section, showing data fields, is visible below the description if
data fields are created.

Menu bar
Type tab(s)

Column
definitions

Data field(s)
Buttons

Figure 50. Table type editor
The menu bar has commands associated with the table type editor; the commands are described in
subsequent paragraphs. The buttons, described in detail below, represent some of the more commonly
used commands; each has a counterpart in the menu bar. Each type tab represents one of defined table
types. As a default this includes the Structure and Command types. Any types created by the user also
appear. The tabs are arranged in alphabetical order. Selecting the tab causes the editor to display the
information for the selected table type.
Each row in the editor is a definition of a column that appears in each table of this type. The order of
the column definitions determines the initial column order when the table is first displayed. The editor
92

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 93 of 314

columns can be sorted and repositioned as described in paragraph 4.4. Note that sorting the columns
using the header does not affect the column order of tables created using the type. The displayed
column order can be changed for each individual table in the table editor (see paragraph 4.9.3.2.4).
Editor cells that are grayed out cannot be changed. Selections in a columns definition can preclude
other selections. For example, since only integer data types are valid for an enumeration, columns with
an enumeration input type can’t have a data type that’s a structure and the Enable if Structure check
box is disabled.
Column definition rows are highlighted when the all of the column definitions necessary to define a
structure or command table are present and the column definition is one of these rows. In Figure 50 the
column definitions for the variable name, data type, array size, bit length, enumeration, and rate are
highlighted since these are the ones required to define a table representing a structure. If any one of
these column definitions is removed then this highlighting is removed for all of the rows. The
highlighting serves to indicate that the minimum column definitions are present to define the table type.
The editor column descriptions are as follows:
Column Name

When a table of this type is displayed, this is the name that’s displayed in the table’s
header for the column defined on this row of the editor.

Description

This text is displayed as a tool tip whenever the mouse pointer hovers over this
column’s name in the table’s header.

Input Type

The input type constrains the type of value entered into the table cells for this
column. If the value entered into the cell doesn’t conform to the column’s specified
input type then a warning message dialog is displayed and the cell reverts to its
previous value. The input types are selectable from the combo box pull-down menu
that appears when a cell in the Input Type column is selected. See paragraph 4.7
for information on the available input types.

Unique

This check box, if selected, indicates that each cell’s data value must be unique
within this column. If a duplicate value is entered into a cell then a warning
message dialog is displayed and the cell reverts to its previous value.

Required

This check box, if selected, indicates that the cell in this column requires a value.
This causes the cell to be highlighted in yellow if it is empty. This does not force the
user to populate the highlighted cell prior to saving changes to the table, but simply
serves as a reminder that the information in this cell is considered important (for
example, necessary to a script).

Enable if Structure This check box, if selected, indicates that the cells in this column allow input when
the same row’s data type column contains a structure reference. If the check box
isn’t selected then whenever a structure is selected as the data type the table’s cell
is grayed out and its value is blanked. Note: This editor column only appears when
the table type contains all column definitions necessary to represent a structure.
Enable if Pointer

This check box, if selected, indicates that the cells in this column allows input when
the same row’s data type column contains a pointer reference. If the check box isn’t
selected then whenever a pointer is selected as the data type the table’s cell is
grayed out and its value is blanked. Note: This editor column only appears when the
table type contains all column definitions necessary to represent a structure.

The button commands mirror commands available in the editor menu bar and provide an easy method
of accessing the commonly used editor commands. The button commands are described below:
93

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 94 of 314

Ins Row

Inserts an empty row below the currently selected cell’s row. If no cell is selected then
the new row is inserted at the end of the table.

Del Row

Deletes the row associated with each currently selected cell. If no row is selected then
this has no effect.

Up

Move the row(s) of the currently selected cell(s) up one row. This affects the order of
the columns of new instances of this table type; it does not affect existing tables of this
type. The displayed column order can be changed for each individual table in the table
editor (see paragraph 4.9.3.2.4).

Down

Move the row(s) of the currently selected cell(s) down one row. This affects the order
of the columns of new instances of this table type; it does not affect existing tables of
this type. Column order can be changed for each individual table in the table editor (see
paragraph 4.9.3.2.4).

Undo

Undoes the last action performed (typing, paste, insert, delete, redo, etc.).

Redo

Reverses the last action undone (typing, paste, insert, delete, undo, etc.).

Store

Stores the changes made to the currently displayed tab in the table type editor (not
those in the other tabs) in the database. See paragraph 4.9.3.10.1.5 for further details.

Close

Closes the table type editor window. If any changes for any of the tabs have not been
stored then a dialog appears allowing the user to confirm discarding the updates or to
cancel closing the editor.

The commands in the editor menu bar are described in the following paragraphs.
4.9.3.10.1 File menu
4.9.3.10.1.1 New type
The New type command allows the user to create a new table type. This command is enabled only for a
user with read/write or administrator access. A dialog appears with an input field for entering the new
type’s name (Figure 51). The three radio buttons allow automatically populating the new type with
those columns that are required for a structure or command table type; selecting None results in a table
type with no columns defined. Select Create to create the new type, which is opened in the table type
editor. The editor can then be used to populate the table type with column definitions and edit any that
were automatically added, and afterwards new tables of this type may be created and edited. Select
Cancel to exit the dialog without creating a new table type.

Figure 51. New table type dialog
94

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 95 of 314

4.9.3.10.1.2 Copy type
The Copy type command is used to create a new table type from an existing one, including all of its
column definitions and default data fields. This command is enabled only for a user with read/write or
administrator access. The active tab in the table type editor determines which type is to be copied, so
the intended tab must be selected prior to executing the copy command. A dialog appears with an input
field for entering the name of the table type’s copy. The name of the selected type is displayed with
“_copy” appended. After altering the name as desired, select Copy to create a copy of the type. Select
Cancel to exit the dialog without creating a copy.
4.9.3.10.1.3 Rename type
The Rename type command is used to rename an existing table type. This command is enabled only for
a user with read/write or administrator access. The active tab in the table type editor determines which
type is to be renamed, so the intended tab must be selected prior to executing the rename command. A
dialog appears with an input field for entering the new name for the table type. The name of the
selected type is automatically displayed. After altering the name as desired, select Rename to rename
the table type. All tables of the renamed type are changed to reference the new table type name.
Select Cancel to exit the dialog without renaming the table type.
4.9.3.10.1.4 Delete type
The Delete type command deletes an existing table type. This command is enabled only for a user with
read/write or administrator access. The active tab in the table type editor determines which type is to
be deleted, so the intended tab must be selected prior to executing the delete command. A
confirmation dialog appears. Selecting Delete removes the table type and all tables of the deleted type
from the project database. Select Cancel to exit the dialog without deleting the table type or any tables.
4.9.3.10.1.5 Store current
The Store current command performs the identical action to the Store button. This command is
enabled only for a user with read/write or administrator access. The command stores the changes
made to the currently displayed tab in the table type editor (not those in the other tabs) in the project
database. Afterwards, any table created using this table type inherits the type’s columns and data
fields.
All existing tables of this type, including those in any open table editors, are updated immediately with
the column and data field changes. New data fields are added to existing tables; however, deleted data
fields are not removed from existing tables. Changes to data field values are applied based on the
Overwrite values check box described in paragraph 4.9.3.10.4.3.
A confirmation dialog appears allowing the user to choose between continuing with the store operation
and canceling it.
4.9.3.10.1.6 Store all
The Store all command is similar to the Store current command described above, except that it stores
the changes made to all the table type editor tabs in the project database. This command is enabled
only for a user with read/write or administrator access. All existing tables of the affected type(s),
including those in any open table editors, are updated immediately with the changes. A confirmation
dialog appears allowing the user to choose between continuing with the store operation and canceling
it.
4.9.3.10.1.7 Print current
The Print current command prints the contents of the currently displayed tab to be sent to a printer. A
dialog first appears allowing the user to select the printer (or file) and adjust the page setup. Selecting
95

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 96 of 314

Print causes the editor contents, including the data fields (if any), to be output to the selected printer
(or file). Selecting Cancel removes the print dialog without printing the table type editor contents.
4.9.3.10.1.8 Search
Selecting the Search command causes a search dialog to be displayed. The behavior of this dialog is
identical to that for the table editor dialog except that the search is confined to the currently displayed
table type editor. See paragraph 4.9.3.2.1.8 for details on use of the search dialog.
4.9.3.10.1.9 Close
The Close command performs the identical action to the Close button. The command closes the table
type editor window. If any changes for any of the tabs have not been stored then a dialog appears
allowing the user to confirm discarding the updates or to cancel closing the editor.
4.9.3.10.2 Edit menu
4.9.3.10.2.1 Copy
The Copy command places the contents of the highlighted cell(s) into the operating system’s clipboard.
This information can then be pasted into another cell or input field in the application, or into
applications other than CCDD. The Ctrl-C keys perform the same operation.
4.9.3.10.2.2 Paste
The Paste command places the contents of the operating system’s clipboard into the editor. The paste
location is determined by the leftmost and uppermost highlighted cell. The rows and columns of the
copied cells are placed into the editor beginning at this location and extending down and to the right,
overwriting the existing data in the cells. If insufficient columns exist for the pasted data then the excess
column information is ignored. Extra rows are inserted at the bottom of the table to provide room for
data that would be placed below the editor’s last row. See paragraph 4.9.3.10.2.3 on inserting copied
data without overwriting the existing cell contents. The Ctrl-V keys perform the same operation.
4.9.3.10.2.3 Insert
The Insert command behaves similarly to the Paste command (paragraph 4.9.3.10.2.2) except that no
editor data is overwritten. Instead, rows are inserted, beginning at the row below the upper- and
leftmost highlighted cell, to accommodate the pasted values. The Ctrl-I keys perform the same
operation.
4.9.3.10.2.4 Undo
The Undo command performs the same action as the Undo button. The command undoes the last
action performed (typing, paste, insert, delete, redo, etc.) in the currently displayed table type editor.
The Ctrl-Z keys perform the same operation.
4.9.3.10.2.5 Redo
The Redo command performs the same action as the Redo button. The command reverses the last
action undone (typing, paste, insert, delete, redo, etc.) in the currently displayed table type editor. The
Ctrl-Y keys perform the same operation.
4.9.3.10.2.6 Clear data
The Clear data command empties all of the currently displayed editor’s cells.

96

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 97 of 314

4.9.3.10.2.7 Add command arguments
The Add command arguments command appends a default set of command argument column
definitions to the currently displayed table type. The command is only enabled if the table type
represents a command. The index for the added arguments is determined by scanning the existing
argument column names for the pattern “Arg # “, where ‘#’ is the argument index (initialized to 1). If a
column is found matching the pattern then the index is incremented and the process is repeated. This
continues until no match is found; the new arguments are named using the index value.
4.9.3.10.3 Row menu
4.9.3.10.3.1 Insert row
The Insert row command performs the same action as the Ins Row button. The command causes an
empty row to be inserted below the currently selected cell’s row. If cells in multiple rows are selected
then the new row is inserted below the lowest one. If no cell is selected then the new row is inserted at
the end of the table. The Insert key performs the same operation.
4.9.3.10.3.2 Delete row(s)
The Delete row(s) command performs the same action as the Del Row button. This command deletes
the row associated with each currently selected cell. If cells in multiple rows are selected then each of
the rows is deleted. If no row is selected then this command has no effect. The Delete key performs the
same operation.
4.9.3.10.3.3 Move up
The Move up command performs the same action as the Up button. This command causes the row(s) of
the currently selected cell(s) to move up one row relative to the remaining rows. Since each row is a
column definition, this affects the order of the columns of new instances of this table type; it does not
affect existing tables of this type. Column order can be changed for each individual table in the table
editor (see paragraphs 4.9.3.2 and 4.9.3.2.4).
4.9.3.10.3.4 Move down
The Move down command performs the same action as the Down button. This causes the row(s) of the
currently selected cell(s) to move down one row relative to the remaining rows. Since each row is a
column definition, this affects the order of the columns of new instances of this table type; it does not
affect existing tables of this type. Column order can be changed for each individual table in the table
editor (see paragraphs 4.9.3.2 and 4.9.3.2.4).
4.9.3.10.4 Field menu
4.9.3.10.4.1 Manage fields
The Manage fields command allows the user to create, alter, and delete default data fields for the type
represented by the active table type editor tab. See paragraph 4.6 for information regarding data fields
and use of the data field editor.
The fields manipulated by the field editor are displayed below the table type editor table and
description when the Update button is pressed. The table type editor’s Store button or command must
be used to store the changes in the database and apply them to the tables. The structure table data
field editor allows the user to assign fields to only parent or child structure tables, or to all structure
tables.
After the field editor is closed values can be entered into the data fields; these become default values
for the fields in the tables to which the fields are applied. When the field updates are stored all tables of
97

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 98 of 314

the affected table type are updated, including those in any open table editors, and tables of this type
that are subsequently created have the default fields. If an existing table already has a field of the same
name then it is not added; however, the field size, data type, required status, description, and value
(depending on the state of the Overwrite values check box; see paragraph 4.9.3.10.4.3) are updated in
the table to match the default.
Fields can only be added to tables using this method. If a default field’s name is changed then this is
considered a new field and is added to the tables of the affected type if the type is stored. If a default
field is deleted then there is no effect on the tables when the type is stored.
4.9.3.10.4.2 Clear values
The Clear values command clears the contents of all of the currently displayed editor’s data fields. A
confirmation dialog is first displayed. Selecting Okay causes all of the data field values to be blanked.
Selecting Cancel exits the dialog without affected the data field values.
4.9.3.10.4.3 Overwrite values
The Overwrite values command determines how the default field values are applied when the table
type editor Store button is selected. The default setting is unchecked.
If the Overwrite values check box is not selected then the data field value changes are not applied to
existing tables of this table type if the tables already contain the affected data field. If an existing table
does not already have the data field then the field is added with the default value, regardless of the
check box status.
If the Overwrite values check box is selected then all existing tables of the updated table type that
already contain the data field have the contents of that field replaced with the value in the type editor
data field.
4.9.3.11 Manage data types
The Data Type Editor (Figure 52) provides a means of creating, modifying, and deleting primitive data
type definitions (see paragraph 4.5.4 for more information on data types). When a project database is
first created the primitive data types default to those shown in Table 5.

98

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 99 of 314

Figure 52. Data Type Editor dialog
The editor column descriptions are as follows:
Type Name

The type name is the text that represents the data type in a data table cell. Data type
names must adhere to C-language naming conventions; i.e., begin with an alphabetic or
underscore character, followed by alphabetic, numeric, or underscore characters. The
data type names are case insensitive and must be unique. If the type name is left blank
then the text in the C Name column determines the data type name displayed in the
data table cell.

C Name

The C name is the C-language equivalent of the data type and may contain spaces. It is
available to scripts and web applications (for example, a script can create a header file
of typedef statements using the type name and C name combinations). One or more
trailing asterisks are allowed if the corresponding base type is ‘pointer’. The C name is
used as the data type in a data table cell if the corresponding type name is blank.

Size

Size, in bytes, occupied by this data type. The size must be an integer greater than 0.

Base Type

The data type’s base type: signed integer, unsigned integer, floating point, character, or
pointer. The base type and the size determine how the data type is handled by the
application.

Each row in the table is a data type definition. The Type Name or C Name columns determine the data
type displayed in the data type column drop down menus. At least one of these columns must contain
text. The type name is used if it isn’t blank. If the type name is blank then the C type name is used as
the data type name. Valid values must be entered in the Size and Base Type columns for every
definition. The rows can be sorted by selecting the column headers, as with other table editors in the
application.
If a pointer base type is selected then an asterisk (*) is automatically appended to the C name (unless
the cell is empty). Conversely, if the base type is changed from a pointer to something else then any
trailing asterisk(s) in the C name is automatically removed. A pointer to a pointer (or a pointer to a
pointer to a pointer, etc.) can be indicated by appending the requisite number of asterisks. Below is an
example of creating a pointer to a structure named myStruct:

Figure 53. Example pointer to a structure data type
As an aid to creating a data type that represents a pointer to a structure a pop-up list of alphabetically
arranged prototype structure table names can be displayed from which a structure name can be
selected. This pop-up is displayed by pressing Ctrl-S and is only available when editing a cell in the Type
Name or C Type column and if the Base Type column for the edited row is blank or a pointer. Use the
mouse or keyboard to highlight the structure name to insert. Once the desired structure name is
highlighted either press the left mouse button or the Enter key. The structure name is inserted into the
table cell, replacing any selected text (Figure 54). Press the Escape key to remove the structure name
pop up dialog without inserting a structure name.

99

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 100 of 314

Figure 54. Structure name pop-up
If a data type is currently in use in a data table then the size and base type may be constrained by the
values in other columns on the same row of the affected table. For example, if a data type is a 2-byte
integer and is used in a data table where the parameter is assigned a bit length of 10 bits then the data
type size can’t be changed to a single byte since a single byte’s 8 bits is insufficient for the 10-bit
parameter. The instance where the bit length exceeds the desired size must first be altered before the
size can be updated. If an invalid size or base type is entered a dialog appears indicating the tables
where the inconsistency exists, and the table cell reverts to its previous value.
The button commands are described below:
Ins Row

Inserts an empty row below the currently selected cell’s row. If cells in multiple rows
are selected then the new row is inserted below the lowest one. If no cell is selected
then the new row is inserted at the end of the table.

Del Row

Deletes the row associated with each currently selected cell. If cells in multiple rows are
selected then each of the rows is deleted. If no row is selected then this has no effect.
A data type cannot be deleted if it is currently used in a table; all references must be
removed before the data type can be deleted.

Up

Move the row(s) of the currently selected cell(s) up one row relative to the remaining
rows. The order of the data type definitions in the editor has no effect on data type
usage, though it does determine the order of the types in the data type combo box lists.
The capability to arrange the rows is solely for the user to group the data types as
desired.

Down

Move the row(s) of the currently selected cell(s) down one row relative to the remaining
rows. The order of the data type definitions in the editor has no effect on data type
usage, though it does determine the order of the types in the data type combo box lists.
The capability to arrange the rows is solely for the user to group the data types as
desired.

Undo

Undoes the last action performed (typing, paste, insert, delete, redo, etc.).

Redo

Reverses the last action undone (typing, paste, insert, delete, undo, etc.).

Store

Stores the changes made to data type definitions in the data type editor into the project
database. All tables are updated with the changes, including any tables currently open
in a table editor.

100

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Close

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 101 of 314

Closes the data type editor window. If any changes have not been stored then a dialog
appears allowing the user to confirm discarding the updates or to cancel closing the
editor.

4.9.3.12 Manage input types
The Input Type Editor (Figure 55) provides a means of creating, modifying, and deleting custom input
type definitions (see paragraph 4.7 for more information on input types). These input types can then be
applied to data table columns via the table type editor (see paragraph 4.9.3.10) and to data fields via the
data field editor (see paragraph 4.6.1), the same as with the default input types.

Figure 55. Input Type Editor dialog
The editor column descriptions are as follows:
Type Name

The input type name is the text that appears in the table type and data field editors’
Input Type column drop down menus. Input type names are case insensitive and must
be unique (this includes the default input type names in paragraph 4.7).

Description

The input type’s description.

RegEx Match

This is the regular expression used to constrain the values entered into a data table cell
of data field of this input type. Editing of the RegEx Match column is disabled if the
Selection Items cell isn’t blank.

Selection Items If the data table cell or data field is constrained to specific text strings then these
strings can be entered into this column. The items must be separated by line feed
characters (use Alt-Enter to insert a line feed). Data table cells and data fields using
this input type display a drop down menu displaying these selection items from which
to choose. If the Selection Items column isn’t empty then editing of the Regex Match
column is disabled. The RegEx Match is automatically populated with the regular
expression that constrains the input type to the selection items and the Value Format
selections are altered. Deleting the contents of the Selection Items cell restores the
ability to edit the Regex Match and Value Format columns, but leaves their contents
untouched.
Value Format

When selected, a drop down menu appears displaying various format options. The
options available depend on whether or not the Selection Items column is empty. If
empty, the value format applies the specified formatting to a value entered in a data
table cell or data field. The following describes the result of applying the value formats
101

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 102 of 314

to the entered text (note that if the format isn’t applicable to the values allowed by the
input type’s regular expression then the format is ignored and the text is unchanged):
Text

No formatting is applied; the text remains unchanged. This is the
default format.
Array
This format expects one or more numerals, separated commas. The
spaces (if any) and commas between the numbers are replaced by “, “.
This is the same formatting used for array sizes.
Boolean
The table cell or data field is treated as a boolean and is displayed as a
check box. The RegEx Match column value is changed to the regular
expression matching a boolean value.
Float
The text is formatted as a floating point value in the form #.#. Leading
zeroes and excess trailing zeroes in the decimal portion are removed.
Hexadecimal The text is formatted as a hexadecimal number. “0x” is prepended if
not already present.
Integer
The text is formatted as an integer value. Leading zeroes and decimal
values are removed.
Number
The text is formatted as a floating point value in the form #.#. If the
value is an integer then the decimal and trailing zero is removed.
If the Selection Items column isn’t empty the the Value Format options are changed to
the ones shown below. These options do not reformat the selection items; instead
they define how the cells or fields using this input type are handled by the program,
such as for the script data access methods, or when parsing table data during EDS and
XTCE XML exports and imports. For example, the script data access methods that
return enumeration column values will consider a column with the Enumeration value
format as an enumeration column.
Text
No special treatment is performed for the selection items. This is the
default format.
Enumeration The selection items are treated as if the input type is an enumeration.
This is useful if the project requires a number of common enumerations
that are used frequently throughout the tables. This input type allows
the user to quickly choose from the acceptable enumerations.
Minimum
The selection items are treated as if the input type is a minimum value.
In a maximum value column is present then the value in this column
selected from the list must be less than or equal to the maximum value.
Maximum
The selection items are treated as if the input type is a maximum value.
In a minimum value column is present then the value in this column
selected from the list must be greater than or equal to the minimum
value.
Each row in the table is an input type definition. The rows can be sorted by selecting the column
headers, as with other table editors in the application. Every definition requires a value in the Type
Name, RegEx Match, and Value Format columns; the remaining column may be blank. If an input type
is currently in use in a data table or data field then the input type cannot be deleted; if attempted a
dialog appears indicating the tables and fields using the input type. If the regular expression or selection
item names are changed then a check is made against all of the tables and fields using the input type. If
the table cell or data field value no longer conforms to the regular expression then the value in the cell
or field is blanked.
102

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 103 of 314

The button commands are described below:
Ins Row

Inserts an empty row below the currently selected cell’s row. If cells in multiple rows
are selected then the new row is inserted below the lowest one. If no cell is selected
then the new row is inserted at the end of the table.

Del Row

Deletes the row associated with each currently selected cell. If cells in multiple rows are
selected then each of the rows is deleted. If no row is selected then this has no effect.
An input type cannot be deleted if it is currently used in a table; all references must be
removed before the input type can be deleted.

Up

Move the row(s) of the currently selected cell(s) up one row relative to the remaining
rows. The order of the input type definitions in the editor has no effect on input type
usage. The capability to arrange the rows is solely for the user to group the input types
as desired.

Down

Move the row(s) of the currently selected cell(s) down one row relative to the remaining
rows. The order of the input type definitions in the editor has no effect on input type
usage. The capability to arrange the rows is solely for the user to group the input types
as desired.

Undo

Undoes the last action performed (typing, paste, insert, delete, redo, etc.).

Redo

Reverses the last action undone (typing, paste, insert, delete, undo, etc.).

Store

Stores the changes made to input type names, descriptions, regular expression match
strings, format types, or selection items in the input type editor into the database. All
tables are updated with the changes, including any tables currently open in a table
editor.

Close

Closes the input type editor window. If any changes have not been stored then a dialog
appears allowing the user to confirm discarding the updates or to cancel closing the
editor.

4.9.3.13 Manage macros
The Macro Editor (Figure 56) provides a means of creating, modifying, and deleting macro definitions
(see paragraph 4.5.7 for more information on macros).

103

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 104 of 314

Figure 56. Macro Editor dialog
The editor column descriptions are as follows:
Macro Name

The macro name is the text that represents the macro’s value in a data table or macro
editor cell (the macro name is delimited by pairs of ‘#’ characters and highlighted in the
cell). Macro names are case insensitive and must be unique.

Value

The macro value is the text that the macro name represents.

Each row in the table is a macro definition. The rows can be sorted by selecting the column headers, as
with other table editors in the application. Every definition requires a name, but the value may be
blank. If a macro is currently in use in a table then the macro value is constrained by the input type of
the column(s) in which the macro is referenced. For example, if a macro is inserted into a column of
input type “Array index” then the macro’s value can be blank or must evaluate to a number (or a series
of numbers separated by commas), as required by the array index input type. If an invalid value is
entered a dialog appears indicating the tables where the inconsistency exists, and the editor cell reverts
to its previous value.
Macro values can reference other macros. Any macros referenced in a macro value are highlighted.
Each macro in the macro’s value, when the macro is expanded, is replaced by its value. Circular macro
references are not allowed (i.e., a macro references itself in its value); if detected a warning dialog is
displayed and the cell contents reverts to its previous value.
Macro values can also use the sizeof(data type) call. Any sizeof() calls in the macro value are highlighted
similar to macro references. When expanded the sizeof() call is replaced by the size in bytes of the
specified primitive or structure data type.
While editing a macro value cell, the Ctrl-M keys can be used to display a pop-up list of macros for
insertion into the value. Position the text cursor or highlight one or more characters to be replaced,
then press Ctrl-M. The pop-up list appears as shown in Figure 57.

104

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 105 of 314

Figure 57. Example of macro name selection pop-up dialog in a macro value cell
Pressing Ctrl-Shift-M temporarily replaces every macro with its corresponding value in the macro editor
Values column. Releasing the Ctrl-Shift-M keys restores the macro names in the cells.
The button commands are described below:
Ins Row

Inserts an empty row below the currently selected cell’s row. If cells in multiple rows
are selected then the new row is inserted below the lowest one. If no cell is selected
then the new row is inserted at the end of the table.

Del Row

Deletes the row associated with each currently selected cell. If cells in multiple rows are
selected then each of the rows is deleted. If no row is selected then this has no effect.
A macro cannot be deleted if it is currently used in a table; all references must be
removed before the macro can be deleted.

Up

Move the row(s) of the currently selected cell(s) up one row relative to the remaining
rows. The order of the macro definitions in the editor has no effect on macro usage.
The capability to arrange the rows is solely for the user to group the macros as desired.

Down

Move the row(s) of the currently selected cell(s) down one row relative to the remaining
rows. The order of the macro definitions in the editor has no effect on macro usage.
The capability to arrange the rows is solely for the user to group the macros as desired.

Undo

Undoes the last action performed (typing, paste, insert, delete, redo, etc.).

Redo

Reverses the last action undone (typing, paste, insert, delete, undo, etc.).

Store

Stores the changes made to macro names or values in the macro editor into the
database. All tables are updated with the changes, including any tables currently open
in a table editor.

Close

Closes the macro editor window. If any changes have not been stored then a dialog
appears allowing the user to confirm discarding the updates or to cancel closing the
editor.

4.9.3.14 Message IDs
Message IDs is a sub-menu of commands relating to message ID names and numbers, described in the
following paragraphs.
4.9.3.14.1 Assign IDs
The Assign IDs command provides a method for automatically assigning a unique message ID number to
table cells and data fields having an input type of ‘Message ID’ (see paragraph 4.7). This command is
enabled only for a user with read/write or administrator access. Telemetry message IDs are assigned in
the telemetry scheduler (see paragraph 4.9.4.2). Automatic assignment can be limited to structure
105

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 106 of 314

tables, command tables, other type tables, and groups as desired. A dialog appears (Figure 58)
containing a tab for structure tables, command tables, other table types, and groups.

Figure 58. Assign Message IDs dialog
For each tab there are two check boxes and two input fields. The first check box is used to determine if
the message IDs associated with the selected tab are to be updated. For the table type tabs this affects
both table cells and data fields, and for the Group tab this affects only group data fields. If this check
box is unchecked the remaining fields are disabled and ignored. The first input field is the starting ID
number, in hexadecimal (the ‘0x’ preceding the number is optional). The second field is the ID interval
which is used to calculate the next ID value in the sequence - the default is 1; any positive integer value
is valid. The final check box determines whether or not existing table/group message ID numbers are
updated or left as is. When checked, existing message IDs are replaced unless the ID is flagged as
protected. Message IDs are protected if a ‘#’ character is appended to the ID value (example: ox1234#).
When Okay is selected then the tables representing a structure, command, or other type, and group
data fields (depending on whether or not the associated check box is selected) are checked to
determine if they have a column(s) or data field(s) with the input type of ‘Message ID.’ If so, then the
column/field value is assigned a message ID number. IDs are assigned beginning with the starting ID
number, and with each subsequent ID number equal to the previous number plus the interval value.
Table column message IDs are assigned (for all tables) before message ID data fields. Macros are
allowed in the table columns representing message IDs; however, the auto-assignment process will
overwrite the macros with message ID values if the overwrite check box is selected for the table’s type.
An ID is skipped if it is listed in the reserved message ID list (see 4.9.3.14.2), assigned to table columns
and/or data fields for a table type that doesn’t have the overwrite check box selected, assigned to a
group data field (unless the Group overwrite check box is selected), or assigned to telemetry messages
in the telemetry scheduler (see paragraph 4.9.4.2). If the overwrite check box isn’t selected then the
values for any existing structure (command, other, group) message ID data fields are also skipped in
order to avoid duplicate ID values. This action also updates the project database and the message ID
number columns and/or data fields for any open table editors. Select Cancel to exit the dialog without
altering the message ID values.
4.9.3.14.2 Reserve IDs
The editor dialog shown in Figure 59 to appears when the Reserve message IDs command is selected.
This dialog allows message IDs, either singly or as ranges, to be flagged as reserved. This means that
when automatic assignment of message IDs is performed (see paragraphs 4.9.3.14.1 and 4.9.4.2) the
message IDs in the reserved table are skipped.

106

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 107 of 314

Figure 59. Reserved Message ID Editor dialog
The editor column descriptions are as follows:
Message ID(s) This column can contain a single hexadecimal number, optionally prepended with “0x”,
or a range of IDs consisting of two hexadecimal numbers separated by a hyphen (-). If a
range is entered the second number must be greater than the first. Message IDs are not
allowed to be duplicated in the table. This includes IDs falling within an existing range
or overlapping of two ranges.
Description

This column can be used to describe the ID or ID range. It may remain empty.

Each row in the table is a reserved message ID definition. Every definition requires a message ID or ID
range, but the description may be blank. If an invalid or duplicate value is entered a dialog appears
indicating the problem, and the editor cell reverts to its previous value. The rows can be sorted by
selecting the column headers, as with other table editors in the application.
The button commands are described below:
Ins Row

Inserts an empty row below the currently selected cell’s row. If cells in multiple rows
are selected then the new row is inserted below the lowest one. If no cell is selected
then the new row is inserted at the end of the table.

Del Row

Deletes the row associated with each currently selected cell. If cells in multiple rows are
selected then each of the rows is deleted. If no row is selected then this has no effect.

Up

Move the row(s) of the currently selected cell(s) up one row relative to the remaining
rows. The order of the reserved message ID definitions in the editor has no effect on ID
usage. The capability to arrange the rows is solely for the user to group the IDs as
desired.

Down

Move the row(s) of the currently selected cell(s) down one row relative to the remaining
rows. The order of the reserved message ID definitions in the editor has no effect on ID
usage. The capability to arrange the rows is solely for the user to group the IDs as
desired.

Undo

Undoes the last action performed (typing, paste, insert, delete, redo, etc.).

Redo

Reverses the last action undone (typing, paste, insert, delete, undo, etc.).
107

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 108 of 314

Store

Stores the changes made to reserved message IDs or description in the reserved
message ID editor into the project database.

Close

Closes the reserved message ID editor window. If any changes have not been stored
then a dialog appears allowing the user to confirm discarding the updates or to cancel
closing the editor.

4.9.3.14.3 Show all IDs
The Show all IDs command displays a table showing all of the message IDs in a project along with their
corresponding message names and the entity (table or group) in which the message name and ID are
found. Figure 60 is an example of the table produced by the command. For a table cell or data field
containing a message name and ID to be recognized as such it must have the input type Message name
& ID (see paragraph 4.7 for more information on input types).
A script data access method, getMessageOwnersIDsAndNames, is provided that returns the same
information as is produced by this command; see the reference in Table 10 for details.

Figure 60. Example Show all IDS dialog
If one or more cells is selected and the Open button is pressed then the table(s) associated with the
selected cell(s) are opened in a table editor. A row is ignored if it contains a message ID belonging to a
group or telemetry message.
Selecting the Print button opens a printer selection dialog in order to print a copy of the table to the
selected printer or file. Selecting Close closes the message ID dialog.
4.9.3.14.4 Find duplicates
The Find duplicates command searches the project database table cells, data fields, and telemetry
messages for message ID values used more than once, and displays a dialog showing these IDs and
where they are located (see the example dialog in Figure 61). If no duplicate message ID exists the
dialog’s table is empty.

108

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 109 of 314

Figure 61. Example Duplicate Message IDs dialog
The Message ID column shows the duplicated ID as a hexadecimal value; the table is sorted based on
the ID value. The Owners column displays the location(s) where the message ID is referenced – this can
be a table cell or data field (table path and name is preceded by “Table:”), or telemetry message
(message data stream and message name is preceded by “Message:”). The rows can be sorted by
selecting the column headers, as with other tables in the application. Column order can be changed by
dragging a column to a new position.
Selecting Print causes the dialog contents to be output to the selected printer (or file). Selecting Close
closes the duplicate message IDs dialog.
4.9.3.15 Manage project fields
The Manage project fields command causes the project data field manager dialog, shown in Figure 62,
to appear. Data fields (see paragraph 4.6) may be associated with a project, similar to how they can be
associated with specific data tables and groups. The project’s description can also be edited via this
dialog (the description can also be edited using the Rename command in the Project menu; see
paragraph 4.9.2.4).

Figure 62. Project data field management dialog
The Description field appears by default and cannot be deleted. This field is enabled only for a user with
administrator access. The Fields button causes the data field editor (see paragraph 4.6.1 for details on it
use) to appear; data fields can be added, modified, or removed via this editor.
The project data field manager button commands are summarized below:
109

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 110 of 314

Fields

Invokes the data field editor in order to create, alter, and delete data fields for the project.

Clear

Replace the values in all data fields with blanks and deselect any check box data field for
the project.

Undo

Undoes the last action performed (typing, paste, insert, delete, redo, etc.) in the manager
dialog.

Redo

Reverses the last action undone (typing, paste, insert, delete, undo, etc.) in the manager
dialog.

Store

Stores the changes made to the project description and data fields in the manager dialog
into the project database.

Close

Closes the project data field manager window. If any changes have not been stored then
a dialog appears allowing the user to confirm discarding the updates or to cancel closing
the dialog.

4.9.3.16 Show/edit fields
The purpose of the Show/edit fields command is to provide a means of displaying, editing, and
removing data fields for one or more data tables and/or groups via a single editor (as opposed to
displaying the data fields for a specific owner table in a table editor or group in the group manager).
Selecting the Show/edit fields command produces a dialog displaying a table tree and a set of check
boxes, one for each unique data field name currently in use by the project’s data tables. See Figure 63
for an example; if no tables exist or no data fields are currently assigned then a warning dialog appears
instead indicating there is nothing to display.

Figure 63. Example Select Data Field(s) dialog
The user chooses the field(s) to display/edit by selecting the field’s associated check box. The Select all
data fields check box is used to alternately select and deselect all of the data field check boxes. The
fields can be filtered by selecting one or more tables from the table tree – only the selected fields in the
selected tables are displayed in the editor. Selection of a header node in the table tree (e.g., ‘Parents &
Children’, or a group name if group filtering is enabled) selects all tables under that header. If no tables
are selected then no filtering occurs and the selected data field(s) are displayed for any table. Selecting

110

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 111 of 314

the Okay button opens the data field editor, while the Cancel button closes the dialog without opening
the editor. An example of the editor dialog that appears is shown in Figure 64.

Figure 64. Example Show/Edit Data Fields dialog
The first column, Field Owner, displays the data field owner. For a top-level structure table or nonstructure table this is the table’s name. For a child table the child’s prototype and instance (or variable)
name are displayed in the format prototype.instance, and are indented by an amount based on the
number of levels the child is from its root structure. Project-level fields display “Project:” as the field
owner. Fields that belong to a group display the group’s name with “Group:” prepended, and default
data fields (those belonging to a table type definition) display the table type name prepended with
“Type:”.
The second column, Structure Path, displays the structure path for child tables, listing each prototype
and instance pair in the child structure’s path leading back to its root structure. The root structure is
shown first, then each subsequent child prototype and instance in the path. If the field owner is not a
child structure then the structure path is this row has a gray background. The column is not displayed if
there is no child structure table field owner in any row of the editor. For example, note the row in
Figure 64 for the table “ahrs_M_BeaconedTimestamp.beaconedTimestamp”. Since its Structure Path
column is not empty, the table is a child structure. Working upwards from the bottom of the list,
“beaconedTimestamp” is a child of the structure “ahrs_M_OutData” (a structure that is of prototype
“ahrs_M_OutData_T”), which in turn is a child of the root structure “ahrs_OutDataPacket_T”.
The remaining columns in the editor show the contents of the data fields chosen in the selection dialog.
A cell with a gray background indicates that the associated table does not have the data field indicated
by the cell’s column; these cells may not be edited. A yellow background means that another cell or
cells in the same column has an identical, non-blank value. The rows can be sorted by selecting the
column headers, as with other table editors in the application. Column order can be changed by
dragging a column to a new position.
Below the editor table are a number of filter check boxes that determine the type(s) of data fields
displayed in the table. All of the filters are initially selected. The filters are as follows:
Project

Display the project-level data fields (see paragraph 4.9.3.15).

Tables

Display data fields belonging to the data tables (see paragraph 4.9.3.2.5.1).
111

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Groups

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 112 of 314

Display group data fields (see paragraph 4.9.3.9).

Table types Display the default data fields; those belonging to a table type definition (see paragraph
4.9.3.10.4.1).
The data fields to display can be changed by pressing the Select button, causing the initial data field
selection dialog to reappear. However, if there is an unstored change or field marked for removal a
confirmation dialog appears first, allowing the user to choose between continuing with the selection
operation and discarding the changes, or canceling it and retaining the current selection with its
unstored changes. The current selection state of the data field type filter check boxes is retained when
the newly selected fields are displayed.
Data field values can be altered or the entire field removed via the editor. To change a field’s value
highlight the cell and press the Enter key, or double left-click the mouse while the pointer is over the
cell. The data type constraints set when the field was created (e.g., hexadecimal or positive integer) are
enforced for the new field values. To remove a field entirely select the field using the mouse and press
the Remove button. The field’s background is displayed in red to indicate it is marked for removal.
Multiple fields can be selected for removal. Selecting a marked field and pressing Remove again
unmarks the field for removal, and the background color returns to normal.
If one or more cells is selected and the Open button is pressed then the table(s) associated with the
selected cell(s) are opened in a table editor. A row is ignored if it contains a data field belonging to a
group or table type.
Selecting the Print button opens a printer selection dialog in order to print a copy of the editor table to
the selected printer or file.
Unstored data field edits and removal selections can be undone by pressing the Undo button. Changes
are undone in the order they were input. The Ctrl-Z key sequence performs the identical function.
Conversely, undone changes can be reentered by pressing the Redo button or by the Ctrl-Y key
sequence.
The Store button must be pressed to update the project’s database with the data field value changes
and removals. A confirmation dialog appears allowing the user to choose between continuing with the
store operation and canceling it.
Selecting Close closes the data field editor dialog. If a change has been made to a data field that hasn’t
been stored in the project database, or there are one or more fields marked for removal then a
confirmation dialog appears allowing the user to choose between continuing with the close operation
and discarding the changes, or canceling it and keeping the editor open.
4.9.3.17 Padding
The Padding command causes a dialog to be displayed (Figure 65) that provides for adding or removing
padding variables from the structure tables to properly byte align the structure variables. This
command is enabled only for a user with read/write or administrator access. The dialog’s table tree
displays the prototype structure tables. One or more tables must be selected before adjusting the
padding. Selecting the Prototypes node in the table tree selects all structure tables.

112

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 113 of 314

Figure 65. Padding adjustment dialog
The padding adjustment button commands are summarized below:
Add/Update Inserts padding variables into the selected prototype structure tables as needed to align
the variables based on the size of the largest element within the structure (including any
referenced child structures). The padding variables are of data type char and are
represented as a single variable or an array of variables (if needed for multiple,
consecutive padding). The exception for the data type is that padding variables added to
“fill out” the unused bits for a bit-wise variable or series of bit-packed variables has the
same data type as the bit-wise variable(s). The padding variable names are in the format
pad#__ (where # is one or more numerals). Padding variables are highlighted in the
structure tables; see Figure 66. These variable rows may be manually edited as with any
other row – added, altered, or removed – but are only recognized as the automatically
inserted variety if they conform to the aforementioned name and data type constraints.
If any data table has unstored changes a confirmation dialog appears allowing the user to
choose between continuing with the padding add/update operation (losing the unstored
changes) and canceling it (allowing the changes to be stored).

113

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 114 of 314

Figure 66. Structure table showing highlighted padding variables
Remove

Causes all padding variables to be removed from the selected prototype structure tables.
Only variables conforming to the name and data type constraints outlined in the
description of the Add/Update button are recognized as padding variables. If any data
table has unstored changes a confirmation dialog appears allowing the user to choose
between continuing with the padding removal operation (losing the unstored changes)
and canceling it (allowing the changes to be stored).

Close

Closes the padding adjustment dialog.

While the padding is being added/updated or removed a dialog appears (Figure 67) showing the
adjustment progress. This dialog allows halting padding adjustment by pressing the Halt button.
Padding may be altered in the project database for some of the structures depending on when in the
adjustment process the Halt button is pressed.

Figure 67. Example padding adjustment progress/cancellation dialog
4.9.3.18 Show variables
The Show variables command causes a dialog to appear that displays the variable paths and names, in
alphabetical order, for tables representing structures in the project database (see Figure 68 for an
example). The variables displayed can be constrained by selecting one or more tables in the table tree.
114

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 115 of 314

Only variables for the selected tables are displayed. Selection of a header node in the table tree (e.g.,
‘Parents & Children’, or a group name if group filtering is enabled) selects all tables under that header. If
no table or header node is selected in the tree then all variables in the project are displayed. The
number of variables matching the constraints is displayed beside the variable table’s label.
The paths and names are shown in two formats. The Application Format column shows the format used
within the application:
rootTable
[,structureDataType1.structureVariableName1
[,structureDataType2.structureVariableName2
[,...]]],
primitiveDataType.variableName[[arrayIndex]]
The variable path and name is a combination of the structure’s root table, ancestor structure(s) (if any),
and the variable data type and name. This combination is unique for each variable defined in the
project database. Note that any macro embedded in a variable name is replaced by its corresponding
value before being displayed in the dialog.
The User Format column shows the path and name based on the user inputs. The Enter variable path
separator character(s) text field allows entering the character(s) that are used to replace the commas
that separate each variable in the variable path. The Enter data type/variable name separator
character(s) text field allows entering the character(s) that are used to replace the periods that separate
the data types and variable names. The Hide data types check box, if selected, causes the data types
(structure and primitive) to be removed from the path, along with the periods that separate the data
types from the variable names. The data type/variable name separator field is disabled and ignored for
this case. Array member indices are altered by replacing the left bracket ([) with an underscore (_) and
removing the right bracket (]). The User Format column values are identical to that returned by the
script data access method call (see Table 10):
getFullVariableName(“variable path + name”, path_separator,
hide_data_types, type_and_name_separator)

To perform a conversion enter the separator character(s) and set the data type check box, then press
the Show button. The User Format column updates to display the variables in the new format. The
Print button outputs the table to a user-specified printer or file. The Store button stores the separators
and show/hide data type state as a program preference so that these are restored if the dialog is closed
and reopened. Additionally, this sets the separators used in displaying the variable path column; any
open tables displaying a column with the variable path input data type are automatically updated.
Select the Close button to exit the dialog.

115

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 116 of 314

Figure 68. Example variable paths & names dialog
4.9.3.19 Show commands
The Show commands command causes a dialog to appear that displays information for commands
defined in the project database (see Figure 69 for an example). The command information is displayed
in alphabetical order, based on the command name (then on command code, and finally on command
table name). The commands displayed can be constrained by selecting one or more tables in the table
tree. Only commands for the selected tables are displayed. Selection of a header node in the table tree
(e.g., ‘Commands’, or a group name if group filtering is enabled) selects all tables under that header. If
no table or header node is selected in the tree then all commands in the project are displayed. The
number of commands matching the constraints is displayed beside the command information table’s
label.
The Command Name, Command Code, and Command Table columns show the command’s name, code,
and table respectively. The Arguments column displaye the command’s argument names, if any.
Initially all commands are displayed. Select or deselect tables in the table tree and press the Show
button to update the displayed commands. The Print button outputs the table to a user-specified
printer or file. Select the Close button to exit the dialog.
116

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 117 of 314

Figure 69. Example command information dialog
4.9.3.20 Search tables
The Search tables dialog provides a means of searching the project database data and internal tables for
a specified text string (see Figure 70). Case sensitivity for the search is governed by the Ignore text case
check box.
The Allow regular expression check box, when checked, allows the use of a regular expression to define
the search pattern in the search text field. A regular expression can be formulated to find multiple
matching conditions (for example, the search for a.c would match any string that has a single character
between the characters ‘a’ and ‘c’). Information regarding the use of regular expressions is beyond the
scope of this document; however, resources and tutorials can be found online. When unchecked, the
search text is matched as typed in the search text field.
The Search data table cells only check box, if selected, only displays matches found within the project
database’s data table cells and ignores those in the internal tables (see Appendix E.4; data table cell
values stored in the custom values tables are included in the search).
The search can be constrained by selecting one or more tables in the table tree. Only matches in the
selected tables are reported. Selection of a header node in the table tree (e.g., ‘Parents & Children’, or a
group name if group filtering is enabled) selects all tables under that header. If no table or header node
is selected in the tree then all tables are searched.
117

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 118 of 314

Enter the search text in the input field and select the Search button. The search results are displayed in
the dialog’s Search results table. The number of results is displayed beside the results table’s label. The
first column, Owner, shows the name of the data table or data object (table type definition, data field,
group, script association, link, telemetry message, or scheduler entry) where a match is found. The
second column, Location, describes the location of the match in the table/object. For a table the
location is the column name in the table. A data object location depends on the type of object. For a
data field this can be the field name, description, etc., whereas for a group or link this can be one of the
tables or variables belonging to the group/link. The last column, Context, displays the string from the
table or object containing the search text, with the search text highlighted.
The search text field uses auto-completion to fill in the search string. The previous search strings (those
for the event log, table, and script) are remembered, including those from previous sessions. The
number of remembered search strings can be changed via the Preferences dalog, and defaults to 30.
Case sensitivity for auto-completion is based on the Ignore text case check box selection state.
The input text can be changed and the Search button pressed again to initiate another search of the
tables. If one or more cells is selected and the Open button is pressed then the table(s) associated with
the selected cells are opened in a table editor. A row is ignored if it contains a reference to other than a
table. The search results can be output to a file or printer by selecting the Print button. To exit the
search dialog select the Close button.

Figure 70. Search tables dialog

4.9.4

Scheduling

The scheduling commands are used to create and manage the information required to schedule
telemetry downlink and application execution.
118

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 119 of 314

4.9.4.1 Manage links
The Manage links command opens the Manage Links dialog (Figure 71). This command is disabled if no
rate columns are defined. The link manager allows the user to create telemetry parameter linkages.
These are simply groupings, selected by the user, of telemetry parameters (i.e., variables in the
structures) with the same sample rate. The link information is used when assigning variables to
telemetry messages in the telemetry scheduler (paragraph 4.9.4.2) to force the linked variables to be
contained within the same message(s). The linkages created are specific to the data stream to which the
linkage belongs. In other words, variables that are linked in one data stream do not have to be linked in
another data stream.

Figure 71. Manage Links dialog
The dialog’s components are as follows. Along the top are the tabs that allow selection of the data
stream in which to create, alter, or delete linkages. The upper left displays a tree showing structures
and their members (under the heading Variables), both child structures and primitive variable types.
The variables that are displayed in the tree are determined by the rate chosen from the Select rate
combo box pull down menu near the bottom of the dialog. Rate values are grayed out and can’t be
selected if there is no variable that has that rate assigned. In the upper right is a tree showing the links
and their member variables (under the heading Links). Between the trees are left and right arrows for
adding or removing a variable from a link. Each tree also has one or more check boxes, to
expand/collapse the tree and to filter the tree information. Below the trees is an input field for
providing a description of a link. Underneath this is the link rate, in samples per second, and the total
119

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 120 of 314

size in bytes of the link, which is the sum of the byte sizes of the variables assigned to the link. The
description, rate, and size fields are active when a single link is selected in the link tree.
The space separating the variable and link trees delineates a split pane control that is used to resize
these panels relative to one another. Position the mouse pointer between the two tree panels and
when the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow press and hold the left mouse button. Space
permitting, the adjoining panes can be resized by moving the mouse pointer left or right. Release the
mouse button to exit resizing.
In the link tree, displayed in parentheses next to each link name, are that link’s rate and size in bytes
(the same information that appears below the description field when this link is selected). A link’s rate
must match the selected sample rate (or the link must have no variables assigned) in order for it to be
assigned variables from the variable tree. A check mark ( ) beside the link name indicates that the link
can be assigned variables from the variable tree, and a red X ( ) is displayed if the link is incompatible
with the selected sample rate (the tree text is also grayed out for incompatible links).
A variable may not be assigned to more than one link for a given data stream. Once assigned to a link
the variable still appears in the variable tree but it is disabled (grayed out and not selectable). When a
variable is removed from a link it becomes enabled again in the variable tree. Once an entire structure’s
complement of variables is assigned the structure itself it disabled in the variable tree, and if all
structures are assigned then the Structures & Variables tree node itself is disabled.
If a variable is selected in the Variables tree then the link to which it belongs is selected automatically in
the Links tree. Since linked variables are disabled in the Variables tree the variable isn’t highlighted
when selected. Selecting a non-linked variable deselects any highlighted link in the Links tree.
To create a link select the New button and provide a link name and, optionally, a description, in the
input dialog that appears (Figure 72). The description can be altered later in the main dialog. The new
link name appears in the link tree. The link name may not be blank, nor is the name allowed to match
that of an existing link in the selected data stream. The link name may contain alphanumeric, space, and
punctuation characters. There is no constraint on the length of the name.

Figure 72. New Link dialog
To add variables to a link select the link in the link tree using the mouse or keyboard. Expand the
variable tree as needed and select one or more variables using the mouse or keyboard. Multiple
variables can be selected simultaneously by holding the Ctrl or Shift keys down when making a selection.
Selecting a structure automatically includes its child structures (and their children, etc.), and all variables
associated with the structure(s). Choosing a child structure automatically includes its parent structure,
and its parent’s parent, etc., up to its root structure, but does not include any of its sibling variables (i.e.,
a variable having the same parent structure and at the same tree level as the chosen variable). The
exception is if the selected variable is bit-packed with one or more variables; in this case all of the
packed variables are automatically included (see paragraph 4.5.5). Finally, select the right arrow button
120

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 121 of 314

in the center of the dialog. The variable(s) chosen appear in the selected link, and the link’s tree is
expanded to show the variable(s) added. Note that the variable hierarchy is preserved in the link’s tree.
More variables can be assigned to the link as described above.
To remove structures or variables from a link expand the link’s tree and select the structure(s) and/or
variable(s) to remove using the mouse or keyboard. Then select the left arrow button in the center of
the dialog to delete the structure(s) or variable(s) from the link. A structure’s children (and their
children, etc.) and variables are removed along with the chosen structure. If a bit-packed variable is
removed then all other variables packed together with it are removed as well, even if not explicitly
selected.
To delete a link, first select it in the link tree, then select the Delete button. Multiple links can be
removed simultaneously if desired by highlighting them while using the Shift or Ctrl keys.
To rename a link, select a single link from the link tree, then press the Rename button. An input dialog
appears with the name of the selected link in the input field. Alter the name as desired and select Okay
to change the link’s name. The renamed link name may not be blank, nor is the name allowed to match
that of an existing link in the current data stream. Select Cancel to exit the input dialog without
affecting the link’s name.
A link, including its description, variable structure(s) and variable(s), can be copied from one data stream
to another. First select one or more links from the link tree to be copied, then press the Copy button. A
dialog appears (Figure 73) with the name(s) of the selected link(s) in the link name text field. Below the
link name field is an array of check boxes, one for each of the project’s data stream names. The current
data stream is grayed out and can’t be selected (recall that a variable may belong to only one link in a
given data stream). Select one or more data streams to which the link (or links) is to be copied. Press
the Copy button to copy the link(s) to the selected data stream(s). Select Cancel to exit the copy dialog
without copying the link.

Figure 73. Copy Link(s) dialog
If the targeted data stream doesn’t support the link’s sample rate or the link name already exists in the
stream then the link isn’t copied to that stream. If a variable’s sample rate differs between the copied
stream and the target stream, or if the variable is unavailable in the target stream (i.e., the structure
containing the variable doesn’t have the rate column corresponding to the target data stream) then the
variable isn’t copied. For these cases a dialog is displayed indicating which link(s) or link member
variable(s) could not be copied to which stream(s) and the reason for the failure(s) (see example in
Figure 74). The Print button allows outputting the coy failure table to the selected printer or file. The
Close button exits the copy failure dialog.

121

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 122 of 314

Figure 74. Example link copy failure dialog
A link’s description can be added or changed by first selecting the link in the link tree. The current
description for the link appears in the Description input field. The description can then be changed as
desired.
Changes to the links (descriptions and member variables) for all data streams are stored in the project
database only when the Store button is pressed. If changes have been made a confirmation dialog first
appears. Select Okay to store the updates; select Cancel to exit the confirmation dialog without altering
the project database.
Select the Close button to exit the link manager dialog. If there are any unsaved link changes in any of
the data streams a dialog appears requesting confirmation to discard the changes. Select Okay to exit
the link manager, losing any unsaved changes. Select Cancel to return to the link manager dialog.
The link manager button commands are summarized below:
New

Create a new link.

Delete

Delete the selected link(s).

Rename

Rename the selected link.

Copy

Copy the selected link, including its member tables, so another data stream.

Undo

Undoes the last action performed (table assignment, typing, paste, insert, delete, redo,
etc.) on the selected link.

Redo

Reverses the last action undone (table assignment, typing, paste, insert, delete, undo,
etc.) on the selected link.

Store

Stores the changes made to the links in the link manager into the project database.

Close

Closes the link manager window. If any changes have not been stored then a dialog
appears allowing the user to confirm discarding the updates or to cancel closing the
editor.

4.9.4.2 Telemetry
The Telemetry command opens the Telemetry Scheduler dialog (Figure 75). This command is disabled if
no rate columns are defined. The telemetry scheduler is used to assign a project’s variables to telemetry
messages. The message information can be used to build a CFS housekeeping “copy table” (for
122

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 123 of 314

example, by using the copy table script provided with the CCDD application). The available messages
are determined by the rate parameters. These parameters can be altered in the Rate Parameters dialog
(see paragraph 4.9.4.4). Before the telemetry scheduler can be used the following must be done:




Adjust the rate parameters to establish the correct boundaries for handling the project’s
telemetry
Assign rates to the variables to be downlinked in the Edit Table dialog (see paragraph 4.9.3.2)
(Optional) Assign variables that are desired to be sent down in the same message to a link using
the link manager (see paragraph 4.9.4.1)

Figure 75. Telemetry Scheduler dialog
The Telemetry Scheduler dialog is composed of number of components. Along the top are tabs for each
defined data stream (see paragraph 4.8). Each stream has its own variable rates and message
assignments. Selecting a tab displays the dialog components associated with that data stream. At the
top left is displayed the total number of bytes remaining to be assigned. This value is equal to the
maximum bytes per second (from the Rate Parameters dialog) minus the size in bytes of all the variables
assigned to messages. At the upper right is the cycle time which is the amount of time it will take for the
messages to repeat; e.g., a cycle time of 2 seconds means that each message in the table will be sent
down at least once every 2 seconds.
The Variables tree, at the left of the dialog, displays in tree format the variables available for downlink.
Only variables assigned a rate are displayed in the variable tree. The tree is separated into two sections:
Linked Variables and Unlinked Variables. Linked Variables displays the links per the currently selected
data stream and rate filter. Each link contains the variables assigned to the link via the link manager.
Unlinked Variables displays all the variables with a rate matching the selected rate filter. Variables
assigned to a link are also displayed, but are grayed out and cannot be selected. Beneath the variable
tree are two check boxes that are used to expand the tree or filter it by group.
To the right of the Variables tree is the Options list. This list displays the available options, based on the
selected rate filter, for assignment of the variables to the messages. For example, if the rate filter is set
to 5 and there are 10 available messages then the options displayed are “Option 1: Messages 1, 3, 5, 7,
9” and “Option 2: Messages 2, 4, 6, 8, 10” (assuming the cycle time is one second).
The Rate Filter, just below the Options list, is a pull down list of the data stream’s available rates. The
selected rate is used to filter the Variables tree and the Options list. Rate values are grayed out and
123

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 124 of 314

can’t be selected if there is no variable in the data stream that has that rate assigned. The variable tree
only displays variables that have a rate that matches the selected rate filter value. The user can change
the rate filter at any time to make the Variables tree and Options list update.
The Scheduler table, located on the right of the Options list, contains a table with every available
message. The scheduler table has at least three columns: the Message column, which displays the
message name; the Bytes column, which displays the remaining bytes for each message; the ID column,
which display the message’s ID value. Extra columns, labeled Sub 1, Sub 2, etc. are added if any
message has a sub-message; for messages without the specified sub-message the column is grayed out.
The Bytes column is updated as variables are added or removed from the message. A negative number
indicates that the message is over assigned (i.e., insufficient bytes available to contain the assigned
variables); the Message column is displayed in red in this case. The message names and the ID (and sub
ID) values can be edited in the Scheduler table, or can be automatically assigned in the Assign Telemetry
Messages dialog called via the Assign Msgs button.
The Assigned Variables tree, located to the right of the Scheduler table, shows the variables assigned to
the most recently selected message in the Scheduler table.
In between the Options list and Scheduler table are two arrow buttons. The right arrow button assigns
one or more variables to a message. The assignment process is described below. The left arrow button
removes one or more variables from a message. The removal process is described below.
The Variables, Options, Scheduler, and Assigned Variables portions of the telemetry scheduler can be
resized. Position the mouse pointer between adjoining panes and when the pointer changes to a
double-headed arrow press and hold the left mouse button. Space permitting, the adjoining panes can
be resized by moving the mouse pointer left or right. Release the mouse button to exit resizing.
At the bottom of the telemetry scheduler dialog is the button panel. The button functions are as
follows:
Auto-fill

Assigns all the variables in the variable tree that are not yet assigned to messages.
Auto-fill does this optimally so each message is filled as evenly as possible. During the
auto-fill operation a progress/cancellation dialog appears (Figure 76). Pressing the
dialog’s Halt button stops the auto-fill operation; however, any variable assignments
made up to that point are retained.

Figure 76. Telemetry message auto-fill progress/cancellation dialog
If auto-fill is successful then all the variables are assigned to an appropriate message. If
auto-fill is unable to assign every variable (due to insufficient room or no available
option) it displays a dialog indicating how many variables are left unassigned.
Assign Msgs

Opens the Assign Telemetry Messages dialog (Figure 77). This dialog provides a means
for assigning message names and/or message IDs to all messages and sub-messages
based on a pattern, starting value, and interval value.

124

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 125 of 314

Figure 77. Assign telemetry message names and IDs dialog
To assign message names the Assign telemetry message names check box under the
Message name tab must be selected. A pattern for the names is entered in the Name
pattern input field. This pattern must adhere to alphanumeric naming constraints (see
paragraph 4.7) except that it also must contain a single ‘%<0#>d’ format string
somewhere after the first character. The format string is replaced with a sequence
number when the names are assigned. The optional ‘0#’, where ‘#’ represents one or
more digits, provides a means of padding the sequence number with leading zeroes so
as to bring its length to # digits. The first message name uses the pattern and the
Starting number field value; the Message interval value is added to the previous
message’s number for each subsequent message name. For example, with the values as
shown in Figure 77 the message names are “Message_001”, “Message_002”,
“Message_003”, etc., until all messages are named.
To assign message IDs the Assign telemetry message IDs check box under the Message
ID tab must be selected. The Starting ID field is the starting ID number, in hexadecimal.
The ID interval field is the interval used to calculate the next ID value in the sequence the default is 1; any positive integer value is valid. The Overwrite existing IDs check box
determines whether or not messages with an existing ID number are updated or left as
is. The IDs are assigned beginning with the starting ID number and with each
subsequent ID number equal to the previous number plus the interval value. Message
IDs in the reserved message ID list (see 4.9.3.14.2) and IDs already assigned to message
ID data fields for structure and command tables are automatically skipped when
assigning IDs to the telemetry messages.
When Okay is selected the message names and/or IDs, based on the check box states,
are assigned to the messages in the Options list and Scheduler table. Press Cancel to
exit the dialog without changing the message names or IDs. Note that he telemetry
scheduler’s Store button must be used to update the messages in the project database.
The names and/or IDs are assigned to the current data stream; the process must be
repeated for each data stream. Avoid using the identical message ID name pattern for
different streams since this can lead to duplicate output message ID names when
creating the housekeeping copy table.
Clear Rate

Removes all message and sub-message variable assignments for variables with a rate
matching the currently selected rate filter.

Clear Msgs

Removes all message and sub-message variable assignments.
125

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 126 of 314

Add Sub-msg

Adds a sub-message to the message currently selected in the Scheduler table. Any
number of sub-messages may be added. Adding a sub-message removes all of a
message’s sub-message variable assignments. This is done since the number of submessages affects the rate at which a sub-message is sent.

Del Sub-msg

Removes the currently selected sub-message in the Scheduler table. Deleting a submessage removes all sub-message variable assignments for that message. This is done
since the number of sub-messages affects the rate at which a sub-message is sent.

Store

Stores the telemetry scheduler data in the project database. Any changes not stored
before closing the telemetry scheduler dialog are lost.

Close

Closes the telemetry scheduler dialog. If there are any unsaved changes in any of the
data streams a dialog appears requesting confirmation to discard the changes. Select
Okay to exit the telemetry scheduler, losing any unsaved changes. Select Cancel to
return to the telemetry scheduler dialog.

If a variable is selected in the Variables tree then every message to which it belongs is selected
automatically in the Scheduler table, including sub-messages. The first message to which the variable
belongs sets the tab in the Assigned Variables tree. The option corresponding to the message selection
is highlighted in the Options list. Since assigned variables are disabled in the Variables tree the variable
isn’t highlighted when selected. Choosing a non-assigned variable in the Variables tree does not change
the option and message selections.
The following describes the process to manually assign a variable to a message. First, one or more
variables and/or links are selected in the Variables tree. A grayed out variable, structure, or link
indicates that it is already assigned and can’t be selected (linked variables also appear in the unlinked
portion of the variable tree, but are grayed out and can’t be assigned individually). After selecting one
or more variables an option is chosen from the Options list. To aid in deciding which option to choose,
the Scheduler table temporarily updates the Bytes column for the option’s message(s), displaying the
message size if that option is chosen. Also, the text of the Message column changes to either green,
signifying there is enough room in the message for the variable(s), or red, signifying there is insufficient
room. Changing which option is selected resets any of the temporary changes and updates the
message(s) based on the new option. This allows the user to evaluate each option before selecting a
choice. After deciding on an option, pressing the dialog’s right arrow button assigns the selected
variable(s) to each message in the selected option. Adding a linked or bit-packed variable also adds the
variables associated with it; i.e., all members of the link are added, and all other variables bit-packed
with the selected variable are added. Once a variable is assigned to a message it is grayed out in the
Variables tree so it can’t be assigned more than once.
A variable or variables can be removed manually from the messages and sub-messages. First a message
or sub-message is selected (either in the Scheduler table or the Assigned Variables tree), which causes
the Assigned Variables tree to display the variables for the selected (sub-)message. The user selects
from the tree one or more of the variables or structures that are to be removed and then presses the
dialog’s left arrow button. The selected variable(s) is removed from the message(s) to which it is
assigned. Removing a linked or bit-packed variable also removes the variables associated with it; i.e., all
members of the link are removed, and all other variables bit-packed with the selected variable are
removed. Any de-assigned variable is no longer grayed out in the Variables tree to signify it is available
to be re-assigned.
4.9.4.3 Applications
The Applications command displays the Application Scheduler dialog (Figure 78). The application
scheduler is used to schedule the execution frequency and order of a project’s applications. The data
126

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 127 of 314

created from the application scheduler is used to create scheduler tables for the project. The schedule
table is used by the CFS scheduler application (SCH) to determine when to execute the project’s
applications (demonstration scripts are provided that create the scheduler tables). The available time
slots for when an application can be executed are determined by the application parameters that can be
altered in the application parameters dialog (see paragraph 4.9.4.5). Before the application scheduler
can be used the following must be done:



Set the application parameters to establish the correct boundaries
Create applications using the Group Manager dialog (see paragraph 4.9.3.9)

Figure 78. Application Scheduler dialog
The application scheduler dialog is composed of multiple components. At the top left is displayed the
total number of milliseconds remaining to be assigned. At the upper right is the cycle time which is
amount of time it will take for the schedule to repeat; e.g., a cycle time of 2 seconds means that the
schedule table will be executed once every 2 seconds.
The Applications tree, at the left of the dialog, displays all the available applications to be scheduled.
Any application that has already been assigned or has an execution rate that does not match the rate
filter is grayed out and cannot be selected.
To the right of the Applications tree is the Options list. This list displays the available options, based on
the selected rate filter, for assignment of the applications to the time slots. For example, if the rate
filter is set to 1 and forty time slots are available then the options will be “Option1: TimeSlot_1”,
“Option2: TimeSlot_2”, “Option3: TimeSlot_3”, etc. for all forty time slots (assuming the cycle time is
one second).
The Rate Filter, which is located below the Options list, contains a drop-down list of all the available
execution rates. Changing the rate causes the Applications tree to gray out any applications that are
not at the selected rate, and the Options list changes to display options for the newly selected rate.
The Scheduler table, which is located to the right of the Options list, is a table of all available time slots.
The Time Slot column displays the time slots and the Time (msec) column displays the remaining
available time for that time slot (in milliseconds). The available time decreases as applications are
added to that time slot and increase if an application is removed. If the available time ever becomes
negative (i.e., the sum of the assigned applications’ execution times exceeds the maximum available for
a time slot) then the time slot’s text changes to red.
The Assigned Applications list, located to the right of the Scheduler table, displays the application(s)
assigned to the currently selected time slot. If multiple time slots are selected only the first selected
127

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 128 of 314

time slot’s applications are displayed. This allows the user a quick way to view the applications currently
assigned to a time slot.
In between the Options list and Scheduler table are two arrow buttons. The right arrow button is used
to assign one or more applications to a time slot. The left arrow button removes one or more
applications from a time slot. The assignment and removal processes are described below.
The Applications, Options, Scheduler, and Assigned Applications portions of the application scheduler
can be resized. Position the mouse pointer between adjoining panes and when the pointer changes to a
double-headed arrow press and hold the left mouse button. Space permitting, the adjoining panes can
be resized by moving the mouse pointer left or right. Release the mouse button to exit resizing.
At the bottom of the application scheduler dialog is the button panel. The button functions are as
follows:
Auto-fill

Assigns all the applications in the application tree that are not yet assigned to time slots.
Auto-fill does this optimally so each slot is filled as evenly as possible. During the autofill operation a progress/cancellation dialog appears (Figure 79). Pressing the dialog’s
Halt button stops the auto-fill operation; however, any application assignments made
up to that point are retained.

Figure 79. Application time slot auto-fill progress/cancellation dialog
If auto-fill is successful then all the applications are assigned to a time slot. If auto-fill is
unable to assign every application (due to insufficient room or no available option) it
displays a dialog indicating how many applications are left unassigned.
Clear Slots

Removes all application time slot assignments.

Store

Stores the application scheduler data in the project database. Any changes not stored
before closing the application scheduler dialog are lost.

Close

Closes the application scheduler dialog. If there are any unsaved changes a dialog
appears requesting confirmation to discard the changes. Select Okay to exit the
application scheduler, losing any unsaved changes. Select Cancel to return to the
application scheduler dialog.

The following describes the process to manually assign an application to a time slot. First, one or more
applications are selected in the Applications tree. A grayed-out application indicates that it is already
assigned or doesn’t have the same rate as that shown in the Rate Filter, and can’t be selected. After
selecting one or more applications an option is chosen from the Options list. To aid in deciding which
option to choose, the Scheduler table temporarily subtracts the application run time(s) from the Time
(msec) column for the selected option’s time slot(s), displaying the time remaining if that option is
chosen. Also, the text of the Time Slot column changes to either green, signifying there is enough room
in the slot for the application(s), or red, signifying there is insufficient room. Changing which option is
selected resets any of the temporary changes and updates the time slot(s) based on the new option.
This allows evaluation each option before committing to a choice. After deciding on an option, pressing
128

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 129 of 314

the dialog’s right arrow button assigns the selected applications(s) to each time slot in the selected
option. Once an application is assigned to a time slot it is grayed out in the Applications tree so it can’t
be assigned more than once.
An application or applications can be removed manually from the time slot(s). First a time slot is
selected in the Scheduler table; this causes the Assigned Applications list to display the applications for
the selected slot. Select from the list one or more of the applications that are to be removed and then
press the dialog’s left arrow button. The selected application(s) is removed from the slots to which it is
assigned. Any de-assigned application is no longer grayed out in the Applications tree, signifying it is
available to be re-assigned.
4.9.4.4 Rate parameters
The Rate parameters command displays the dialog shown in Figure 80. This command is disabled if no
rate columns are defined.

Figure 80. Rate Parameters dialog
This dialog is used to set the bounds for the sample rates for each defined data stream (see paragraph
4.8) and from these generate the selections in the drop down menu for the rate column(s) in the data
tables, the link manager (see paragraph 4.9.4.1), and the telemetry scheduler (see paragraph 4.9.4.2).
These parameters also define the total number of messages and maximum message size. Each of these
parameters must be a positive, non-zero integer value. The first two parameters, maximum seconds per
message and maximum messages per second, are common to all data streams, while the remaining
parameters are assigned by data stream. A data stream is selected via the tabs, which reflect the rate
column names, in the center of the dialog. The definitions of these values are as follows:
Maximum seconds per message The slowest period, in seconds, that a message is downlinked.
Example: If 5 is entered then 5 seconds per sample is the slowest rate
allowed to be selected as the rate for a telemetered value. All rates
between this and 1 second/sample that are multiples of the period
are added to the rate list. Rates slower than 1 sample per second are
displayed in the format “1/#” where # is the number of seconds
between samples.
129

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 130 of 314

Maximum messages per second Maximum number of telemetry messages that can be downlinked in a
single second. For a cycle time of one second this value is the same as
the Maximum messages per cycle value.
Data stream name

This value is specific for a data stream. This is a user-defined alternate
name to associate with the rate column and is used in the link
manager and telemetry scheduler for the tab name (if no data stream
name is entered the rate column name is used instead). The script
access methods use the data stream name.

Maximum messages per cycle

This value is specific for a data stream. This value is the number of
telemetry messages that are downlinked during a single cycle through
the message list. For a cycle time of one second this value is the same
as the Maximum messages per second value.

Maximum bytes per second

This value is specific for a data stream. This is the maximum number
of bytes that can be downlinked during a single second.

The Available rates field displays the rates that are available based on the input values.
The evenly time-spaced sub-second rates are calculated using the above values. For example, given a
maximum messages per cycle of 10 and a maximum messages per second of 10 then only rate values
that are a factor of 10 – i.e., 1, 2, 5, and 10 samples per second – are available. The check box labeled
Include unevenly time-spaced rates, when checked, causes the remaining, unevenly time-spaced rates
to be included in the list of rates (in the example this is all values between 1 and 10 – i.e., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
7, 8, 9, and 10 samples per second).
4.9.4.5 App parameters
The App Parameters command displays the Application Parameters dialog (Figure 81).

Figure 81. Application Parameters dialog
This dialog is used to set parameters for the application scheduler table. The values for Maximum
slots per message and the Maximum number of commands define the boundaries, while the
Maximum messages per second and the Maximum messages per cycle are used for scheduling the
applications. Each parameter must be a positive, non-zero integer value. The definitions of these
values are as follows:
Maximum slots per message

The number of slots available in each time slot of the scheduler
table. If 10 is entered then every time slot will have 10 available
slots for an application. The Application Scheduler doesn’t allow

130

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 131 of 314

a time slot to have more applications assigned to it than this
parameter.
Maximum number of commands The maximum number of commands that can be created for the
scheduler table.
Maximum messages per second

The maximum number of time slots that are available for an
application to be scheduled in a second.

Maximum messages per cycle

The number of time slots that are executed during a single cycle
through the time slot list. For a cycle time of one second this
value is the same as the Maximum messages per second value.

4.9.5

Script

The Script menu contains commands for associating scripts with data tables and fields, and for executing
the stored associations. Scripts are a means of accessing the project data in order to create output files
(e.g., C header files or ITOS record files) or otherwise manipulate the data. The script languages
supported by the application include JavaScript, Python, Ruby, Groovy, and Scala. Example scripts are
provided with the application. These can be modified, or new scripts written as needed by the user.
See paragraph 4.10 for more information on the use of scripts to access the table data.
The Manage Script Associations (see paragraph 4.9.5.1) and Execute Script(s) (see paragraph 4.9.5.2)
dialogs are mutually exclusive; opening one causes the other, if displayed, to be closed.
4.9.5.1 Manage
The Manage command provides the means for associating scripts and data tables. This is required
before executing the scripts. The associated scripts and tables can be stored in the project database so
that frequently used associations can be quickly executed.
When the command is selected the Manage Script Associations dialog (Figure 82) is displayed. If the
Execute Script(s) dialog (see paragraph 4.9.5.2) is currently displayed then it is closed. The dialog is
divided into four sections: script selection, table selection, script associations, and command buttons.
The line separating the table selection tree and script associations list delineates a split pane control
that is used to resize these panels relative to one another. Position the mouse pointer over the
separator line and when the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow press and hold the left mouse
button. Space permitting, the adjoining panes can be resized by moving the mouse pointer up or down.
Release the mouse button to exit resizing.

131

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 132 of 314

Figure 82. Manage Script Associations dialog
The script association name field allows a name to be assigned to an association. The name may not
match one already in use by another association and must adhere to the alphanumeric input type (see
paragraph 4.7). The association name is optional; it’s purpose is to be used with the command line
execute option (see paragraph 4.1) to reference an existing association, in place of typing the script
name and table(s).
The script association description field allows a description to be added to an association. The
description may remain blank.
The script selection field and Select… button are used to select a script file. A script name (with file
path) can be typed into the field; alternatively, pressing the Select… button displays a file selection
dialog from which a script file can be located and selected. Script names must be a valid for use as a file
name (e.g., may contain spaces, but not certain special characters, dependent on the operating system,
such as a forward slash (/)).
The table tree displays all of the root tables and their child tables (if applicable). The user expands the
tree branches and selects one or more tables (see paragraph 4.5.3 for more information on table trees).
When a structure table is chosen all of its child tables are automatically included when the script
132

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 133 of 314

association is executed; therefore the child tables do not have to be explicitly selected when creating
the association, and any child nodes that are selected are eliminated from the Script Associations
table’s Table(s) column when the association is added. It makes no difference in what order the tables
are selected for assignment since, when loaded for use by the script, the tables are sorted so that the
root tables are in alphabetical order and the child tables appear in the order defined by their table type
definition.
If the table tree is filtered by group then one or more group names can be selected from the tree for
association with the chosen script. When the association is added to the table the group name
(prepended with “Group:”) appears in the Table(s) column. Any of the group’s member tables that were
also selected don’t appear in the table, however. When the script association is executed the group’s
current member tables are loaded. This allows the script association to remain unchanged even if tables
are added or removed from the group.
The Script Associations table displays the script associations that are stored in the project database, plus
any that have been added while this dialog is open. Associations are grayed out if the script file doesn’t
exist on the local machine or an associated table doesn’t exist in the project database. These disabled
associations can be selected for removal, but can’t be executed. The Description column may be edited
to add, alter, or remove an association’s description. The Script File column displays the association’s
script file and file path. Below the table is a check box that allows toggling between hiding and
displaying the script file paths; this selection does not affect storing and retrieving the file paths and the
check box’s selection state is remembered between sessions. The Table(s) column display each table
associated with the script in the Script File column. Each table is displayed on a single line (space
permitting) and includes its full path.
Below the table is a check box, Hide script file path. When selected the file paths in the association
table’s Script File column are not displayed. Deselecting the check box restores the paths. The paths
are used when executing the associations even if not displayed.
Script file paths are allowed to have environment variables within them. When the association is
executed any variables in the script path are replaced by their corresponding value in the system
environment variable map. The Environment variable override field allows the variable values in the
system map to be temporarily replaced, or added if the variable doesn’t exist in the map. The format
for entries in this field is:
>>
Each key/value pair must be separated by a comma. A dollar sign ($) can precede the key name, and
spaces (except those embedded within a key or value) and double quotes bounding the keys and values
are ignored. The contents of this field are stored as a program preference, so the field is automatically
populated with the overrides that were last used.
Script associations may be executed from within this dialog. This is similar to execution of the
associations from the Execute Scripts dialog (see paragraph 4.9.5.2) except that in this dialog the
associations do not have to be stored in the project database to be executed. This provides a means to
create a one-use association for immediate execution. See paragraph 4.9.5.2 for further detail on script
execution.
The button commands are described below:
Add

After entering a name (optional), description (optional), choosing a script file, and (if
needed by the script) one or more data tables or groups, selecting the Add button
creates the script association. The new association is inserted as the first row in the
Script Associations table (any existing associations are moved down a row) and is
automatically selected. A script may be used in more than one association, and a data
133

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 134 of 314

table or group may be used in any number of associations; however, duplicate
associations, i.e., those utilizing the same script, table(s), and group(s), are not added to
the list.
A script can be added without associating it with a table or group. This is the case when
the script performs actions that do not need data from a specific data table (for an
example see the script that creates the housekeeping (HK) copy table).
Remove

An association may deleted from the table by selecting it using the mouse or keyboard,
then pressing the Remove button. Multiple associations may be removed
simultaneously by selecting more than one from the list by using the Ctrl or Shift keys.

Replace

Replace the currently selected association in the Script Associations table with the
association defined by the currently entered script name, description, script file, and
selected table(s).

Execute

Execute the script associations(s) that are selected in the script associations table
(disabled associations are ignored). The application GUI is disabled during script
execution in order to prevent possible alteration of the data while a script is accessing it.

Up

Move the currently selected row(s) up one row relative to the remaining rows. The
order of the script associations in the table affects the order in which the associations
are executed if multiple associations are chosen to execute. Otherwise the capability to
arrange the rows is solely for the user to group the associations as desired. The
ordering is preserved when the associations are stored and retrieved from the project
database, and can be useful for keeping affiliated associations near one another.

Down

Move the row(s) of the currently selected cell(s) down one row relative to the remaining
rows. The order of the script associations in the table affects the order in which the
associations are executed if multiple associations are chosen to execute. Otherwise the
capability to arrange the rows is solely for the user to group the associations as desired.
The ordering is preserved when the associations are stored and retrieved from the
project database, and can be useful for keeping affiliated associations near one another.

Undo

Undoes the last action performed (add, remove, move up, move down, redo).

Redo

Reverses the last action undone (add, remove, move up, move down, undo).

Store

Stores the changes made to script associations in the script association manager into the
project database. The order of the associations in the table is preserved. If changes
have been made a confirmation dialog first appears. Select Okay to store the updates;
select Cancel to exit the confirmation dialog without altering the database.

Close

Closes the script association manager window. If there are any unsaved association
changes a dialog appears requesting confirmation to discard the changes. Select Okay
to exit script associations dialog, losing any unsaved changes. Select Cancel to return to
the Manage Script Associations dialog.

4.9.5.2 Execute
Selecting the Execute command causes the Execute Script(s) dialog to appear (Figure 83). If the Manage
Script Associations dialog (see paragraph 4.9.5.1) is currently open then it is closed unless there are
unsaved changes; in this case a dialog appears requesting confirmation to discard the changes. If the
user doesn’t elect to discard the changes then the Manage Script Associations dialog remains open and
the Execute Script(s) dialog doesn’t appear.

134

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 135 of 314

The dialog displays a table of the stored script associations. Associations are grayed out if the script file
script file can’t be found in the folder indicated by the path or an associated data table doesn’t exist in
the project database. Grayed-out associations can’t be selected for execution. Below the table is a
check box that allows toggling between hiding and displaying the script file paths in the Script File
column. See paragraph 4.9.5.1 for more information on the script associations table.

Figure 83. Execute Script(s) dialog
Select one or more associations from the table and press the Execute button to execute the selected
association(s). The application GUI is disabled during script execution in order to prevent possible
alteration of the data while a script is accessing it. While the script is executing the dialog shown in
Figure 84 is displayed. Pressing the Halt button stops script execution immediately and returns control
to the CCDD application – this is necessary, for instance, if the script contains an infinite loop.

Figure 84. Halt script execution dialog
When script execution completes a status message is written to the event log. If script execution is
halted the log entry indicates that the scripts failed to execute; however, if multiple scripts are executed
it’s possible that one or more successfully completed prior to the action to halt execution. If an error
occurs, preventing successful script completion, an error dialog appears indicating that the script(s)
failed to execute. The log entry in this case displays the script name(s) and provides details on the cause
of the error.
Select the Close button to exit the Execute Script(s) dialog.
4.9.5.3 Store
The Store command is used to store scripts in the project database. This provides a means of script
security and configuration management as well as allow all users, including those at remote sites, to
135

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 136 of 314

access a common set of script files. This command is enabled only for a user with read/write or
administrator access. Selecting the command causes a file selection dialog to appear (Figure 85).

Figure 85. Script selection dialog
Only files with extensions supported by the available script engines are shown. However, other files are
displayed if “All Files” is selected from the Files of Type drop down menu. After selecting one or more
files, selecting the Store button stores the contents of the files in the project, each as a separate
database table. Select the Cancel button to exit the dialog without storing any files. The Retrieve
command (see paragraph 4.9.5.4) provides the means for retrieving the stored scripts from the project.
When a file is stored the application first searches it for the first line containing the text “description:”.
The search ignores case, so any combination of upper and lower case characters constitutes a match. If
found, the remaining text on the same line in the file (sans any leading or trailing white space
character(s)) is stored with the file as its description. The description appears alongside the file name in
the Retrieve Script(s) dialog (Figure 86). If no match is found then the description text in the dialog is
blank.
Note that this command can be used to store any text file in the project database, not only script files.
4.9.5.4 Retrieve
Selecting the Retrieve command causes the Retrieve Script(s) dialog to appear (Figure 86). This
command allows for extracting scripts (or other text files) that are stored in the project database using
the Store command (see paragraph 4.9.5.3).

136

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 137 of 314

Figure 86. Retrieve Script(s) dialog
The dialog displays a list of the stored script (or other text) files. Using the check boxes, select one or
more files. The Select all scripts check box is used to alternately select and deselect all of the individual
script check boxes. Choose a folder in which to save the retrieved file(s), then press the Retrieve button
to extract a copy of the file(s) from the project into the selected folder. Select the Cancel button to exit
dialog without retrieving any files.
When a file is stored the application first searches it for the first line containing the text “description:”.
The search ignores case, so any combination of upper and lower case characters constitutes a match. If
found, the remaining text on the same line in the file (sans any leading or trailing white space
character(s)) is stored with the file as its description. This is the description that appears alongside the
file name in the dialog. If no match is found then the description text in the dialog is blank.

4.9.5.5 Delete
Selecting the Delete command causes the Delete Script(s) dialog to appear (Figure 87). This command
allows for deleting script (or other text files) stored in the project database using the Store command
(see paragraph 4.9.5.3). This command is enabled only for a user with read/write or administrator
access.

137

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 138 of 314

Figure 87. Delete Script(s) dialog
The dialog displays a list of the stored script (or other text) files. Using the check boxes, select one or
more files. The Select all scripts check box is used to alternately select and deselect all of the individual
script check boxes. Press the Delete button to delete the file(s) from the project. A confirmation dialog
first appears; select Okay to continue with the script deletion, or Cancel to exit the dialog without
deleting a script. Select the Cancel button to exit the dialog without deleting any files.
4.9.5.6 Search
The script Search dialog provides a means of searching for a specified text string within the scripts
stored in the project database (see Figure 88). Case sensitivity for the search is governed by the Ignore
text case check box.
The Allow regular expression check box, when checked, allows the use of a regular expression to define
the search pattern in the search text field. A regular expression can be formulated to find multiple
matching conditions (for example, the search for a.c would match any string that has a single character
between the characters ‘a’ and ‘c’). Information regarding the use of regular expressions is beyond the
scope of this document; however, resources and tutorials can be found online. When unchecked, the
search text is matched as typed in the search text field.
Enter the search text in the input field and select the Search button. The search results are displayed in
the table at the bottom of the search dialog. The first column, Script, shows the name of the script, and
the second column, Line number, provides the line number in the script where a match is found. The
last column, Context, displays the line from the script containing the search text, with the search text
138

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 139 of 314

highlighted. Leading and trailing white space characters are removed from the context cells’ text prior
to display.
The search text field uses auto-completion to fill in the search string. The previous search strings (those
for the event log, table, and script) are remembered, including those from previous sessions. The
number of remembered search strings can be changed via the Preferences dalog, and defaults to 30.
Case sensitivity for auto-completion is based on the Ignore text case check box selection state.
Another search can be performed by altering the search text and selecting the Search button again. The
search results can be output to a file or printer by selecting the Print button. To exit the search dialog
select the Close button.

Figure 88. Script search dialog

4.9.6

Help

4.9.6.1 Guide
The Guide command displays a copy of this user’s guide in PDF format. The file
CCDD_Users_guide.pdf must be in the same folder in which the CCDD.jar file is located in order
for the user’s guide to be opened using this command.
4.9.6.2 About
Selecting the About menu item brings up an informational dialog (see Figure 89) providing the
application’s version number and date, version numbers for Java, PostgreSQL, JDBC, and Jetty that are in
use, and the copyright notice. Also displayed is the list of available scripting languages and associated
scripting engines, if any, and their respective version information.

139

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 140 of 314

Figure 89. About dialog

4.10 Scripts
The CCDD application’s script interface is the mean by which a project’s data, stored in the database, is
made available for manipulation by the user, primarily for formatting the data to create output files.
CCDD supports the use of JVM-based scripting languages. Five of these languages, JavaScript, Python,
Ruby, Groovy, and Scala, have been tested with the CCDD application, though any of the other
compliant scripting languages should work as well. A language must be installed before it can be used
by CCDD; paragraph 4.1 provides details on the library files required for using each of the five tested
scripting languages. The About dialog (see paragraph 4.9.6.2 and Figure 89) displays a list of the
installed scripting languages. Examples of the use of scripts to produce output files include creation of:


C header files for CFS applications



CFS Housekeeping copy table



ITOS record and display files

Scripts may be executed from within the application (see paragraphs 4.9.5.1 and 4.9.5.2) or from the
command line (see Table 1 and paragraph 4.10.5).
The scripts have access to the project data via a set of script data access methods written in Java.
Additional methods are provided for displaying dialog boxes (both output and input), opening and
writing to an output file, and making direct queries to the database. The methods are called from within
a script using the method name and, dependent on the language, prepended by the class name ccdd or
ccdds:
methodName(arguments…)
where methodName is the name of the script data access method (function) and arguments… are the
parameters required by the particular method. ccdd is a reference to the non-static version of the
script data access class, whereas ccdds is a static reference to the non-static class’ methods. JavaScript
scripts require the non-static reference in Java 8, but can use either in Java 7. Ruby scripts require the
non-static reference, but Python and Groovy scripts can use either. Scala scripts must use the static
140

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 141 of 314

reference; however, the class name is not used in the script. Details on the script data access methods
are provided in Table 10.
In order to access these methods the script requires that the data access class (non-static or static
version) be imported; the import statement format is dependent on the scripting language. The
following paragraphs show the import statement required to be included in the script file for each of the
tested scripting languages, as well as an example of using the script data access methods. For each
scripting language the example accomplishes the same result and assumes one or more structure tables
are associated with the script (see paragraph 4.9.5.1 for information on associating scripts with data
tables). First, the script opens an output file names “myFileName”. Then the names of the structures
present in the structure table(s) supplied to the script are stored in an array named “structNames”. A
loop is then performed to write each structure’s name to the output file. Finally, the output file is closed
and the script terminates, returning control to the CCDD application. A status message is written to the
event log to indicate script completion.
If an error occurs, preventing successful script completion, an entry is made in the event log displaying
the script name(s) and provides details on the cause of the error. The amount of detail provided
depends on the scripting language. This can be improved by the use of exception catching in the script.
The syntax is language dependent, but in general one or more sections of the script code is
encompassed by a try-catch statement (usually the main portion and not any functions). An exception,
caused by an error condition in the script, is caught. Data, such as the execution trace or variable
values, can be included in the text that is returned to CCDD as the cause of the failure, which is then
included in the event log entry. Information on the specific syntax is given in the following paragraphs.

4.10.1 JavaScript
JavaScript script files must end with the extension “.js”. The JavaScript script must contain the following
lines at or near the top of the file (this allows the script to work with both JavaScript ‘Rhino’ (Java 7 and
earlier) and ‘Nashorn’ (Java 8 and later)):
try
{
load("nashorn:mozilla_compat.js");
}
catch (e)
{
}
importClass(Packages.CCDD.CcddScriptDataAccessHandler);

If enhanced error logging is desired then encompass the script code with a try-catch statement as
shown below. The throw call output can be replaced or have other text appended if desired.
import traceback
try
{
# Main script steps
.
.
.
}
catch (err)
{
throw err.name + “ “ + err.message + “ “ + err.stack;
}

The following is the example script described earlier in this section, written in JavaScript:
// Import the script data access method class

141

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 142 of 314

try
{
load("nashorn:mozilla_compat.js");
}
catch (e)
{
}
importClass(Packages.CCDD.CcddScriptDataAccessHandler);
// Open the output file
var file = ccdd.openOutputFile("myFileName");
// Get the array of structure names
var structNames = ccdd.getStructureTableNames();
// Step through each name found
for (var index = 0; index < structNames.length; index++)
{
// Write the structure name to the output file
ccdd.writeToFileLn(file,
"structNames["
+ index
+ "] = "
+ structNames[index]);
}
// Close the output file
ccdd.closeFile(file);

4.10.2 Python
Python script files must end with the extension “.py”. The Python script must contain the following line
at or near the top of the file:
from CCDD import CcddScriptDataAccessHandler

If enhanced error logging is desired then encompass the script code with a try-except statement as
shown below. The raise call output can be replaced or have other text appended if desired.
import traceback
try:
# Main script steps
.
.
.
except:
raise Exception(traceback.format_exec())

The following is the example script described earlier in this section, written in Python:
# Import the script data access method class
from CCDD import CcddScriptDataAccessHandler
# Open the output file
file = ccdd.openOutputFile("myFileName")
# Get the array of structure names
structNames = ccdd.getStructureTableNames()
# Step through each name found

142

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 143 of 314

for index in range(len(structNames)):
# Write the structure name to the output file
ccdd.writeToFileLn(file, "structNames[" + str(index) + "] = " +
structNames[index])
# Close the output file
ccdd.closeFile(file)

4.10.2.1 Calling other scripts
It may be desirable for the main Python script called by the association to in turn call another Python
script. In order for the ‘child’ script to access the script data access methods the following can be done:


Create a folder representing the Python script package.



Place the Python scripts in the package folder. The child script(s) must be placed in the package
folder, but the main script does not.



Create the file __init__.py in the package folder. In this file add an import statement for each
child script in the form 'from child import *' where child is the child script name (minus
the .py extension).



In the child scripts add 'from CCDD import CcddScriptDataAccessHandlerStatic
as ccdd'. Notice that this must be a reference to the static version of the script data access
method class. Access method call format in the child script are identical to those in the main
script (i.e., ccdd.methodName()).



In the main script add 'import sys' and 'sys.path.append("path to the package
folder")', then 'import package folder name'. The system path must include the
package folder's location and the update must occur before importing the package.



To call a function in a child script from the main script use the format 'package folder
name.child function name()'.

4.10.3 Ruby
Ruby script files must end with the extension “.rb”. The Ruby script must contain the following line at or
near the top of the file:
java_import Java::CCDD.CcddScriptDataAccessHandler

If enhanced error logging is desired then encompass the script code with a begin-rescue statement
as shown below. The raise call output can be replaced or have other text appended if desired.
begin
# Main script steps
.
.
.
rescue => err
raise err.message + “; “ + err.backtrace.join(“; “)
end

The following is the example script described earlier in this section, written in Ruby:
# Import the script data access method class
java_import Java::CCDD.CcddScriptDataAccessHandler
# Open the output file
file = $ccdd.openOutputFile("myFileName")

143

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 144 of 314

# Get the array of structure names
structNames = $ccdd.getStructureTableNames()
index = 0
# Step through each structure name
structNames.each do |name|
# Write the structure name to the output file
$ccdd.writeToFileLn(file, "structNames[#{index}] = #{name}")
index += 1
end
# Close the output file
$ccdd.closeFile(file)

4.10.4 Groovy
Groovy script files must end with the extension “.groovy”. The Groovy script must contain the following
line at or near the top of the file:
import CCDD.CcddScriptDataAccessHandler

If enhanced error logging is desired then encompass the script code with a try-catch statement as
shown below. The throw call output can be replaced or have other text appended if desired.
try
{
# Main script steps
.
.
.
}
catch (Exception err)
{
throw new Exception(err.message + "; " + err.getStackTrace())
}

The following is the example script described earlier in this section, written in Groovy:
// Import the script data access method class
import CCDD.CcddScriptDataAccessHandler
// Open the output file
def file = ccdd.openOutputFile("myFileName")
// Get the array of structure names
def structNames = ccdd.getStructureTableNames()
// Step through each name found
for (def index = 0; index < structNames.length; index++)
{
// Write the structure name to the output file
ccdd.writeToFileLn(file,
"structNames[" +
index +
"] = " +
structNames[index])
}

144

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 145 of 314

// Close the output file
ccdd.closeFile(file)

4.10.5 Scala
Scala script files must end with the extension “.scala”. The Scala script must contain the following line at
or near the top of the file:
import CCDD.CcddScriptDataAccessHandlerStatic._

If enhanced error logging is desired then encompass the script code with a try-catch statement as
shown below. The throw call output can be replaced or have other text appended if desired.
try
{
# Main script steps
.
.
.
}
catch
{
case err: Exception => throw new Exception(err.message + "; " +
err.getStackTrace().mkString("; "))
}

The following is the example script described earlier in this section, written in Scala:
// Import the script data access method class
import CCDD.CcddScriptDataAccessHandlerStatic._
// Open the output file
var file = openOutputFile("myFileName")
// Get the array of structure names
var structNames = getStructureTableNames()
// Step through each name found
for (index <- 0 to structNames.length - 1)
{
// Write the structure name to the output file
writeToFileLn(file,
"structNames[" +
index +
"] = " +
structNames(index))
}
// Close the output file
closeFile(file)

4.10.6 Command line execution
The CCDD command line option, execute, allows running scripts without use of the GUI. The script file
and data table association must be specified on the command line. The command format is:


Groups can be used in place of, or along with tables. Each referenced group name must be preceded by
‘Group:’ in order to be recognized as a group. For example:
145

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 146 of 314

script_name:Group:group_name

The project database, host, user, and password (if required) command line options must be specified as
part of the execute option in order to access the project’s database. If not specified, the last project
database, user, and host accessed by the application in the most recent session is used. The script name
must include its file path if the script is not located within the folder from which the CCDD application is
executed. If multiple scripts are provided in the same execute command then the individual
associations must be separated by a semi-colon (;) and the entire string containing the associations for
that execute command must be bounded by single or double quotes. Multiple execute commands
in the same command line command can be used as well to execute multiple script associations; the
format for each is as described above. If multiple script associations are specified then these are run
serially in the order they appear in the command line command.
Even though the GUI is not displayed, the event log is generated and all events (success, fail, command,
and status events) are written to the log file. Information, warning, and error dialogs are not displayed;
instead the text for these dialogs is output to the standard output (information) and standard error
(warning and error) streams. Dialogs within a script requiring user input, however, are displayed, and
script execution pauses until the dialog is dealt with.
When script execution completes the CCDD application terminates. The application returns a status
indicating if the scripts executed successfully: 0 if all script execution succeeded, or 1 if any script did not
complete successfully.
Following are examples of running scripts from the command line. Note that in these examples CCDD is
an alias that executes the application with all the necessary class paths, etc. (see paragraph 4.1). The
first example demonstrates executing the script myScript with no associated tables:
CCDD –project myProject –host localHost –user myUser –password myPassword
–execute myScript

The next example executes myScript using the data from the table myTable (and its child tables, if
applicable):
CCDD –project myProject –host 192.168.1.1 –port 5432 –user myUser –
password myPassword –execute myScript:myTable

The third example executes myScript using the data from the tables myTable1 and myTable2 (and their
child tables, if applicable):
CCDD –project myProject –user myUser –password myPassword –execute
myScript:myTable1+myTable2

The last example executes myScript1 using the data from the tables myTable1 and myTable2 (and their
child tables, if applicable), then executes the script myScript2 using the data from the table myTable3
(and its child tables, if applicable):
CCDD –password myPassword –execute
myScript1:myTable1+myTable2,myScript2:myTable3

4.10.7 XTCE export
The XTCE export dialog (paragraph 4.9.3.8.4) provides a means of exporting table data into a file in XTCE
format. The XTCE schema allows for some interpretation as to how data is parsed to the output and
provides for many features not covered by the export methods within the CCDD application, so the
content of the CCDD-produced XTCE file may not be as desired. A script can be created to produce the
conversion; however, there are certain operations performed in the internal code that would be difficult
to replicate in a script - for example, the conversion of the command header structure table to the
146

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 147 of 314

equivalent command metadata required by the XTCE schema. To make XTCE conversion via a script
easier a hybrid of the internal code and script code can be used.
The internal code has “hooks” that allow for several of the key conversion methods to be replaced with
code in a script. These hooks are activated when exporting via the XTCE export dialog by selecting the
Use external methods check box, or when the script access method xtceExport is called from a script.
Table 8 below provides a brief description of each of the XTCE export methods that can be overridden
by a script function. The script must use the same function name as shown in the table, and the Input(s)
and Output columns describe the parameters that are passed to and expected from the script functions.
Figure 90 displays a flow chart of the methods’ calling sequence. If the script doesn’t have the function
to replace a method then the internal method is used by default.
The user can elect to arrange the conversion process in a manner other than by the predefined
methods. Assuming the xtceExport() script data access method or the export dialog is used as the
conversion initiator, the addSpaceSystemParameters and addSpaceSystemCommands must be the
entry points in the script.

147

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Internal Method / Script
Function Name
addSpaceSystemHeader

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 148 of 314

Input(s)

Add the Header element to the space system. For

the root space system the AuthorSet and NoteSet
elements are automatically created and populated
with the user, project, creation, and endianness
information. The script data access method
xtceAddSpaceSystemHeader can be called instead
to use the internal method.

ObjectFactory: Object factory reference
SpaceSystemType: Space system reference
String; Classification attribute
String: Validation status attribute
String: Version attribute
String: Creation time and date

createTelemetryMetadata

Create the TelemetryMetaData element within the
specified space system. The script data access
method xtceCreateTelemetryMetadata can be
called instead to use the internal method.

ObjectFactory: Object factory reference
SpaceSystemType: Space system reference

addSpaceSystemParameters

Overall parameter assignment handler; steps
through each row of data in the structure table and
calls functions that assign variables to the
ParameterTypeSet, ParameterSet, and ContainerSet
elements. If the application ID is provided, the table
is a root structure, and it has a variable with a data
type referencing the telemetry header table, then a
BaseContainer element is created with a
RestrictionCriteria element set to the application ID.
The script data access method
xtceAddSpaceSystemParameters can be called
instead to use the internal method.

JAXBElement: Toplevel space system element reference
ObjectFactory: Object factory reference
boolean: true if the data is big endian;
false for little endian
boolean: true if the telemetry and
command headers are big endian
String: Telemetry header table name
SpaceSystemType: Space system to which
the table belongs
String: Table name
String[][]: Array containing the table's data
int: Variable (parameter) name column
index
int: Parameter data type column index
int: Parameter array size column index
int: Parameter bit length column index

148

Output

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Internal Method / Script
Function Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 149 of 314

Input(s)
int: Parameter enumeration column index;
-1 if no the table has no enumeration
column
int: Parameter description column index; 1 if no the table has no description
column
int: Parameter units column index; -1 if no
the table has no units column
int: Minimum parameter value column
index; -1 if no the table has no minimum
column
int: Maximum parameter value column
index; -1 if no the table has no
maximum column
boolean: true if this table represents the
telemetry header or one of its
descendants
String: telemetry header table system
path; null or blank is none
boolean: true if the table is a root
structure table
String: Name of the telemetry header
application ID data field
String: Telemetry header application ID

addParameterAndType

Add a structure table variable, if it has a primitive
data type, to the ParameterTypeSet and
ParameterSet elements. The script data access
method xtceAddParameterAndType can be called
instead to use the internal method.

149

ObjectFactory: Object factory reference
boolean: true if the data is big endian;
false for little endian

Output

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Internal Method / Script
Function Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 150 of 314

Input(s)
boolean: true if the telemetry and
command headers are big endian
String: Telemetry header table name
SpaceSystemType: Space system reference
String: Parameter name
String: Parameter primitive data type
String: Parameter array size; null or blank
if the parameter isn't an array
String: Parameter bit length; null or blank
if not a bit-wise parameter
String: Enumeration in the format |[|...][,...]; null to
not specify
String: Parameter units
String: Minimum parameter value
String: Maximum parameter value
String: Parameter description
int: Size, in characters, of a string
parameter; ignored if not a string or
character

setParameterDataType

Add a structure table variable as a parameter type in
the ParameterTypeSet element. The parameter type
is based on the variable’s data type. An array
variable generates two entries, one to describe the
array type, and a second to describe the data type of
the array elements. The script data access method
xtceSetParameterDataType can be called instead to
use the internal method.

150

ObjectFactory: Object factory reference
boolean: true if the data is big endian;
false for little endian
boolean: true if the telemetry and
command headers are big endian
String: Telemetry header table name
SpaceSystemType: Space system

Output

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Internal Method / Script
Function Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 151 of 314

Input(s)

Output

String: Parameter name; null to not
specify
String: Data type; null to not specify
String: Parameter array size; null or blank
if the parameter isn't an array
String: Parameter bit length; null or empty
if not a bit-wise parameter
String: Enumeration in the format |[|...][,...]; null to
not specify
String: Parameter units; null to not specify
String: Minimum parameter value; null to
not specify
String: Maximum parameter value; null to
not specify
String: Parameter description; null to not
specify
int: Size, in characters, of a string
parameter; ignored if not a string or
character
addParameterSequenceEntry

Add the structure table variables as EntryList entries
in a SequenceContainer element within a
ContainerSet element. The script data access
method xtceAddParameterSequenceEntry can be
called instead to use the internal method.

151

ObjectFactory: Object factory reference
boolean: true if the
parameter's data type
String: Telemetry header table name
references the telemetry
SpaceSystemType: Reference to the space
header or one of its
system to which the parameter belongs
descendants; otherwise
String: Parameter name
return the flag status
String: Data type
unchanged
String: Array size

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Internal Method / Script
Function Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 152 of 314

Input(s)
EntryListType: Reference to the entry list
into which to place the parameter (for a
primitive data type) or container (for a
structure data type) reference
boolean: true if this table represents the
telemetry header or one of its
descendants

createCommandMetadata

Create the CommandMetaData element within the
specified space system. The script data access
method xtceCreateCommandMetadata can be
called instead to use the internal method.

ObjectFactory: Object factory reference
SpaceSystemType: Space reference

addSpaceSystemCommands

Overall command assignment handler; steps through
each row of data in the command table, parses the
command’s aruments, and calls functions that assign
arguments to the ArgumentTypeSet element. For
each command in the table a function is called to
create the MetaCommand element, which describes
the command, within the MetaCommandSet. The
script data access method
xtceAddSpaceSystemCommands can be called
instead to use the internal method.

JAXBElement: Toplevel space system element reference
ObjectFactory: Object factory reference
boolean: true if the data is big endian;
false for little endian
boolean: true if the telemetry and
command headers are big endian
String: Command header table name
AssoctiatedColumns[]: Array of
AssociatedColumns class instances that
have the associated command argument
column indices
SpaceSystemType: Space system reference
String[][]: Table data array
int: Command name column index
int: Command code column index
int: Command description column index

152

Output

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Internal Method / Script
Function Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 153 of 314

Input(s)
boolean: true if this table represents the
command header
String: Command header table system
path
String: Command code name
String: Name of the application ID
String: Application ID

addCommand

Add a MetaCommand element to the
MetaCommandSet. Each MetaCommand element
has a BaseMetaCommand (if the command header
table is defined), which uses ArgumentAssignment
elements to set the application ID and command
function code. The ArgumentList and
CommandContainer are populated with the
command argument information. The script data
access method xtceAddCommand can be called
instead to use the internal method.

153

JAXBElement: Toplevel space system element reference
ObjectFactory: Object factory reference
String: Command header table name
SpaceSystemType: Space system reference
String: Command name
String: Command code name
String: Command code
String: Name of the application ID
String: Application ID
boolean: true if this table represents the
command header
String: Command header table system
path
String[]: Array of command argument
names
String[]: Array of of command argument
data types
String[]: Array of of command argument
array sizes; the array item is null or

Output

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Internal Method / Script
Function Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 154 of 314

Input(s)

Output

blank if the corresponding argument
isn't an array
String: Description of the command
setArgumentDataType

Add a command table command argument as an
argument type in the ArgumentTypeSet element.
The argument type is based on the argument’s data
type. An array variable generates two entries, one to
describe the array type, and a second to describe the
data type of the array elements. The script data
access method xtceSetArgumentDataType can be
called instead to use the internal method.

154

boolean: true if the data is big endian;
NameDescriptionType:
false for little endian
Command description of
the type corresponding
boolean: true if the telemetry and
to the primitive data type
command headers are big endian
with the specified
String: Command header table name
attributes set
SpaceSystemType: Space system reference
String: Command argument name; null to
not specify
String: Command argument data type; null
to not specify
String: Command argument array size; null
or blank if the argument isn't an array
String: Command argument bit length
String: Command argument enumeration
in the format |[|...][,...]; null to not specify
String: Command argument units; null to
not specify
String: Minimum parameter value; null to
not specify
String: Maximum parameter value; null to
not specify
String: Command argument description ;
null to not specify

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Internal Method / Script
Function Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 155 of 314

Description

Input(s)

Output

int: String size in bytes; ignored if the
command argument does not have a
string data type
addContainerReference

Generic function used by both the telemetry and
command functions to add a container reference to
the specified EntryList element. The script data
access method xtceAddContainerReference can be
called instead to use the internal method.

ObjectFactory: object factory reference
EntryListType: Reference to the telemetry
or command entry list into which to
place the parameter or parameter array
container reference(s)
String: Parameter name
String: Data type
String: Parameter array size; null or blank
if the parameter isn't an array

createUnitSet

Use the provided units information to create a
UnitSet element. The script data access method
xtceCreateUnitSet can be called instead to use the
internal method.

ObjectFactory: object factory reference
String: Parameter or command argument
units; null to not specify

createEnumerationList

Use the provided enumeration information to create
an EnumerationList element. The script data access
method xtceCreateEnumerationList can be called
instead to use the internal method.

ObjectFactory: object factory reference
EnumerationList:
Enumeration list for the
SpaceSystemType: Space system reference
supplied enumeration
String: Enumeration in the format [...][...]

Table 8. Overridable XTCE export methods

155

UnitSet: Unit set for the
supplied units string; an
empty unit set if no units
are supplied

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 156 of 314

xtceExport

XTCE export dialog
Perform for each table
Create the space system

Structure table

addSpaceSystemHeader

Command table

addSpaceSystemParameters

addSpaceSystemCommands
createCommandMetadata*

addParameterAndType
createTelemetryMetadata*
setParameterDataType

setArgumentDataType
createUnitSet
createEnumerationList

addParameterSequenceEntry

addCommand
addContainerReference
Script method

Hard-coded

* Called once per space system, and only if a telemetry/command parameter exists in the table
Figure 90. XTCE export script method flow

156

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 157 of 314

4.10.8 Data access methods
Table 10 provides details on each of the project data access methods available for use in the scripts. The
first column is the method name. The scripts are automatically assigned a variable, ccdd, which
references the class containing the data access methods. When calling one of the access methods from
a script the method name must be preceded by ccdd (or ccdds if using the static methods) for
JavaScript, Python, and Groovy, and $ccdd for Ruby; for Scala only the method name is used. The
second column is a short description of the access method. The third column in the table gives the
method input parameter type(s) and description(s), if any. The fourth column gives the output type and
description, if any. The last column indicates the applicability of the method to the project data. See
Table 9 for the definitions of the applicability codes.
Certain methods require that the table type be supplied as a parameter. Convenience methods are
provided in these cases for the Structure and Command table types. In place of supplying the table type
as a parameter the method name incorporates the table type. For example, the method
getTableData has accompanying convenience methods getCommandTableData and
getStructureTableData.
Code

Method Applicability

O

Method returns information with respect to only those tables associated
with the script. This includes every method with a row number input

A

Method returns information for any or all tables, not just those associated
with the script

S

Method returns information from the telemetry or application schedulers,
so is not dependent on the associated tables

N

Method is not table related, so is not dependent on the associated tables
Table 9. Data access method applicability code definitions

157

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 158 of 314

Input(s)

closeFile

Close the specified output file

PrintWriter: Output file
PrintWriter object obtained
from the openOutputFile
method

formatArrayIndex

Convert an integer array containing
the size of each array dimension into
a string in the format [#]<[#]<...>>

int[]: Array of integers
containing the size of each
array dimension

getApplicationMessageDefinitionTable

Output

*
N

String: Array size in the format
[#]<[#]<...>>

N

Get the application scheduler
message definition table

String[]: Array containing the
message definition table
information

S

getApplicationNames

Get the array containing the groups
that represent CFS applications

String[]: Array containing
names of the groups that
represent CFS applications

A

getApplicationScheduleDefinitionTable

Get the specified entry in the
application scheduler schedule
definition table

String[][]: Array containing the
specified entry in the
schedule definition table

S

getApplicationScheduleDefinitionTableDefines

Get the array of defined parameters
for the schedule definition table

String[]:Two-dimensional array
containing the defined
parameters

S

158

int: Row index for the entry
in the schedule definition
table

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 159 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getArrayFromString

Divide the supplied string into a twodimensional array (columns and
rows) using the supplied separator
characters or strings, and trim any
leading or trailing white space
characters from each array member

String: String to separate into String[][]: Two-dimensional
an array
array representing the
substrings in the supplied
String: Character string to use
text after being parsed using
to delineate the separation
the separator; returns null if
point(s) between columns.
the input text is empty
The separator is eliminated
from the array members
String: Character string to use
to delineate the separation
point(s) between rows.
The separator is eliminated
from the array members.
Use null if only one row is
supplied

N

getArrayFromString

Divide the supplied string into an
array using the supplied separator
character or string, and trim any
leading or trailing white space
characters from each array member

String: String to separate into String[]: Array representing
an array
the substrings in the
supplied text after being
String: Character string to use
parsed using the separator;
to delineate the separation
returns null if the input text
point(s) between columns.
is empty
The separator is eliminated
from the array members

N

getArrayIndexFromSize

Get the integer array containing the
size of each array dimension from the
supplied array size string

String: Array size in the
format [#]<[#]<...>> or
#<,#<...>>

N

getAssociatedGroupNames

Get the array of group names
referenced in the script association

159

int[]: Array of integers
containing the size of each
array dimension

String[]: Array containing the
O
group names referenced in
the script association; empty
array if no groups are
referenced

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 160 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getBaseDataType

Get the base type for the specified
data type

String: Name of the primitive
data type

String: Base type for the
specified data type; returns
null if the data type doesn't
exist or isn't a primitive type

N

getCDataType

Get the C type for the specified data
type

String: Name of the primitive
data type

String: C type for the specified
data type; returns null if the
data type doesn't exist or
isn't a primitive type

N

getCheckBoxDialog

Display a dialog containing one or
more check boxes. The user must
press the Okay button to accept the
check box input(s), or Cancel to close
the dialog without accepting the
input

String: Text to display above
the check box(es)
String[][]: Array containing
the text and optional
descriptions for the radio
buttons to display in the
dialog

boolean[]: An array containing
the status for the check
box(es) if the Okay button is
pressed; returns null if no
check box information is
supplied or if the Cancel
button is pressed

N

getCommandArgArraySize

Get the argument array size for the
specified command argument at the
specified row in the command data,
with any macro replaced by its
corresponding value

int: Command argument
index. The first argument
is 0
int: Table data row index

String: Argument array size for
the specified command
argument at the specified
row in the command data,
with any macro replaced by
its corresponding value; null
if the argument number or
row index is invalid

O

160

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 161 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getCommandArgArraySizeWithMacros

Get the argument array size for the
specified command argument at the
specified row in the command data,
with any embedded macro(s) left in
place

int: Command argument
index. The first argument
is 0
int: Table data row index

String: Argument array size for
the specified command
argument at the specified
row in the command data,
with any embedded
macro(s) left in place; null if
the argument number or
row index is invalid

O

getCommandArgBitLength

Get the argument bit length for the
specified command argument at the
specified row in the command data,
with any macro replaced by its
corresponding value

int: Command argument
index. The first argument
is 0
int: Table data row index

String: Argument bit length for
the specified command
argument at the specified
row in the command data,
with any macro replaced by
its corresponding value; null
if the argument number or
row index is invalid

O

getCommandArgBitLengthWithMacros

Get the argument bit length for the
specified command argument at the
specified row in the command data,
with any embedded macro(s) left in
place

int: Command argument
index. The first argument
is 0
int: Table data row index

String: Argument bit length for
the specified command
argument at the specified
row in the command data,
with any embedded
macro(s) left in place; null if
the argument number or
row index is invalid

O

161

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 162 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getCommandArgByColumnName

Get the argument value (as a string)
for the column belonging to the
specified command argument at the
specified row in the command data,
with any macro name replaced by its
corresponding value

int: Command argument
index. The first argument
is 0
int: Table data row index
String: Name of the
argument column for
which the value is
requested

String: Argument value (as a
string) for the column
belonging to the specified
command argument at the
specified row in the
command data; null if the
argument number, row
index, or column name is
invalid

O

getCommandArgByColumnNameWithMacros

Get the argument value (as a string)
for the column belonging to the
specified command argument at the
specified row in the command data,
with any embedded macro(s) left in
place

int: Command argument
index. The first argument
is 0
int: Table data row index
String: Name of the
argument column for
which the value is
requested

String: Argument value (as a
string) for the column
belonging to the specified
command argument at the
specified row in the
command data, with any
embedded macro(s) left in
place; null if the argument
number, row index, or
column name is invalid

O

getCommandArgColumnNames

Get the array of column names
belonging to the specified command
argument at the specified row in the
command data

int: Command argument
index. The first argument
is 0
int: Table data row index

String[]: Array of column
names belonging to the
specified command
argument at the specified
row in the command data;
null if the argument number
or row index is invalid

O

162

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 163 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getCommandArgDataType

Get the argument data type for the
specified command argument at the
specified row in the command data

int: Command argument
index. The first argument
is 0
int: Table data row index

String: Argument data type for
the specified command
argument at the specified
row in the command data;
null if the argument number
or row index is invalid

O

getCommandArgEnumeration

Get the argument enumeration for
the specified command argument at
the specified row in the command
data, with any macro replaced by its
corresponding value

int: Command argument
index. The first argument
is 0
int: Table data row index

String: Argument enumeration
for the specified command
argument at the specified
row in the command data,
with any macro replaced by
its corresponding value; null
if the argument number or
row index is invalid

O

getCommandArgEnumerationWithMacros

Get the argument enumeration for
the specified command argument at
the specified row in the command
data, with any embedded macro(s)
left in place

int: Command argument
index. The first argument
is 0
int: Table data row index

String: Argument enumeration
for the specified command
argument at the specified
row in the command data,
with any embedded
macro(s) left in place; null if
the argument number or
row index is invalid

O

getCommandArgMaximum

Get the argument maximum (as a
string) for the specified command
argument at the specified row in the
command data, with any macro
replaced by its corresponding value

int: Command argument
index. The first argument
is 0
int: Table data row index

String: Argument maximum
value (as a string) for the
specified command
argument at the specified
row in the command data,
with any macro replaced by
its corresponding value; null
if the argument number or
row index is invalid

O

163

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 164 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getCommandArgMaximumWithMacros

Get the argument maximum (as a
string) for the specified command
argument at the specified row in the
command data, with any embedded
macro(s) left in place

int: Command argument
index. The first argument
is 0
int: Table data row index

String: Argument maximum
value (as a string) for the
specified command
argument at the specified
row in the command data,
with any embedded
macro(s) left in place; null if
the argument number or
row index is invalid

O

getCommandArgMinimum

Get the argument minimum value (as
a string) for the specified command
argument at the specified row in the
command data, with any macro
replaced by its corresponding value

int: Command argument
index. The first argument
is 0
int: Table data row index

String: Argument minimum
value (as a string) for the
specified command
argument at the specified
row in the command data,
with any macro replaced by
its corresponding value; null
if the argument number or
row index is invalid

O

getCommandArgMinimumWithMacros

Get the argument minimum value (as
a string) for the specified command
argument at the specified row in the
command data, with any embedded
macro(s) left in place

int: Command argument
index. The first argument
is 0
int: Table data row index

String: Argument minimum
value (as a string) for the
specified command
argument at the specified
row in the command data,
with any embedded
macro(s) left in place; null if
the argument number or
row index is invalid

O

164

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 165 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getCommandArgName

Get the argument name for the
specified command argument at the
specified row in the command data,
with any macro replaced by its
corresponding value

int: Command argument
index. The first argument
is 0
int: Table data row index

String: Argument name for the
specified command
argument at the specified
row in the command data,
with any macro replaced by
its corresponding value; null
if the argument number or
row index is invalid

O

getCommandArgNameWithMacros

Get the argument name for the
specified command argument at the
specified row in the command data,
with any embedded macro(s) left in
place

int: Command argument
index. The first argument
is 0
int: Table data row index

String: Argument name for the
specified command
argument at the specified
row in the command data,
with any embedded
macro(s) left in place; null if
the argument number or
row index is invalid

O

getCommandCode

Get the command code (as a string)
at the specified row in the command
data

int: Table data row index

String: Command code (as a
string) at the specified row
in the command data; null if
the row index is invalid

O

getCommandInformation

Get an array containing the name,
code, table, and argument name(s)
for every command in the project
database

String[][]: Array containing the
name, code, table, and
argument name(s) for every
command. The array is
sorted by command name; if
the same then by command
code; if the same then by
table name

A

165

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 166 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getCommandName

Get the command name at the
specified row in the command data

int: Table data row index

String: Command name at the
specified row in the
command data; null if the
row index is invalid

O

getCommandTableColumnNames

Get the column names for the table
referenced on the specified row of
the command table data

int: Command table data row
index

String[]: Array containing the
names of the columns of the
command table referenced
in the specified row of the
command table data

O

getCommandTableData

Get the command table data at the
row and column indicated, with any
macro replaced by its corresponding
value. The column is specified by
name and is not case sensitive.
Convenience method for
getTableData that assumes the table
type is "command"

String: Table column name
(case insensitive)
int: Table data row index

String: Contents of the
O
specified command table's
array at the row and column
name provided, with any
macro replaced by its
corresponding value; returns
null if an instance of the
command table type doesn't
exist

getCommandTableDataFieldValues

Get the data field value for all
command tables that have the
specified data field

String: Data field name

String: Array of command
O
table names and the data
field value; returns an empty
array if the field name is
invalid (i.e., no command
table has the data field)

166

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 167 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getCommandTableDataWithMacros

Get the command table data at the
row and column indicated, with any
macro name(s) left in place. The
column is specified by name and is
not case sensitive. Convenience
method for getTableDataWithMacros
that assumes the table type is
"command"

String: Table column name
(case insensitive)
int: Table data row index

String: Contents of the
specified command table's
array at the row and column
name provided, with any
macro name(s) left in place;
returns null if an instance of
the command table type
doesn't exist

O

getCommandTableNameByRow

Get the command table name to
which the specified row's data
belongs. Convenience method for
getTableNameByRow that assumes
the table type is "command"

int: Table data row index

String: Command table name
to which the current row's
parameter belongs; returns
a blank if an instance of the
command table type or the
row doesn't exist

O

getCommandTableNames

Get the array of all command table
names in the table data.
Convenience method for
getTableNames that specifies the
table type as “command”

String[]: Array of all command
table names; returns an
empty array if an instance of
the command table type
doesn't exist

O

getCommandTableNumRows

Get the number of rows of data in
the command table. Convenience
method for getTableNumRows that
assumes the table type is “command”

int: Number of rows of data in
the table for the table type
"command"; return -1 if an
instance of the command
table type doesn't exist

O

167

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 168 of 314

Input(s)

getCommandTypeNameByRow

Get the table type name referenced
in the specified row of the command
table type data. Convenience
method for getTypeNameByRow that
specifies the table type as
"command". The data for all
command types are combined. This
method provides the means to
retrieve the specific table type to
which the row data belongs

getCopyTableColumnNames

Get the copy table column names

getCopyTableEntries

Get the copy table for the messages
of the specified data stream

168

int: Table data row index

Output

*

String: Command table type
O
name to which the current
row's parameter belongs;
returns a blank if an instance
of the command table type
or the row doesn't exist

String[]: Array containing the
copy table column names
String: Data stream name
String[][]: Array containing the
copy table entries; returns
int: Size of the message
blank if there are no entries
header in bytes. For
for the specified data stream
example, the CCSDS header
or if data stream name is
size is 12
invalid
String: Name of the message
ID name data field (e.g.,
'Message ID name')
boolean: true to combine
memory copy calls for
consecutive variables in the
copy table
boolean: false to retain any
macros in the variable
names; true to replace any
macros with their
corresponding values

S
S

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name
getCopyTableEntries

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 169 of 314

Input(s)

Get the copy table for the messages
of the specified data stream

169

Output

String: Data stream name
String[][]: Array containing the
copy table entries; returns
int: Size of the message
blank if there are no entries
header in bytes. For
for the specified data stream
example, the CCSDS header
or if data stream name is
size is 12
invalid
String[][]: Array containing
string array entries giving
the structure table
path+name and the table's
associated message ID
name
boolean: true to combine
memory copy calls for
consecutive variables in the
copy table
boolean: false to retain any
macros in the variable
names; true to replace any
macros with their
corresponding values

*
S

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 170 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getCopyTableEntriesWithMacros

Get the copy table for the messages
of the specified data stream. Any
macro embedded in a variable name
is left in place

String: Data stream name
String[][]: Array containing the
copy table entries with any
int: Size of the message
macro embedded in a
header in bytes. For
variable name left in place;
example, the CCSDS header
returns blank if there are no
size is 12
entries for the specified data
String: Name of the message
stream or if data stream
ID name data field (e.g.,
name is invalid
'Message ID name')
boolean: true to combine
memory copy calls for
consecutive variables in the
copy table

S

getCopyTableEntriesWithMacros

Get the copy table for the messages
of the specified data stream. Any
macro embedded in a variable name
is left in place

String: Data stream name
String[][]: Array containing the
copy table entries with any
int: Size of the message
macro embedded in a
header in bytes. For
variable name left in place;
example, the CCSDS header
returns blank if there are no
size is 12
entries for the specified data
String[][]: Array containing
stream or if data stream
string array entries giving
name is invalid
the structure table
path+name and the table's
associated message ID
name
boolean: true to combine
memory copy calls for
consecutive variables in the
copy table

S

170

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 171 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

String: PostgreSQLcompatible database query
statement

String[][]: Two-dimensional
array representing the rows
and columns of data
returned by the database
query; returns null if the
query produces an error, or
an empty array if there are
no results

N

getDatabaseQuery

Perform a query on the currently
open database

getDataStreamNames

Get a string array containing all of the
data stream names in the project

String[]: Array containing the
unique data stream names

N

getDataTypeDefinitions

Get the array containing the userdefined data type names and their
corresponding C-language, size (in
bytes), and base data type values

String[][]: Array where each
row contains a user-defined
data type name and its
corresponding C-language,
size (in bytes), and base data
type values

N

getDataTypeSizeInBits

Get the number of bits for the
specified data type

String: Name of the structure
or primitive data type

int: Number of bits required to
store the data type; returns
0 if the data type doesn't
exist

N

getDataTypeSizeInBytes

Get the number of bytes for the
specified data type

String: Name of the structure
or primitive data type

int: Number of bytes required
to store the data type;
returns 0 if the data type
doesn't exist

N

171

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 172 of 314

Input(s)

getDateAndTime

Get the current time and date in the
form:
dow mon dd hh:mm:ss zzz yyyy
where:
dow is the day of the week (Sun,
Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat)
mon is the month (Jan, Feb, Mar,
Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct,
Nov, Dec)
dd is the day of the month (01
through 31), as two decimal digits
hh is the hour of the day (00
through 23), as two decimal digits
mm is the minute within the hour
(00 through 59), as two decimal
digits
ss is the second within the minute
(00 through 61, as two decimal
digits
zzz is the time zone (and may reflect
daylight saving time)
yyyy is the year, as four decimal
digits

getFullVariableName

Get a variable's full name which
includes the variables in the structure
path separated by underscores, and
with the data types removed

172

int: Table data row index

Output

*

String: Current date and time

N

String: The variable's full path
and name with each variable
in the path separated by an
underscore, and with the
data types removed; returns
a blank if the row is invalid

O

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 173 of 314

Description

Input(s)

Output

*

getFullVariableName

Get a variable's full name which
includes the variables in the structure
path separated by the supplied
separator character(s)

int: Table data row index
String: Character(s) to place
between the variable path
members

String: The variable's full path
and name with each variable
in the path separated by the
specified separator
character(s), and with the
data types removed; returns
a blank if the row is invalid

O

getFullVariableName

Get a variable's full name which
includes the variables in the structure
path separated by the supplied
separator character(s). Data types
may be excluded or retained, based
on the input flag. If retained, the
data types and variable names are
separated by the supplied separator
character(s)

int: Table data row index
String: Character(s) to place
between the variable path
members
boolean: true to exclude the
data types from the path +
name
String: Character(s) to place
between the data types
and variable names

String: The variable's full path
and name with each variable
in the path separated by the
specified separator
character(s); returns a blank
if the row is invalid

O

getFullVariableName

Get a variable's full name which
includes the variables in the structure
path separated by the specified
separator character(s) and with the
data types removed. In case there
are any array member variable
names in the full name, replace left
square brackets with # underscores
and remove right square brackets
(example: a[0],b[2] becomes
a_0separatorb_2)

String: Path to the variable in String: The variable's full path
the format
and name with each variable
rootTable[,structureDataTy
in the path separated by the
pe1.variable1[,structureDat
specified separator
aType2.variable2[,...]]]
character(s) and with the
data types removed; returns
String: Name of the variable
a blank if the variable path +
in the format
name doesn't exist in the
primitiveDataType.variable
project database
String: Character(s) to place
between the variable path
members

A

173

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 174 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getFullVariableName

Get a variable's full name which
includes the variables in the structure
path separated by the specified
separator character(s). In case there
are any array member variable
names in the full name, replace left
square brackets with # underscores
and remove right square brackets
(example: a[0],b[2] becomes
a_0separatorb_2). Data types may be
excluded or retained, based on the
input flag

String: Path to the variable in String: The variable's full path
the format
and name with each variable
rootTable[,structureDataTy
in the path separated by the
pe1.variable1[,structureDat
specified separator
aType2.variable2[,...]]]
character(s); returns a blank
if the variable path + name
String: Name of the variable
doesn't exist in the project
in the format
database
primitiveDataType.variable
String: Character(s) to place
between the variable path
members
boolean: true to exclude the
data types from the path +
name
String: Character(s) to place
between the data types
and variable names

A

getFullVariableName

Get a variable's full name which
String: Variable path + name String: The variable's full path
includes the variables in the structure
in the format
and name with each variable
path separated by the specified
rootTable[,structureDataTy
in the path separated by the
separator character(s), and with the
pe1.variable1[,structureDat
specified separator
data types removed. In case there are
aType2.variable2[,...]]],pri
character(s), and with the
any array member variable names in
mitiveDataType.variable
data types removed; returns
the full name, replace left square
a blank if the variable path +
String: Character(s) to place
brackets with # underscores and
name doesn't exist in the
between the variable path
remove right square brackets
project database
members
(example: a[0],b[2] becomes
a_0separatorb_2)

A

174

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 175 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getFullVariableName

Get a variable's full name which
includes the variables in the structure
path separated by the specified
separator character(s). In case there
are any array member variable
names in the full name, replace left
square brackets with # underscores
and remove right square brackets
(example: a[0],b[2] becomes
a_0separatorb_2). Data types may be
excluded or retained, based on the
input flag. Any macro embedded in
the variable name is expanded

String: Variable path + name String: The variable's full path
in the format
and name with each variable
rootTable[,structureDataTy
in the path separated by the
pe1.variable1[,structureDat
specified separator
aType2.variable2[,...]]],pri
character(s); returns a blank
mitiveDataType.variable
if the variable path + name
doesn't exist in the project
String: Character(s) to place
database. Any macro
between the variable path
embedded in the variable
members
name is expanded
boolean: true to exclude the
data types from the path +
name
String: Character(s) to place
between the data types
and variable names

A

getFullVariableNameRaw

Get the full name of the variable in
the specified row of the structure
datain the application’s native
format, which includes the variables
in the structure path separated by
commas, and with the data type and
variable names separated by periods

int: Table data row index

String: The variable's full path
and name with each variable
in the path separated by a
comma, and with each data
type and variable name
separated by a period;
returns a blank if the row is
invalid

O

getGroupDataFieldDescription

Get the description of the data field
for the specified group’s specified
data field

String: Group name
String: Data field name

String: Data field’s description;
returns a blank if the group
name or data field name is
invalid

N

175

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 176 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getGroupDataFieldNames

Get the name(s) of the data field(s)
associated with the specified group

String: Name of the group to
which the field is a member

String: Array of the data field
names associated with the
specified group; returns an
empty array if the group
name is invalid or the group
has no data fields

N

getGroupDataFieldValue

Get the contents of the data field for
the specified table's specified data
field

String: Table name, including
the path if this table
references a structure
String: Data field name

String: Data field’s value;
returns a blank if the table
type, table name, or data
field name is invalid

N

getGroupDescription

Get the description for the specified
group

String: Group name

String: Description for the
specified group; blank if the
group has no description or
the group doesn't exist

N

getGroupFields

Get the data field information for the
specified group

String: Group name

String[][]: Array containing the
data field information for
the specified group; an
empty array if the group has
no data fields, or the group
doesn't exist. Each row in
the array describes a single
data field in the format: field
name, description, size,
input type, required (true or
false), applicability, value

N

getGroupNames

Get an array of all group names

boolean: true to get only the String[]: Array containing the
groups that represent a CFS
group names (application
application; false to get all
groups only if the input flag
groups
is true); returns an empty
array if no groups exist

176

N

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 177 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getGroupTables

Get an array containing the table
members, including the member
table ancestor tables, for the
specified group

String: Group name

String[]: Array containing the
table members for the
specified group; an empty
array if the group has no
table members, or the group
doesn't exist

A

getInputDialog

Display a dialog for receiving text
input. The user must select Okay to
accept the input, or Cancel to close
the dialog without accepting the
input

String: Text label to display
beside the input text field

String: The text entered in the
dialog input field if the Okay
button is pressed; returns
null if no text or white space
is entered, or if the Cancel
button is pressed

N

177

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 178 of 314

Description

Input(s)

Output

*

getITOSEncodedDataType

Convert a primitive data type into its
ITOS encoded form

String: Name of the data
type; e.g., uint16, double
String: ITOS encoding type:
SINGLE_CHAR to get the
single character encoding
(e.g., "I" for any integer
type)
TWO_CHAR to get the
encoding character with
the data type size (e.g., "I4"
for a 4-byte integer)
BIG_ENDIAN to get the
encoding as big endian
BIG_ENDIAN_SWAP to get
the encoding as a big
endian with byte swapping
LITTLE_ENDIAN to get the
encoding as little endian
LITTLE_ENDIAN_SWAP to
get the encoding as a little
endian with byte swapping

String: ITOS encoded form of
the data type in the format
requested; returns the data
type, unmodified, if the data
type is a table (i.e., it's a
structure), or null if the data
type is unrecognized.
Example: a data type of
"int32" and ITOS encoding
type of LITTLE_ENDIAN
returns "I12345678"

N

getITOSLimitName

Get the ITOS limit name based on the
supplied index value

int: 0 = redLow, 1 =
yellowLow, 2 = yellowHigh,
3 = redHigh

String: ITOS limit name
(“redLow”, “yellowLow”,
“yellowHigh”, or “redHigh”);
returns blank if the index is
invalid

N

178

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 179 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getLinkApplicationNames

Get the array containing the
application name data field values
associated with the specified link's
variable members. Each application
name is listed only once in the array

String: Name of the
application name data field

String[]: Array containing the
contents of the specified
application name data field
associated with each of the
tables referenced by the
link’s variable members

N

getLinkDescription

Return the description for the
specified link; returns a blank if the
link doesn’t exist or the link has no
description

String: Data stream name
String: Link name

String: Link description;
returns a blank if the data
stream or link don't exist, or
the link has no description

N

getLinkRate

Return the sample rate for the
specified link; returns a blank if the
link doesn’t exist

String: Data stream name
String: Link name

String: Text representation of
the sample rate, in samples
per second, of the specified
link. For rates equal to or
faster than 1 sample per
second the string represents
a whole number; for rates
slower than 1 sample per
second the string is in the
form number of samples /
number of seconds; returns
a blank if the data stream or
link don't exist

N

getLongestString

Get the character length of the
longest string in the supplied string
array

String[]: Array of strings
Integer: Initial minimum
width; null to use zero as
the minimum

int: Character length of the
N
longest string in the supplied
array; null if an input is
invalid

179

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 180 of 314

Input(s)

getLongestStrings

Get the character length of the
longest string for each column in the
supplied string array

getMacroDefinitions

*

Integer[]:Character length of
the longest string in each
column of the supplied
array; null if any of the
inputs is invalid

N

Get the array containing the macro
names and their corresponding
values

String[][]: Array where each
row contains a macro names
and its corresponding value

N

getMessageOwnersIDsAndNames

Get an array containing every
message name and its corresponding
ID, and the owning entity from every
table cell, data field (table or group),
and telemetry message. Message
names and IDs are determined by the
input data type assigned to the table
column or data field

String[][]: Two-dimensional
array containing every
message name and its
corresponding ID, and the
owning entity, sorted by
owner name. Each row in
the array is an array in the
form [owner name],
[message name],
[message ID]. The owner
name is preceded by
'Group:' if the owner is a
group, and by "Tlm:' if the
owner is a telemetry
message

A

getNumberOfTimeSlots

Get the number of time slots for the
scheduler definition table

int: Number of time slots for
the scheduler definition
table table

N

180

String[][]: Array of string
arrays
Integer[]: Initial minimum
widths; null to use zero as
the minimums

Output

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 181 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getNumCommandArguments

Get the number of arguments
associated with the command table
type at the specified row in the
command data

int: Row index

int: Number of arguments
associated with the
command table type at the
specified row in the
command data

getNumCommandArguments

Get the number of arguments
associated with the specified
command table type

String: Table type (case
insensitive)

int: Number of arguments
O
associated with the specified
command table type; -1 if
the table type is invalid

getOutputPath

Get the script output file path set via
the program preferences dialog or
command line

181

String: Script output file path;
blank if no path has been set

O

N

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name
getPathByRow

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 182 of 314

Input(s)

Get the path to which the specified
row's data belongs with any
embedded macro replaced by its
corresponding value

182

String: Table type (case
insensitive). All structure
table types are
combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Structure", and
all command table types
are combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Command"
int: Table data row index

Output

*

String: The path to the current O
row's parameter with any
embedded macro replaced
by its corresponding value;
returns a blank if an instance
of the table type doesn't
exist or the row number is
invalid. The path starts with
the root table name. For
structure tables the root
name is followed by a
comma and then the parent
structure and variable
name(s) that define(s) the
table's path. Each parent
and its associated variable
name are separated by a
period. Each
parent/variable pair in the
path is separated by a
comma. The format is:
rootTable[,structureDataTy
pe1.variable1[,structureDat
aType2.variable2[...]]]

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 183 of 314

Input(s)

getPathByRowWithMacros

Get the path to which the specified
row's data belongs with any
embedded macro(s) left in place

getProject

Get the project’s name

getProjectDataFieldDescription

Get the description of the data field
for the specified project data field

183

String: Table type (case
insensitive). All structure
table types are
combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Structure", and
all command table types
are combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Command"
int: Table data row index

String: Data field name

Output

*

String: The path to the current
row's parameter with any
embedded macro(s) left in
place; returns a blank if an
instance of the table type
doesn't exist or the row
number is invalid. The path
starts with the root table
name. For structure tables
the root name is followed by
a comma and then the
parent structure and
variable name(s) that
define(s) the table's path.
Each parent and its
associated variable name
are separated by a period.
Each parent/variable pair in
the path is separated by a
comma. The format is:
rootTable[,structureDataTy
pe1.variable1[,structureDat
aType2.variable2[...]]]

O

String: Name of the project

N

String: Data field’s description;
returns a blank if the project
data field name is invalid

N

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 184 of 314

Input(s)

getProjectDataFieldNames

Get the name(s) of the data field(s)
associated with the project

getProjectDataFieldValue

Get the contents of the data field for
the specified project data field

getProjectDescription

Output

*

String: Array of the data field
names associated with the
project; returns an empty
array if the project has no
data fields

N

String: Data field’s value;
returns a blank if the project
data field name is invalid

N

Get the project’s description

String: Description of the
project

N

getProjectFields

Get the data field information for the
project

String[][]: Array containing the
data field information for
the project; an empty array
if the project has no data
fields. Each row in the array
describes a single data field
in the format: field name,
description, size, input type,
required (true or false),
applicability, value

N

getPrototypeName

Get the name of the prototype table
for the specified table

String: The name of the
prototype table for the
specified table

N

184

String: Data field name

String: Table name

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 185 of 314

Input(s)

getRadioButtonDialog

Display a dialog containing radio
buttons. The radio buttons are
mutually exclusive; only one can be
selected at a time. The user must
press the Okay button to accept the
radio button input, or Cancel to close
the dialog without accepting the
input

getRootStructureTableNames

*

String: The text for the
selected radio button if the
Okay button is pressed;
returns null if no radio
button is selected or if the
Cancel button is pressed

N

Get the name(s) of the root structure
table(s). Convenience method for
getRootTableNames that assumes
the table type is “structure”

String[]: Array containing the
root structure table names;
returns an empty array if an
instance of the structure
table type doesn't exist

O

getRootTableNames

Get the name(s) of the root table(s)
String: Table type (case
for the supplied table type. Note that
insensitive). All structure
only structure tables can have child
table types are
tables so using this method for noncombined and are
structure tables returns the same list
referenced by the type
of tables as
name "Structure", and
getTableNames(typeName)
all command table types
are combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Command"

String[]: Array containing the
root table names for the
type specified; returns an
empty array if an instance of
the table type doesn't exist

O

getScriptName

Get the name of the script file being
executed

String: Script file name

N

getStructureArraySize

Get the variable array size at the
specified row in the structure data,
with any macro name replaced by its
corresponding value

String: Variable array size at
the specified row in the
structure data, with any
macro name replaced by its
corresponding value; null if
the row index is invalid

O

185

String: Text to display above
the radio buttons
String[][]: Array containing
the text and optional
descriptions for the radio
buttons to display in the
dialog

Output

int: Table data row index

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 186 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getStructureArraySizeWithMacros

Get the variable array size at the
specified row in the structure data,
with any embedded macro(s) left in
place

int: Table data row index

String: Variable array size at
the specified row in the
structure data, with any
embedded macro(s) left in
place; null if the row index is
invalid

O

getStructureBitLength

Get the variable bit length at the
specified row in the structure data,
with any macro name replaced by its
corresponding value

int: Table data row index

String: Variable bit length at
the specified row in the
structure data, with any
macro name replaced by its
corresponding value; null if
the row index is invalid

O

getStructureBitLengthWithMacros

Get the variable bit length at the
specified row in the structure data,
with any embedded macro(s) left in
place

int: Table data row index

String: Variable bit length at
the specified row in the
structure data, with any
embedded macro(s) left in
place; null if the row index is
invalid

O

getStructureDataByVariableName

Get the data from the specified
"Structure" table in the specified
column for the row with the specified
variable name, with any macro
replaced by its corresponding value.
Convenience method for
getTableDataByColumnName that
assumes the table type is "Structure"
and the variable name column is
"Variable Name"

String: Full table path, which
includes the parent table
name and the data type +
variable name pairs
String: Variable name
String: Column name (case
insensitive)

String: Contents of the table
defined by the table path,
variable name, and column
name specified; returns null
if an instance of the table
type, the column name, or
the variable name doesn't
exist

O

186

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 187 of 314

Description

Input(s)

Output

*

getStructureDataByVariableNameWithMacros

Get the data from the specified
"Structure" table in the specified
column for the row with the specified
variable name, with any macro
name(s) left in place. Convenience
method
getTableDataByColumnName that
assumes the table type is "Structure"
and the variable name column is
"Variable Name"

String: Full table path, which
includes the parent table
name and the data type +
variable name pairs
String: Variable name
String: Column name (case
insensitive)

String: Contents of the table
defined by the table path,
variable name, and column
name specified, with any
macro name(s) left in place;
returns null if an instance of
the table type, the column
name, or the variable name
doesn't exist

O

getStructureDataType

Get the variable data type at the
specified row in the structure data

int: Table data row index

String: Variable data type at
the specified row in the
structure data; null if the
row index is invalid

O

getStructureDescription

Get the variable description at the
specified row in the structure data,
with any macro name replaced by its
corresponding value

int: Table data row index

String: Variable description at O
the specified row in the
structure data, with any
macro name replaced by its
corresponding value; null if
the row index is invalid or no
column has the 'Units' input
type

getStructureDescriptionWithMacros

Get the variable description at the
specified row in the structure data,
with any embedded macro(s) left in
place

int: Table data row index

String: Variable description at
the specified row in the
structure data, with any
embedded macro(s) left in
place; null if the row index is
invalid or no column has the
'Units' input type

187

O

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 188 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getStructureEnumerations

Get the variable enumeration(s) at
the specified row in the structure
data, with any macro name replaced
by its corresponding value

int: Table data row index

String: Array containing the
variable enumeration(s) at
the specified row in the
structure data, with any
macro name replaced by its
corresponding value; null if
the row index is invalid

O

getStructureEnumerationsWithMacros

Get the variable enumeration(s) at
the specified row in the structure
data, with any embedded macro(s)
left in place

int: Table data row index

String: Array containing the
variable enumeration(s) at
the specified row in the
structure data, with any
embedded macro(s) left in
place; null if the row index is
invalid

O

getStructureParentRowByChildRow

Get the row index in the structure
data for the first entry associated
with the parent structure of the entry
on the specified row of the structure
data

int: Table data row index

int: The row index in the
structure data for the first
entry associated with the
parent structure of the entry
on the specified row of the
structure data

O

188

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name
getStructurePathByRow

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 189 of 314

Input(s)

Get the structure path to which the
specified row's data belongs with any
embedded macro replaced by its
corresponding value. Convenience
method that assumes the table type
is "structure"

189

int: Table data row index

Output

*

String: The structure path to
O
the current row's parameter
with any embedded macro
replaced by its
corresponding value; returns
a blank if an instance of the
table type doesn't exist or
the row number is invalid.
The path starts with the root
table name. For structure
tables the root name is
followed by a comma and
then the parent structure
and variable name(s) that
define(s) the table's path.
Each parent and its
associated variable name
are separated by a period.
Each parent/variable pair in
the path is separated by a
comma. The format is:
rootTable[,structureDataTy
pe1.variable1[,structureDat
aType2.variable2[...]]]

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 190 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getStructurePathByRowWithMacros

Get the structure path to which the
specified row's data belongs with any
embedded macro(s) left in place.
Convenience method that assumes
the table type is "structure"

int: Table data row index

String: The structure path to
O
the current row's parameter
with any embedded
macro(s) left in place;
returns a blank if an instance
of the table type doesn't
exist or the row number is
invalid. The path starts with
the root table name. For
structure tables the root
name is followed by a
comma and then the parent
structure and variable
name(s) that define(s) the
table's path. Each parent
and its associated variable
name are separated by a
period. Each
parent/variable pair in the
path is separated by a
comma. The format is:
rootTable[,structureDataTy
pe1.variable1[,structureDat
aType2.variable2[...]]]

getStructureRates

Get the variable rate(s) at the
specified row in the structure data

int: Table data row index

String: Array containing the
variable rate(s) at the
specified row in the
structure data; null if the
row index is invalid

190

O

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 191 of 314

Input(s)

getStructureTablesByReferenceOrder

Get an array containing the names of
the prototype structures in the order
in which they are referenced; that is,
the structure array is arranged so
that a structure appears in the array
prior to a structure that references it

getStructureTableColumnNames

Get the column names for the table
referenced on the specified row of
the structure table data

getStructureTableData

getStructureTableDataFieldValues

Output

*

String[]: Array containing the
names of the prototype
structures in the order in
which they are referenced

O

int: Structure table data row
index

String[]: Array containing the
names of the columns of the
structure table referenced in
the specified row of the
structure table data

O

Get the structure table data at the
row and column indicated, with any
macro replaced by its corresponding
value. The column is specified by
name and is not case sensitive.
Convenience method for
getTableData that assumes the table
type is "structure"

String: Table column name
(case insensitive)
int: Table data row index

String: Contents of the
O
specified structure table's
array at the row and column
name provided, with any
macro replaced by its
corresponding value; returns
null if an instance of the
structure table type doesn't
exist

Get the data field value for all
structure tables that have the
specified data field

String: Data field name

String: Array of structure table
names and the data field
value; returns an empty
array if the field name is
invalid (i.e., no structure
table has the data field)

191

O

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 192 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*
O

getStructureTableDataWithMacros

Get the structure table data at the
row and column indicated, with any
macro name(s) left in place. The
column is specified by name and is
not case sensitive. Convenience
method for getTableDataWithMacros
that assumes the table type is
"structure"

String: Table column name
(case insensitive)
int: Table data row index

String: Contents of the
specified structure table's
array at the row and column
name provided, with any
macro name(s) left in place;
returns null if an instance of
the structure table type
doesn't exist

getStructureTableITOSPathByRow

Get the structure path to which the
specified row's data belongs,
formatted for use in an ITOS record
statement, and with any macro name
replaced by its corresponding value

int: Table data row index

String: The path to the current O
row's parameter formatted
for use in an ITOS record
statement and with any
macro name replaced by its
corresponding value; returns
a blank if an instance of the
table type doesn't exist or
the row number is invalid.
The path starts with the root
table name. The root name
is followed by a period and
then the variable name(s)
that define(s) the table's
path. Each variable in the
path is separated by an
underscore. The format is:
rootTable[.variable1[.varia
ble2[...]]]

192

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 193 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getStructureTableITOSPathByRowWithMacros

Get the structure path to which the
specified row's data belongs,
formatted for use in an ITOS record
statement, and with any macro
name(s) left in place

int: Table data row index

String: The path to the current O
row's parameter formatted
for use in an ITOS record
statement and with any
macro name(s) left in place;
returns a blank if an instance
of the table type doesn't
exist or the row number is
invalid. The path starts with
the root table name. The
root name is followed by a
period and then the variable
name(s) that define(s) the
table's path. Each variable
in the path is separated by
an underscore. The format
is:
rootTable[.variable1[.varia
ble2[...]]]

getStructureTableNameByRow

Get the prototype structure table
name to which the specified row's
data belongs. Convenience method
for getTableNameByRow that
assumes the table type is "structure"

int: Table data row index

String: Prototype structure
O
table name to which the
current row's parameter
belongs; returns a blank if an
instance of the structure
table type or the row
doesn't exist

getStructureTableNames

Get array of all prototype structure
table names referenced in the table
data. Convenience method that
specifies the table type as "structure"

193

String[]: Array of all prototype
structure table names;
returns an empty array if an
instance of the structure
table type doesn't exist

O

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 194 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getStructureTableNumRows

Get the number of rows of data in
the structure table. Convenience
method for getTableNumRows that
assumes the table type is “structure”

int: Number of rows of data in
the table for the table type
"structure"; return -1 if an
instance of the structure
table type doesn't exist

O

getStructureTablePaths

Get array of all structure table
names, including paths for child
structure tables, referenced in the
table data. Convenience method
that specifies the table type as
"structure"

String[]: Array of all structure
table names, including paths
for child structure tables;
returns an empty array if an
instance of the structure
table type doesn't exist

O

getStructureTableVariablePathByRow

Get the structure path to which the
specified row's data belongs, showing
only the root structure and variable
names and with any embedded
macro replaced by its corresponding
value. This format is used when
referencing a structure table’s data
fields

194

int: Table data row index

String: The path to the current O
row's parameter with any
embedded macro replaced
by its corresponding value;
returns a blank if an instance
of the table type doesn't
exist or the row number is
invalid. The path starts with
the root table name. The
root name is followed by a
comma and then the
variable name(s) that
define(s) the table's path.
Each variable in the path is
separated by a comma. The
format is:
rootTable[,variable1[,varia
ble2[...]]]

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Method Name

Description

getStructureTableVariablePathByRowWithMacros

Get the structure path to which the
specified row's data belongs and with
any embedded macro(s) left in place,
showing only the root structure and
variable names. This format is used
when referencing a structure table’s
data fields

getStructureTypeNameByRow

Get the table type name referenced
in the specified row of the structure
table type data. Convenience
method for or getTypeNameByRow
that specifies the table type as
"structure". The data for all structure
types are combined. This method
provides the means to retrieve the
specific table type to which the row
data belongs

Version 1.4.14
Page 195 of 314

Input(s)

195

Output

*

int: Table data row index

String: The path to the current
row's parameter with any
embedded macro(s) left in
place; returns a blank if an
instance of the table type
doesn't exist or the row
number is invalid. The path
starts with the root table
name. The root name is
followed by a comma and
then the variable name(s)
that define(s) the table's
path. Each variable in the
path is separated by a
comma. The format is:
rootTable[,variable1[,varia
ble2[...]]]

O

int: Table data row index

String: Structure table type
O
name to which the current
row's parameter belongs;
returns a blank if an instance
of the structure table type
or the row doesn't exist

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 196 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getStructureUnits

Get the variable units at the specified
row in the structure data, with any
macro name replaced by its
corresponding value

int: Table data row index

String: Variable units at the
O
specified row in the
structure data, with any
macro name replaced by its
corresponding value; null if
the row index is invalid or no
column has the 'Description'
input type

getStructureUnitsWithMacros

Get the variable units at the specified
row in the structure data, with any
embedded macro(s) left in place

int: Table data row index

String: Variable units at the
specified row in the
structure data, with any
embedded macro(s) left in
place; null if the row index is
invalid or no column has the
'Description' input type

O

getStructureVariableName

Get the variable name at the
specified row in the structure data,
with any macro name replaced by its
corresponding value

int: Table data row index

String: Variable name at the
specified row in the
structure data, with any
macro name replaced by its
corresponding value; null if
the row index is invalid

O

getStructureVariableNameWithMacros

Get the variable name at the
specified row in the structure data,
with any embedded macro(s) left in
place

int: Table data row index

String: Variable name at the
specified row in the
structure data, with any
embedded macro(s) left in
place; null if the row index is
invalid

O

196

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 197 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getTableColumnNames

Get the table column names for the
table referenced on the specified row
of the table data for the table type
specified

String: Table type (case
insensitive). All structure
table types are
combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Structure", and
all command table types
are combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Command"
int: Table data row index

String[]: Array containing the
names of the columns of the
table type referenced in the
specified row of the type's
table data

O

getTableColumnNamesByType

Get the table column names for the
table type specified

String: Table type name

String[]: Array containing the
names of the columns of the
table type specified

A

getTableData

Get the data at the row and column
indicated, with any macro replaced
by its corresponding value, for the
table type specified. The column is
specified by name

String: Table type (case
insensitive). All structure
table types are
combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Structure", and
all command table types
are combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Command"
String: Table column name
(case insensitive)
int: Table data row index

String: Contents of the
O
specified table's array at the
row and column name
provided with any macro
replaced by its
corresponding value; returns
null if an instance of the
table type, the column
name, or the row doesn't
exist

197

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name
getTableDataByColumnName

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 198 of 314

Input(s)

Get the data from the a table in the
specified column for the row in the
matching column name that contains
the matching name, with any macro
name replaced by its corresponding
value

198

Output

*

String: Table type (case
String: Contents of the table
O
insensitive). All structure
defined by the table type,
table types are
table path, matching column
combined and are
name, matching name, and
referenced by the type
data column name specified,
name "Structure", and
with any macro name
all command table types
replaced by its
are combined and are
corresponding value; returns
referenced by the type
null if an instance of the
name "Command"
table type, the matching
column, the data column, or
String: Full table path
the matching name doesn't
String: Name of the column
exist
containing that matching
name (case insensitive)
String: Text to match in the
matching column - this
determines the row. The
first row in the matching
column that matches the
matching name determines
the row used to retrieve
the data value
String: Name of the column
from which to retrieve the
data value (case
insensitive)

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 199 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getTableDataByColumnNameWithMacros

Get the data from the a table in the
specified column for the row in the
matching column name that contains
the matching name, with any macro
name(s) left in place

String: Table type (case
String: Contents of the table
insensitive). All structure
defined by the table type,
table types are
table path, matching column
combined and are
name, matching name, and
referenced by the type
data column name specified,
name "Structure", and
with any macro name(s) left
all command table types
in place; returns null if an
are combined and are
instance of the table type,
referenced by the type
the matching column, the
name "Command"
data column, or the
matching name doesn't exist
String: Full table path
String: Name of the column
containing that matching
name (case insensitive)
String: Text to match in the
matching column - this
determines the row. The
first row in the matching
column that matches the
matching name determines
the row used to retrieve
the data value
String: Name of the column
from which to retrieve the
data value (case
insensitive)

O

getTableDataFieldDescription

Get the description of the data field
for the specified table's specified
data field

String: Table name, including
the path if this table
references a structure
String: Data field name

A

199

String: Data field’s description;
returns a blank if the table
name or data field name is
invalid

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 200 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getTableDataFieldNames

Get the name(s) of the data field(s)
associated with the specified table

String: Name of the table,
including the path if this
table references a structure,
to which the field is a
member

String: Array of the data field
names associated with the
specified table; returns an
empty array if the table
name is invalid or the table
has no data fields

A

getTableDataFieldValue

Get the contents of the data field for
the specified table's specified data
field

String: Table name, including
the path if this table
references a structure
String: Data field name

String: Data field’s value;
returns a blank if the table
name or data field name is
invalid

A

getTableDataFieldValues

Get the data field value for all tables
of the specified type that have the
specified data field

String: Table type (case
insensitive). All structure
table types are
combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Structure", and
all command table types
are combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Command". null to
include tables of any type
String: Data field name

String: Array of table names of
the specified type and the
data field value; returns an
empty array if the field
name is invalid (i.e., no table
has the data field)

O

getTableDataFieldValues

Get the data field value for all tables
that have the specified data field

String: Data field name

String: Array of table names
O
and the data field value;
returns an empty array if the
field name is invalid (i.e., no
table has the data field)

200

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 201 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getTableDataWithMacros

Get the table data at the row and
column indicated, with any macro
name(s) left in place. The column is
specified by name and is not case
sensitive

String: Table type (case
insensitive). All structure
table types are
combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Structure", and
all command table types
are combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Command"
String: Table column name
(case insensitive)
int: Table data row index

String: Contents of the
O
specified table's array at the
row and column name
provided, with any macro
name(s) left in place; returns
null if an instance of the
table type, the column
name, or the row doesn't
exist

getTableDescription

Get the description of the specified
table

String: Table name, including
the full path for child
structure tables

String: Description of the
specified table; returns a
blank the table doesn't exist

getTableDescriptionByRow

Get the description of the table at
the row indicated for the table type
specified

String: Table type (case
insensitive). All structure
table types are
combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Structure", and
all command table types
are combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Command"
int: Table data row index

String: Table name for the
O
specified table type to which
the current row's parameter
belongs; returns a blank if an
instance of the table type or
the row doesn't exist

201

A

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 202 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getTableNameByRow

Get the prototype table name for the
type specified to which the specified
row's parameter belongs

String: Table type (case
insensitive). All structure
table types are
combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Structure", and
all command table types
are combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Command"
int: Table data row index

String: Prototype table name
to which the current row's
parameter belongs; return a
blank if an instance of the
table type or the row
doesn't exist

O

getTableNames

Get array of all table names
referenced in the table data of the
specified table type

String: Table type (case
String[]: Array of all table
insensitive). All structure
names, with paths for child
table types are
structure tables excluded
combined and are
based on the input flag,
referenced by the type
represented by the table
name "Structure", and
type; returns an empty array
all command table types
if an instance of the table
are combined and are
type doesn't exist
referenced by the type
name "Command"
boolean: true to return only
the prototype name for any
child structures; false to
include the full path for
child structures

O

202

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 203 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getTableNames

Get array of all table names,
including paths for child structure
tables, referenced in the table data
for all table types

String[]: Array of all table
names, including paths for
child structure tables,
referenced in the table data;
empty array if no tables
exists in the data

O

getTableNames

Get array of all table names,
String: Table type (case
including paths for child structure
insensitive). All structure
tables, referenced in the table data of
table types are
the specified table type
combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Structure", and
all command table types
are combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Command"

String[]: Array of all table
names, including paths for
child structure tables,
represented by the table
type (prototype names for
child structures); returns an
empty array if an instance of
the table type doesn't exist

O

getTableNumRows

Get the number of rows of data for
all table types

int: Number of rows of data
for all table types; return 0 if
there is no table data

O

getTableNumRows

Get the number of rows of for the
table type specified

int: Number of rows of data in
the table for the table type
specified; return -1 if an
instance of the table type
doesn't exist

O

203

String: Table type (case
insensitive). All structure
table types are
combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Structure", and
all command table types
are combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Command"

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 204 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getTelemetryMessageIDs

Get the copy table message ID names
and their corresponding ID values for
the specified data stream

String: Data stream name

String: Array containing the
copy table message ID
names and ID values;
returns blank if there are no
entries for the specified data
stream or if data stream
name is invalid

S

getTypeDataFieldDescription

Get the description of the data field
for the specified table type's
specified data field

String: Table type (case
insensitive). All structure
table types are
combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Structure", and
all command table types
are combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Command"
String: Data field name

String: Data field’s description;
returns a blank if the table
type name or data field
name is invalid

A

getTypeDataFieldNames

Get the name(s) of the data field(s)
associated with the specified table
type

String: Name of the table
type to which the field is a
member

String: Array of the data field
names associated with the
specified table type; returns
an empty array if the table
type name is invalid or the
table type has no data fields

A

204

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 205 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getTypeDataFieldValue

Get the contents of the data field for
the specified table type's specified
data field

String: Table type (case
insensitive). All structure
table types are
combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Structure", and
all command table types
are combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Command"
String: Data field name

String: Data field’s value;
returns a blank if the table
type name or data field
name is invalid

A

getTypeNameByRow

Get the table type name referenced
in the specified row of the specified
table type data. Multiple structure
(and command) types are allowed.
The data for all structure (command)
types are combined. This method
provides the means to retrieve the
specific table type to which the row
data belongs

String: Table type (case
insensitive). All structure
table types are
combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Structure", and
all command table types
are combined and are
referenced by the type
name "Command"
int: Table data row index

String: Table type name to
which the current row's
parameter belongs; returns
a blank if an instance of the
table type or the row
doesn't exist

O

getTypeNameByTable

Get the the table type name for the
specified table

String: Name of the table.
For a child structure this
includes the path

String: Type name for the
specified table

O

getUser

Get the name of the user executing
the script

String: Name of the user
executing the script

N

205

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 206 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

getVariableLinks

Get the array of link names to which
the specified variable belongs

String: Variable path and
name

String[]: Array containing the
links to which the specified
variable is a member;
returns an empty array if the
variable does not belong to
a link

N

getVariableOffset

Get the byte offset of the specified
variable relative to its parent
structure. The variable's path,
including parent structure and
variable name, is used to verify that
the specified target has been located;
i.e., not another variable with the
same name

String: Parent structure name int: The byte offset to the
of the variable being
target variable relative to its
checked
parent structure; returns -1
if the parent-variable path
String: A comma separated
combination is invalid
string of each data type
and variable name of each
variable in the current
search path

A

getVariablePaths

Get an array containing the path to
each parent structure and its
variables

String[][]: Array containing the
path for each structure
variable. The root structures
are sorted alphabetically.
The variables are displayed
in the order of appearance
within the structure (parent
or child). Any macro is
replaced by its
corresponding value

A

isArrayMember

Check if the supplied variable name
represents an array member

Object: Variable name

boolean: true if the variable
name is an array member

N

isDataTypeCharacter

Determine if the supplied data type is
a character or string

String: Name of the data type

boolean: true if the supplied
data type is a character or
string; false otherwise

N

206

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 207 of 314

Description

Input(s)

isDataTypeFloat

Determine if the supplied data type is
a float or double

String: Name of the data type

boolean: true if the supplied
data type is a float or
double; false otherwise

N

isDataTypeInteger

Determine if the supplied data type is
a signed or unsigned integer

String: Name of the data type

boolean: true if the supplied
data type is a signed or
unsigned integer; false
otherwise

N

isDataTypePrimitive

Determine if the supplied data type is
a primitive type

String: Name of the data type

boolean: true if the supplied
data type is a primitive; false
otherwise

N

isDataTypeString

Determine if the supplied data type is
a character string

String: Name of the data type

boolean: true if the supplied
data type is a character
string; false otherwise

N

isDataTypeUnsignedInt

Determine if the supplied data type is
an unsigned integer

String: Name of the data type

boolean: true if the supplied
data type is an unsigned
integer; false otherwise

N

isStructureShared

Determine if the specified structure is
referenced by more than one root
structure

String: Prototype name of the boolean: true if the specified
structure to check
structure is referenced by
more than one root
structure; false otherwise

N

openOutputFile

Open the specified file for writing.
The PrintWriter object that is
returned is used by the file writing
methods to specify the output file

String: Output file path +
name

N

207

Output

PrintWriter: PrintWriter
object; returns null if the file
could not be opened

*

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 208 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

String[][]: Two-dimensional
array representing the
enumeration parameters ;
returns null if the input text
is empty or the enumeration
separator characters cannot
be determined

N

parseEnumerationParameters

Divide the supplied enumeration
string into the values and labels. The
enumeration value/label separator
character and the enumerated pair
separator character are automatically
determined. Any leading or trailing
white space characters are removed
from each array member

String: Enumeration in the
format [...][...]

showErrorDialog

Display an error dialog showing the
supplied text. The dialog’s header
and icon indicate that the text
describes an error condition. The
Okay button must be pressed before
the script can continue

String: Text to display in the
dialog box

N

showInformationDialog

Display an informational dialog
showing the supplied text. The
dialog’s header and icon indicate that
the text describes information useful
to the user; e.g., script status. The
Okay button must be pressed before
the script can continue

String: Text to display in the
dialog box

N

showWarningDialog

Display a warning dialog showing the
supplied text. The dialog’s header
and icon indicate that the text
describes a warning condition. The
Okay button must be pressed before
the script can continue

String: Text to display in the
dialog box

N

208

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 209 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

writeFailLogEntry

Write the supplied text to the event
log with an event type of ‘Fail. The
log message is prepended with
“[script: scriptFileName] “ where
scriptFileName is the file name of the
script generating the message
request

String: Text to output to the
event log

N

writeStatusLogEntry

Write the supplied text to the event
log with an event type of ‘Status. The
log message is prepended with
“[script: scriptFileName] “ where
scriptFileName is the file name of the
script generating the message
request

String: Text to output to the
event log

N

writeSuccessLogEntry

Write the supplied text to the event
log with an event type of ‘Success’.
The log message is prepended with
“[script: scriptFileName] “ where
scriptFileName is the file name of the
script generating the message
request

String: Text to output to the
event log

N

writeToFile

Write the supplied text to the
specified output file PrintWriter
object

PrintWriter: Output file
PrintWriter object obtained
from the openOutputFile
method
String: Text to write to the
output file

N

209

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 210 of 314

Description

Input(s)

writeToFileFormat

Write the supplied formatted text in
the indicated format to the specified
output file PrintWriter object

PrintWriter: Output file
PrintWriter object obtained
from the openOutputFile
method
String: Print format string to
write to the output file
Object…: variable list of
arguments referenced by
the format specifiers in the
format string

N

writeToFileLn

Write the supplied text to the
specified output file PrintWriter
object and append a line feed
character

PrintWriter: Output file
PrintWriter object obtained
from the openOutputFile
method
String: Text to write to the
output file

N

xmlCleanSystemPath

Replace each invalid character with
an underscore and move any leading
underscores to the end of each path
segment

String: System path in the
form
<path1>

xmlGetBaseDataType

Convert the primitive data type into
String: Data type
the base equivalent used by the
xtceSetParameterDataType() and
xtceSetArgumentDataType() methods

210

Output

*

String: Path with each invalid
character replaced with an
underscore and any leading
underscores moved to the
end of each path segment

N

BasePrimitiveDataType: Base
primitive data type
corresponding to the
specified primitive data
type; null if no match

N

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name
xtceAddCommand

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 211 of 314

Input(s)

Add a command to the command
metadata set

211

SpaceSystemType: Space
system reference
String: Command name
String: Command code
String: Application ID
boolean: true if this table
represents the command
header
String: Command header
table system path
String[]: Array of command
argument names
String[]: Array of of command
argument data types
String[]: Array of of command
argument array sizes; the
list item is null or blank if
the corresponding
argument isn't an array
String: Description of the
command

Output

*
N

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name
xtceAddContainerReference

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 212 of 314

Description

Input(s)

Add a container reference(s) for the
telemetry or command parameter or
parameter array to the specified
entry list

String: Reference to the
telemetry or command
entry list into which to
place the parameter or
parameter array container
reference(s)
String: Parameter name
String: Data type
String: Parameter array size;
null or blank if the
parameter isn't an array

212

Output

*
N

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name
xtceAddParameterAndType

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 213 of 314

Input(s)

Add a parameter with a primitive
data type to the parameter set and
parameter type set

213

SpaceSystemType: Space
system reference
String: Parameter name
String: Parameter primitive
data type
String: Parameter array size;
null or blank if the
parameter isn't an array
String: Parameter bit length;
null or blank if not a bitwise parameter
String: Enumeration in the
format |[|...][,...]; null to not
specify
String: Parameter units
String: Minimum parameter
value
String: Maximum parameter
value
String: Parameter description
int: Size, in characters, of a
string parameter; ignored if
not a string or character

Output

*
N

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name
xtceAddParameterSequenceEntry

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 214 of 314

Input(s)

Add the parameter to the sequence
container entry list

214

SpaceSystemType: Reference
to the space system to
which the parameter
belongs
String: Parameter name
String: Data type
String: Array size
EntryListType: Reference to
the entry list into which to
place the parameter (for a
primitive data type) or
container (for a structure
data type) reference
boolean: true if this table
represents the telemetry
header or one of its
descendants

Output
boolean: true if the
parameter's data type
references the telemetry
header or one of its
descendants; otherwise
return the flag status
unchanged

*
N

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 215 of 314

Description

Input(s)

xtceAddSpaceSystemCommands

Add the command(s) from a table to
the specified space system

SpaceSystemType: Space
system reference
String[][]: Table data array
int: Command name column
index
int: Command code column
index
int: Command description
column index
boolean: true if this table
represents the command
header
String: Command header
table system path
String: Application ID

N

xtceAddSpaceSystemHeader

Set the space system header
attributes

SpaceSystemType: Space
system reference
String: Classification attribute
String: Validation status
attribute
String: Version attribute
String: Export creation time
and date

N

215

Output

*

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

xtceAddSpaceSystemParameters

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Add a structure table's parameters to
the telemetry meta data

216

Version 1.4.14
Page 216 of 314

SpaceSystemType: Space
system reference
String: Table name
String[][]: Array containing
the table's data
int: Variable (parameter)
name column index
int: Parameter data type
column index
int: Parameter array size
column index
int: Parameter bit length
column index
int: Parameter enumeration
column index; -1 if no the
table has no enumeration
column
int: Parameter description
column index; -1 if no the
table has no description
column
int: Parameter units column
index; -1 if no the table has
no units column
int: Minimum parameter
value column index; -1 if no
the table has no minimum
column
int: Maximum parameter
value column index; -1 if no
the table has no maximum
column

N

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 217 of 314

Input(s)

Output

*

boolean: true if this table
represents the telemetry
header or one of its
descendants
String: Telemetry header
table system path; null or
blank is none
boolean: true if the table is a
root structure table
String: Telemetry header
application ID
xtceCreateCommandMetadata

Create the space system command
metadata

SpaceSystemType: Space
system reference

xtceCreateEnumerationList

Build an enumeration list from the
supplied enumeration string

SpaceSystemType: space
system reference
String: Enumeration in the
format [...][...]

xtceCreateTelemetryMetadata
xtceCreateUnitSet

N
EnumerationList:

SpaceSystemType: Space
system reference
Build a unit set from the supplied
units string

217

String: Parameter or
command argument units;
null to not specify

N

N
UnitSet:

N

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name
xtceExport

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 218 of 314

Input(s)

Export the tables in XTCE XML format
to the specified file. This is the main
entry point when using a script
association to perform the export. It
calls the internal method to set up
and parse the tables for export

218

Output

String: Output file name
boolean: true if an error
occurred preventing
boolean: true if the data is
exporting the project to the
big endian
file
boolean: true if the telemetry
and command headers big
endian
String: Version attribute (for
the space system headers)
String: Validation status
attribute (for the space
system headers)
String: First level
classification attribute (for
the space system headers)
String: Second level
classification attribute (for
the space system headers)
String: Third level
classification attribute (for
the space system headers)

*
N

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

xtceSetArgumentDataType

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Set the command argument data
type and set the specified attributes

219

Version 1.4.14
Page 219 of 314

SpaceSystemType: Space
NameDescriptionType:
system reference
Command description of the
type corresponding to the
String: Command argument
primitive data type with the
name; null to not specify
specified attributes set
String: Command argument
data type; null to not
specify
String: Command argument
array size; null or blank if
the argument isn't an array
String: Command argument
bit length
String: Command argument
enumeration in the format
|[|...][,...]; null to not
specify
String: Command argument
units; null to not specify
String: Minimum parameter
value; null to not specify
String: Maximum parameter
value; null to not specify
String: Command argument
description ; null to not
specify
int: String size in bytes;
ignored if the command
argument does not have a
string data type
String: Text used to uniquely
identify data types with the

N

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Description

Version 1.4.14
Page 220 of 314

Input(s)
same name; blank if the
data type has no name
conflict

220

Output

*

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Method Name
xtceSetParameterDataType

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 221 of 314

Description

Input(s)

Create the telemetry parameter data
type and set the specified attributes

SpaceSystemType: Space
system reference
String: Parameter name; null
to not specify
String: Data type; null to not
specify
String: Parameter array size;
null or blank if the
parameter isn't an array
String: Parameter bit length;
null or empty if not a bitwise parameter
String: Enumeration in the
format |[|...][,...]; null to not
specify
String: Parameter units; null
to not specify
String: Minimum parameter
value; null to not specify
String: Maximum parameter
value; null to not specify
String: Parameter
description; null to not
specify
int: Size, in characters, of a
string parameter; ignored if
not a string or character

Table 10. Script data access methods
221

Output

*
N

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Appendix A. Acronyms
CCDD
CCSDS
cFE
CFS
CPU
CSV
DBU
EDS
GUI
HK
I/O
ID
ITOS
JAR
JDBC
JRE
JSON
JVM
L&F
OID
OS
PDF
PNG
SQL
SSL
URL
XML
XTCE

CFS Command & Data Dictionary
Consultative Committee for Space Data Systems
Core Flight Executive
Core Flight System
Central Processing Unit
comma-separated values
Database Backup
Electronic Data Sheet
Graphical User Interface
Housekeeping
Input/Output
Identifier
Integrated Test and Operations System
Java Archive
Java Database Connectivity
Java Runtime Environment
JavaScript Object Notation
Java Virtual Machine
Look and Feel
Object Identifier
Operating System
Portable Document Format
Portable Network Graphics
Structured Query Language
Secure Sockets Layer
Uniform Resource Locator
Extensible Markup Language
XML Telemetric and Command Exchange

222

Version 1.4.14
Page 222 of 314

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 223 of 314

Appendix B. Definitions
Array definition

In a structure table, the row where the variable name and array size are specified.

Array member

In a structure table, the rows following the array definition row (when arrays are
expanded) that display the individual variables that belong to the array. The
variable name begins with the array definition’s variable name and has the array
index, encased in square brackets, appended. The array member rows are
displayed in ascending index order, starting with a zero index. The array size
column for each member row displays the total number of members in the array.

Child table

A structure table that is referenced as a data type for a variable in another
structure table.

Data type

A primitive or structure data type; see Primitive type and Structure type.

Database

A collection of data within a PostgreSQL server organized as tables. A CCDD project
is a PostgreSQL database representing the data for a CFS project.

Encoded type

The byte order for primitive data types composed of two or more bytes. CCDD
recognizes four encodings:
little endian
bytes are store with the least significant byte first.
big endian
bytes are stores with the least significant byte last.
little endian, swap similar to little endian, except that each byte pair is reversed;
applies only to integer and unsigned integer data types
composed of one or more pairs of bytes.
big endian, swap similar to big endian, except that each byte pair is reversed;
applies only to integer and unsigned integer data types
composed of one or more pairs of bytes.

Instance table

A structure table that is a child of another structure table (the child’s parent table).

Macro

An alphanumeric string, bounded by special delimiter characters, that can be
inserted into a data table cell to represent text defined by the user.

Parent table

The structure table for which a table is an immediate descendant (child). The
parent and root tables are the same if this table is a child of a root table.

Path

Refers to a table path or variable path.

Primitive type

A primitive data type is a basic data type (e.g., integer, float), as opposed to a
structure, which is a group of primitive and/or structure data types. The primitive
data types recognized by the CCDD application can be altered using the Data Type
Manager (see paragraphs 4.5.4 and 4.9.3.11).

Project

Synonymous with the term database in this guide except when referring to the
PostgreSQL default database, postgres.

Prototype table

A table created via the Data | New table(s) command, based on one of the table
types. Instances of this table are created by using this table as the data type for a
variable in a structure table. If this table is not referenced as a child in another
table then it is also a root table.

223

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 224 of 314

Regular expression A special set of characters that defines a pattern for matching all or part of a text
string. The search dialogs optionally allow the use of regular expressions in order
to tailor a search more specifically (for example, the use of wild card characters).
Information regarding the construction and use of regular expressions can be
found on the web.
Root table

The top-level table in the hierarchical table tree; the highest level ancestor of a
child table. All non-structure tables and prototype tables not referenced as the
data type for a variable in a structure table are root tables.

Structure type

Data type that references a structure table prototype (the data type name is the
structure prototype name).

Table path

The path to a table beginning with its root table. For a non-structure table or other
top-level table the table path is the root table name. For a child structure table the
path lists the child’s root table and all intervening ancestor tables and variable
names in direct descent to the child table .

Table type

A table template created using the Table Type Manager (see paragraph
4.9.3.104.9.3.7). Any number of tables may be created of a given table type.

Variable path

The path to a variable beginning with its root table. For a non-structure table or
other top-level table the variable path is the root table name. For a variable in a
child structure table the path lists the child’s root table and all intervening variable
names in direct descent to the child table (identical to the table path, but without
the structure names other than the root’s).

224

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 225 of 314

Appendix C. Import and Export Format
Examples and descriptions of the CSV, EDS, JSON, and XTCE file formats used when importing and exporting tables are provided in the
subsequent sections. For each format the identical project data is used to create the export output. This project data is shown in Figure 91 and
Figure 92 (the data tables), Figure 93 and Figure 94 (the table type definitions), and Figure 95 (the data field, data type, and macro definitions).

Figure 91. Structure table for import/export format examples

225

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Figure 92. Command table for import/export examples

226

Version 1.4.14
Page 226 of 314

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Figure 93. Structure table type definition for import/export example

227

Version 1.4.14
Page 227 of 314

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 228 of 314

Figure 94. Command table type definition for import/export example

228

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 229 of 314

Figure 95. Data field, data type, and macro definitions for import/export example
229

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 230 of 314

Appendix C.1. CSV
The CSV import/export file is divided into five sections: table type definitions, data type definitions, macro definitions, reserved message IDs, and
table definitions. These sections can appear in any order. Not all sections need be present. The table definitions are further sub-divided into
table name & type, description, column data, and data field sections.
Each section is designated by a tag in the format _tag_name_. The subsequent row(s) are interpreted based on the last tag name until another
tag is detected. The various values in the rows following a tag are separated by commas, with each value enclosed in double quotes in order to
preserve quotes and commas in the values.
The name & type tag begins each table definition. The name & type and column data for at least one table must be present in the file.
Empty rows and rows beginning with a # character are ignored and can be used for section spacing and inserting comments. A ‘#’ character
beginning a quoted string is not interpreted as a comment (note that a spreadsheet application, if used to create the CSV file, may automatically
surround text intended as a comment in quotes). Extra commas and white space characters appended to a row are ignored. This allows a CSV
file generated from a spreadsheet application (which appends trailing commas to ensure that each row has the same number of columns) to be
used without further editing.
The tag names and formats for the sections are as follows:
Table type definition section:
_table_type_
“table type name”, “table type description”
“type name”, “type description”, “input type”, “unique”, “required”, “structure allowed”, “pointer allowed”
… repeat previous row for each table type and each type’s column definitions
_data_fields_
“field name”, “description”, “size in characters”, “input type”, “required”, “applicability”, “value”
… repeat previous row for each data field associated with the table type. If left blank, default values for “size in characters” (10), “input type” (Text),
and “applicability” (All tables) are used
See paragraph 4.9.3.10 for more information on the table type definition components.
Data type definition section:
_data_type_
“data type name”, “C type”, “size in bytes”, “base type”
230

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

… repeat previous row for each data type definition
See paragraph 4.9.3.11 for more information on the data type definition components.
Macro definition section:
_macros_
“macro name”, “macro value”
… repeat previous row for each macro definition
See paragraph 4.9.3.12 for more information on the macro definition components.
Reserved message ID section:
_ reserved_msg_ids_
“message ID (or ID range)”, “message ID description”
… repeat previous row for each reserved message ID (or ID range)
See paragraph 4.9.3.14.2 for more information on the reserved message ID components.
Table definition section:
_name_type_
“table path and name”, “table type”<, “system name”>
_description_
“table description”
_column_data_
“column 1 name”, “column 2 name”, ….
“row 1 column 1 value”, “row 1 column 2 value”, …
“row 2 column 1 value”, “row 2 column 2 value”, …
… repeat previous row for each row in the table

231

Version 1.4.14
Page 231 of 314

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 232 of 314

_data_fields_
“field name”, “description”, “size in characters”, “input type”, “required”, “applicability”, “value”
… repeat previous row for each data field associated with the table. If left blank, default values for “size in characters” (10) and “input type” (Text)
are used. The “applicability” input is unused by the table definition and may be blank
…repeat above, starting with _name_type_, for each table definition
The system name under _name_type_ is optional; when exporting this is the value of the data field with the System path input type (if present), but
when importing the value is unused.
PROJECT-LEVEL FIELDS…
The example tables, MyStructure and MyCommand, are shown below as exported in CSV format.
# Created Wed Apr 11 14:29:44 CDT 2018 : project = user_s_guide : host = localhost:5432 : user = rmcclune
_name_type_
"MyCommand","Command","GNC/Engine/CMD"
_column_data_
"Command Name","Command Code","Description","Arg 1 Name","Arg 1 Description","Arg 1 Units","Arg 1 Data
Type","Arg 1 Array Size","Arg 1 Bit Length","Arg 1 Enumeration","Arg 1 Minimum","Arg 1 Maximum"
"NoOp","0x0","No operation","","","","","","","","",""
"EngineArmEnableDisable","0x1","Arm main engine","ARM","","","uint8_t","","1","0|Enable, 1|Disable","",""
"EngineFireEnableDisable","0x2","Fire main engine","FIRE","","","uint8_t","","1","0|Enable,
1|Disable","",""
"EngineThrustLevel","0x3","Engine thrust level","THRUST_LEVEL","Set thrust
level","percent","float","","","","0.0","100.0"
_data_fields_
"System","","15","System Path","false","All tables","GNC/Engine/CMD"
"Application ID","","7","Message ID","false","All tables","0x1222"
_name_type_
"MyStructure","Structure","GNC/Engine/TLM"
_description_
"Example import/export table"
_column_data_
"Variable Name","Description","Units","Data Type","Array Size","Bit
Length","Enumeration","Rate","Minimum","Maximum"
"latitude","Location: north-south","","float","","","","2","",""
"longitude","Location: east-west","","float","","","","","",""

232

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 233 of 314

"width","","##SIZE##","uint16_t","","","","","",""
"depth","","##SIZE##","uint16_t","","","","","",""
"height","","##SIZE##","uint16_t","","","","","",""
"velocity","","","double","3","","","10","",""
"velocity[0]","X-direction","m/s","double","3","","","10","",""
"velocity[1]","Y-direction","m/s","double","3","","","10","",""
"velocity[2]","Z-direction","m/s","double","3","","","10","",""
"engine_arm","Engine armed status","","uint8_t","","1","0|Off, 1|Arm","1","",""
"engine_fire","Engine fire status","","uint8_t","","1","0|Off, 1|Fire","1","",""
"thrust_level","Engine thrust level","percent","uint16_t","","","","","0","100"
_data_fields_
"System","","15","System Path","false","All tables","GNC/Engine/TLM"
"Application ID","","7","Message ID","false","All tables","0xeea"
_table_type_
"Command","Command table definition"
"Command Name","Command name","Command name","true","true","false","true"
"Command Code","Command function code","Command code","true","true","false","true"
"Description","Command description","Description","false","false","false","true"
"Arg 1 Name","Command argument 1 name","Argument name","false","false","false","true"
"Arg 1 Description","Command argument 1 description","Description","false","false","false","true"
"Arg 1 Units","Command argument 1 units","Units","false","false","false","true"
"Arg 1 Data Type","Command argument 1 data type","Primitive","false","false","false","true"
"Arg 1 Array Size","Command argument 1 array size","Array index","false","false","false","true"
"Arg 1 Bit Length","Command argument 1 bit length","Bit length","false","false","false","true"
"Arg 1 Enumeration","Command argument 1 enumeration","Enumeration","false","false","false","true"
"Arg 1 Minimum","Command argument 1 minimum value","Minimum","false","false","false","true"
"Arg 1 Maximum","Command argument 1 maximum value","Maximum","false","false","false","true"
_table_type_data_fields_
"Command ID name","Command ID name","15","Message ID name","true","All tables",""
"Command message ID","Command message ID","7","Message ID","true","All tables",""
_table_type_
"Structure","Telemetry and data structure table definition"
"Variable Name","Parameter name","Variable name","true","true","true","true"
"Description","Parameter description","Description","false","false","true","true"
"Units","Parameter units","Units","false","false","true","true"
"Data Type","Parameter data type","Primitive & Structure","false","true","true","true"
"Array Size","Parameter array size","Array index","false","false","true","true"
"Bit Length","Parameter number of bits (bit values only)","Bit length","false","false","true","true"
"Enumeration","Enumerated parameters","Enumeration","false","false","true","true"

233

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 234 of 314

"Rate","Downlink data rate, samples/second","Rate","false","false","false","true"
"Minimum","Minimum value","Minimum","false","false","false","false"
"Maximum","Maximum value","Maximum","false","false","false","false"
_table_type_data_fields_
"Telemetry message ID name","Telemetry message ID name","15","Message ID name","true","Roots only",""
"Telemetry message ID","Telemetry message ID","7","Message ID","true","Roots only",""
_data_type_
"uint8_t","unsigned char","1","unsigned integer"
"uint16_t","unsigned short int","2","unsigned integer"
"float","float","4","floating point"
"double","double","8","floating point"
_macros_
"SIZE","meters"

Appendix C.2. EDS
The Namespace name field is contructed using the contents of the table’s data field having a System path input type (if present) followed by the
table’s full path, with all invalid characters (spaces, commas, periods, etc.) converted to underscores (this is a constraint imposed on the name
field by the EDS schema).
When exporting, the Namespace shortDesciption field is used to store the original table name with its full path. During importing this field is
checked and if it exists and adheres to the constraints for a table path and name then it is used as the table name. If the field doesn’t meet the
requirements then the Namespace name field is used instead. The name field isn’t used by default since it is not allowed to contain commas or
periods, which are required for a table’s full path.
Each Namespace defines a structure or command table. The Interface name field is set to “Telemetry” for structures, and “Command” for
commands; however, the presence of a ParameterSet or CommandSet in the Interface determines how the information is assigned when the
file is imported. Both a ParameterSet and a CommandSet can exist in the same Namespace, a condition that can exist if the EDS file is
constructed by other means than via the CCDD export operation. Since the Namespace fields are used to set the table name, both a
ParameterSet and a CommandSet within the Namespace would result in the creation of tables with duplicate names. This is avoided by
appending “_tlm” to structure table name and “_cmd” to the command table name for this case.
The original integer data type size for parameters with a bit length is not preserved when exporting in EDS format. The IntegerDataEncoding
sizeInBits field is used to set the bit length; however, there is no field for the overall size. When the file is imported the data type size for a bitwise parameter is set to the smallest integer into which the number of bits will fit. This can lead to a difference in the original data type sizes
which in turn can affect bit-packing.

234

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 235 of 314

The Device Metadata is used to store the telemetry header table name (if defined), the command header table name (if defined), the telemetry
and command header table application ID variable name, and the command header command function code variable name. These are defined
in project-level data fields (see Table 7). Default values are used for the application ID variable name (“applicationID”) and the command
function code variable name (“functionCode”) if these fields are not defined in the project database.
The structure table identified by the project-level data field as the command header is treated specially during conversion. When exported, the
structure is converted into a CommandSet and stored in the same manner a command table. The Interface abstract field is set to ‘true’; this is
used to indicate that the commands in this Namespace are common to the other command tables. When the file is imported the command
header information is converted back into a structure.
When exporting, each root table (structure and command) is checked for the existence of data fields with the Message ID and System path
input types. The contents of the field containing a system path is prepended to the table’s path and the result is used to contruct the
Namespace name field (after converting invalid characters to underscores as previously mentioned). When importing the file the data field for
the system path is reconstructed from the Namespace name (the system path is separated from the table name portion using a ‘/’ character; the
system path may contain ‘/’ characters as well). If the data field with a Message ID input type exists then its contents is used to set the
application ID variable in the table’s telemetry or command header in the export file (by setting the ValueConstraint value field in a
ContainerDataType within the table’s DataTypeSet). When imported, the data field is reconstructed to contain the ID value.
When exporting, the values in the command table’s column with the input type Command code are stored in the export file by setting the
ValueConstraint value field (in a ContainerDataType within the table’s DataTypeSet) to the function code value. When the command table is
imported, these values are placed in the table’s command code column.
The table defined using the project-level data field as the command header is stored once in the export file and each command table
Namespace references this single header definition. Since the telemetry header table is referenced in the root structure tables as a header
variable’s data type, each root structure table will have an individual instance of the header contructed in the export file. When importing, a
single telemetry header structure table is recreated. The root structure telemetry header variable use this table as the data type reference.
The example tables, MyStructure and MyCommand, are shown below as exported in EDS format.



Project used for the import and export example in Appendix C of the user's guide
Author: rmcclune
Generated by CCDD 1.2.11 (4-11-2018)
Date: Wed Apr 11 14:31:48 CDT 2018
Project: User's Guide
Host: localhost:5432

235

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 236 of 314

Endianess: big









































236

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 237 of 314










single




















No operation


Arm main engine



Fire main engine




237

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 238 of 314

Engine thrust level

Set thrust level








Example import/export table



















Location: north-south


single



Location: east-west



238

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 239 of 314

single






















double



Engine armed status







Engine fire status






239

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 240 of 314



Engine thrust level









Location: north-south


Location: east-west






Engine armed status


Engine fire status


Engine thrust level







Appendix C.3. JSON
A JSON object consists of a name/value pair where the value can be a single value or an array containing more name/value pairs. The CCDD
JSON export file uses a unique object name for specific portions of the exported data. These object names are described below (these names
are a subset of those used in the web server JSON output).
240

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 241 of 314

File Description

Information on the export file including the creation time and date, project name, database host, and user
name.

Data Type Definition

An array containing an entry for each data type definition. Each definition has the following entries: Base
Type, C Name, Type Name, and Size.

Table Type Definition

Array containing the table type definitions. Each array entry defines a table type and contains a Table
Type Column array, Table Type Name, Table Type Description, and Table Type Data Field array.

Table Type Name

Table type definition name.

Table Type Description

Table type definition description.

Table Type Column

Array containing the table type column definitions. Each definition contains the Column Name,
Description, Input Type, Required, Unique, Enable if Structure, and Enable if Pointer.

Table Type Data Field

Array of the table type’s data field definitions. Each definition has the following entries: Value, Required,
Description, Applicability, Field Name, Input Type, and Size.

Macro Definition

Array containing the macro definitions. Each definition contains the Macro Name and Macro Value.

Reserved Message ID Definition

Array containing the reserved message ID definitions. Each definition has entries for the Message ID(s)
and Description.

Variable Path

Array containing the variable paths. Each entry contains the full variable path in the application’s native
format, and the path formatted per the export dialog options.

Table Definition

Table definition array. Each array entry in the table definition contains the Table Data, Table Name, Table
Description, Table Type, System Name, and Data Field(s) for a single table.

Table Name

Table name, including its full path.

Table Type

Table type name.

Table Description

Table description.

Table Data

Array containing the table data. Each array entry consists of a column name and its corresponding value.

System Name

The value of the table’s data field with the input type of System path, if present.

Data Field

Array of the table’s data field definitions. Each definition has the following entries: Value, Required flag,
Description, Applicability type, Field Name, Input Type, and Size.

Project Data Field
241

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

The example tables, MyStructure and MyCommand, are shown below as exported in JSON format.
{
"Table Definition": [
{
"Table Data": [
{
"Command Name": "NoOp",
"Description": "No operation",
"Command Code": "0x0"
},
{
"Command Name": "EngineArmEnableDisable",
"Description": "Arm main engine",
"Arg 1 Data Type": "uint8_t",
"Command Code": "0x1",
"Arg 1 Enumeration": "0|Enable, 1|Disable",
"Arg 1 Bit Length": "1",
"Arg 1 Name": "ARM"
},
{
"Command Name": "EngineFireEnableDisable",
"Description": "Fire main engine",
"Arg 1 Data Type": "uint8_t",
"Command Code": "0x2",
"Arg 1 Enumeration": "0|Enable, 1|Disable",
"Arg 1 Bit Length": "1",
"Arg 1 Name": "FIRE"
},
{
"Arg 1 Units": "percent",
"Command Name": "EngineThrustLevel",
"Description": "Engine thrust level",
"Arg 1 Data Type": "float",
"Arg 1 Description": "Set thrust level",
"Arg 1 Maximum": "100.0",
"Arg 1 Minimum": "0.0",
"Command Code": "0x3",
"Arg 1 Name": "THRUST_LEVEL"
}
],

242

Version 1.4.14
Page 242 of 314

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

"Table Name": "MyCommand",
"System Name": "GNC/Engine/CMD",
"Data Field": [
{
"Value": "GNC/Engine/CMD",
"Required": false,
"Description": "",
"Applicability": "All tables",
"Field Name": "System",
"Input Type": "System Path",
"Size": 15
},
{
"Value": "0x1222",
"Required": false,
"Description": "",
"Applicability": "All tables",
"Field Name": "Application ID",
"Input Type": "Message ID",
"Size": 7
}
],
"Table Description": "",
"Table Type": "Command"
},
{
"Table Data": [
{
"Description": "Location: north-south",
"Data Type": "float",
"Rate": "2",
"Variable Name": "latitude"
},
{
"Description": "Location: east-west",
"Data Type": "float",
"Variable Name": "longitude"
},
{
"Units": "meters",
"Data Type": "uint16_t",

243

Version 1.4.14
Page 243 of 314

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

"Variable Name": "width"
},
{
"Units": "meters",
"Data Type": "uint16_t",
"Variable Name": "depth"
},
{
"Units": "meters",
"Data Type": "uint16_t",
"Variable Name": "height"
},
{
"Array Size": "3",
"Data Type": "double",
"Rate": "10",
"Variable Name": "velocity"
},
{
"Array Size": "3",
"Description": "X-direction",
"Units": "m/s",
"Data Type": "double",
"Rate": "10",
"Variable Name": "velocity[0]"
},
{
"Array Size": "3",
"Description": "Y-direction",
"Units": "m/s",
"Data Type": "double",
"Rate": "10",
"Variable Name": "velocity[1]"
},
{
"Array Size": "3",
"Description": "Z-direction",
"Units": "m/s",
"Data Type": "double",
"Rate": "10",
"Variable Name": "velocity[2]"

244

Version 1.4.14
Page 244 of 314

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

},
{
"Description": "Engine armed status",
"Enumeration": "0|Off, 1|Arm",
"Data Type": "uint8_t",
"Bit Length": "1",
"Rate": "1",
"Variable Name": "engine_arm"
},
{
"Description": "Engine fire status",
"Enumeration": "0|Off, 1|Fire",
"Data Type": "uint8_t",
"Bit Length": "1",
"Rate": "1",
"Variable Name": "engine_fire"
},
{
"Description": "Engine thrust level",
"Units": "percent",
"Maximum": "100",
"Minimum": "0",
"Data Type": "uint16_t",
"Variable Name": "thrust_level"
}
],
"Table Name": "MyStructure",
"System Name": "GNC/Engine/TLM",
"Data Field": [
{
"Value": "GNC/Engine/TLM",
"Required": false,
"Description": "",
"Applicability": "All tables",
"Field Name": "System",
"Input Type": "System Path",
"Size": 15
},
{
"Value": "0xeea",
"Required": false,

245

Version 1.4.14
Page 245 of 314

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 246 of 314

"Description": "",
"Applicability": "All tables",
"Field Name": "Application ID",
"Input Type": "Message ID",
"Size": 7
}
],
"Table Description": "Example import/export table",
"Table Type": "Structure"
}
],
"Data Type Definition": [
{
"Base Type": "unsigned integer",
"C Name": "unsigned char",
"Type Name": "uint8_t",
"Size": "1"
},
{
"Base Type": "floating point",
"C Name": "float",
"Type Name": "float",
"Size": "4"
},
{
"Base Type": "unsigned integer",
"C Name": "unsigned short int",
"Type Name": "uint16_t",
"Size": "2"
},
{
"Base Type": "floating point",
"C Name": "double",
"Type Name": "double",
"Size": "8"
}
],
"File Description": "Created Wed Apr 11 14:32:46 CDT 2018 : project = user_s_guide : host =
localhost:5432 : user = rmcclune",
"Table Type Definition": [
{

246

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

"Table Type Column": [
{
"Required": true,
"Description": "Command name",
"Unique": true,
"Column Name": "Command Name",
"Enable if Structure": false,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Command name"
},
{
"Required": true,
"Description": "Command function code",
"Unique": true,
"Column Name": "Command Code",
"Enable if Structure": false,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Command code"
},
{
"Required": false,
"Description": "Command description",
"Unique": false,
"Column Name": "Description",
"Enable if Structure": false,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Description"
},
{
"Required": false,
"Description": "Command argument 1 name",
"Unique": false,
"Column Name": "Arg 1 Name",
"Enable if Structure": false,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Argument name"
},
{
"Required": false,
"Description": "Command argument 1 description",
"Unique": false,

247

Version 1.4.14
Page 247 of 314

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

"Column Name": "Arg 1 Description",
"Enable if Structure": false,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Description"
},
{
"Required": false,
"Description": "Command argument 1 units",
"Unique": false,
"Column Name": "Arg 1 Units",
"Enable if Structure": false,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Units"
},
{
"Required": false,
"Description": "Command argument 1 data type",
"Unique": false,
"Column Name": "Arg 1 Data Type",
"Enable if Structure": false,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Primitive"
},
{
"Required": false,
"Description": "Command argument 1 array size",
"Unique": false,
"Column Name": "Arg 1 Array Size",
"Enable if Structure": false,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Array index"
},
{
"Required": false,
"Description": "Command argument 1 bit length",
"Unique": false,
"Column Name": "Arg 1 Bit Length",
"Enable if Structure": false,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Bit length"
},

248

Version 1.4.14
Page 248 of 314

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

{
"Required": false,
"Description": "Command argument 1 enumeration",
"Unique": false,
"Column Name": "Arg 1 Enumeration",
"Enable if Structure": false,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Enumeration"
},
{
"Required": false,
"Description": "Command argument 1 minimum value",
"Unique": false,
"Column Name": "Arg 1 Minimum",
"Enable if Structure": false,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Minimum"
},
{
"Required": false,
"Description": "Command argument 1 maximum value",
"Unique": false,
"Column Name": "Arg 1 Maximum",
"Enable if Structure": false,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Maximum"
}
],
"Table Type Name": "Command",
"Table Type Data Field": [
{
"Value": "",
"Required": true,
"Description": "Command ID name",
"Applicability": "All tables",
"Field Name": "Command ID name",
"Input Type": "Message ID name",
"Size": 15
},
{
"Value": "",

249

Version 1.4.14
Page 249 of 314

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

"Required": true,
"Description": "Command message ID",
"Applicability": "All tables",
"Field Name": "Command message ID",
"Input Type": "Message ID",
"Size": 7
}
],
"Table Type Description": "Command table definition"
},
{
"Table Type Column": [
{
"Required": true,
"Description": "Parameter name",
"Unique": true,
"Column Name": "Variable Name",
"Enable if Structure": true,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Variable name"
},
{
"Required": false,
"Description": "Parameter description",
"Unique": false,
"Column Name": "Description",
"Enable if Structure": true,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Description"
},
{
"Required": false,
"Description": "Parameter units",
"Unique": false,
"Column Name": "Units",
"Enable if Structure": true,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Units"
},
{
"Required": true,

250

Version 1.4.14
Page 250 of 314

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

"Description": "Parameter data type",
"Unique": false,
"Column Name": "Data Type",
"Enable if Structure": true,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Primitive & Structure"
},
{
"Required": false,
"Description": "Parameter array size",
"Unique": false,
"Column Name": "Array Size",
"Enable if Structure": true,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Array index"
},
{
"Required": false,
"Description": "Parameter number of bits (bit values only)",
"Unique": false,
"Column Name": "Bit Length",
"Enable if Structure": true,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Bit length"
},
{
"Required": false,
"Description": "Enumerated parameters",
"Unique": false,
"Column Name": "Enumeration",
"Enable if Structure": true,
"Enable if Pointer": true,
"Input Type": "Enumeration"
},
{
"Required": false,
"Description": "Downlink data rate, samples/second",
"Unique": false,
"Column Name": "Rate",
"Enable if Structure": false,
"Enable if Pointer": true,

251

Version 1.4.14
Page 251 of 314

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

"Input Type": "Rate"
},
{
"Required": false,
"Description": "Minimum value",
"Unique": false,
"Column Name": "Minimum",
"Enable if Structure": false,
"Enable if Pointer": false,
"Input Type": "Minimum"
},
{
"Required": false,
"Description": "Maximum value",
"Unique": false,
"Column Name": "Maximum",
"Enable if Structure": false,
"Enable if Pointer": false,
"Input Type": "Maximum"
}
],
"Table Type Name": "Structure",
"Table Type Data Field": [
{
"Value": "",
"Required": true,
"Description": "Telemetry message ID name",
"Applicability": "Roots only",
"Field Name": "Telemetry message ID name",
"Input Type": "Message ID name",
"Size": 15
},
{
"Value": "",
"Required": true,
"Description": "Telemetry message ID",
"Applicability": "Roots only",
"Field Name": "Telemetry message ID",
"Input Type": "Message ID",
"Size": 7
}

252

Version 1.4.14
Page 252 of 314

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 253 of 314

],
"Table Type Description": "Telemetry and data structure table definition"
}
]
}

Appendix C.4. XTCE
The SpaceSystem hierarchy is based on the contents of the table’s data field having a System path input type (if present) and the table’s full
path. The system path is assumed to use the ‘/’ character to define each level of the path. The table name becomes the final level in the
hierarchy. For example, the table ‘MyStructure’ has the system path ‘GNC/Power/TLM’ and the table ‘MyCommand’ has the system path
‘GNC/Power/CMD’. The SpaceSystem hierarchy in the export file would be:













Each SpaceSystem with TelemetryMetaData or CommandMetaData defines a structure or command table, respectively. Both a
TelemetryMetaData and a CommandMetaData can exist in the same SpaceSystem, a condition that can exist if the XTCE file is constructed by
other means than via the CCDD export operation. Since the SpaceSystem name field is used to set the table name, both a TelemetryMetaData
and a CommandMetaData within the same SpaceSystem would result in the creation of tables with duplicate names. This is avoided by
appending “_tlm” to structure table name and “_cmd” to the command table name for this case.
The original integer data type size for parameters with a bit length is not preserved when exporting in XTCE format. The IntegerDataEncoding
sizeInBits field is used to set the bit length; however, there is no field for the overall size. The IntegerDataType also has a sizeInBits field which
could be used to store the size of the integer; however, the EnumeratedDataType lacks this field. Rather than have one case covered (integers)
and the other not (enumerations), and since the convention would be arbitrary (i.e., which sizeInBits field contains the integer size and which is
the bit length), both are treated the same: when the file is imported the data type size for a bit-wise parameter is set to the smallest integer into
which the number of bits will fit. This can lead to a difference in the original data type sizes which in turn can affect bit-packing.

253

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 254 of 314

The root space system AncillaryData is used to store the telemetry header table name (if defined), the command heard table name (if defined),
the telemetry and command header table application ID variable name, and the command header command function code variable name.
These are defined in project-level data fields (see Table 7). Default values are used for the application ID variable name (“applicationID”) and the
command function code variable name (“functionCode”) if these fields are not defined in the project database.
The structure table identified by the project-level data field as the command header is treated specially during conversion. When exported, the
structure is converted into CommandMetaData and stored in the same manner a command table. The MetaCommand abstract field is set to
‘true’; this is used to indicate that the commands in this SpaceSystem are common to the other command tables. When the file is imported the
command header information is converted back into a structure.
When exporting, each root table (structure and command) is checked for the existence of data fields with the Message ID and System path
input types. The contents of the field containing a system path is used to establish the SpaceSystem hierarchy as described previously. When
importing the file the data field for the system path is reconstructed from the SpaceSystem name fields preceding it in the table’s hierarchy
(each SpaceSystem name is separated by a ‘/’ character). If the data field with a Message ID input type exists then its contents is used to set the
application ID variable in the table’s telemetry or command header in the export file (by setting the Comparison value field as a
RestrictionCriteria within a SequenceContainer in a ContainerSet within the table’s TelemetryMetaData for structure tables, and by setting the
ArgumentAssignment argumentValue field within the BaseMetaCommand in the CommandMetaData for command tables). When imported,
the data field is reconstructed to contain the ID value.
When exporting, the values in the command table’s column with the input type Command code are stored in the export file by setting the
ArgumentAssignment argumentValue field within the BaseMetaCommand in the CommandMetaData) to the function code value. When the
command table is imported, these values are placed in the table’s command code column.
The table defined using the project-level data field as the command header is stored once in the export file and each command table
SpaceSystem references this single header definition. Since the telemetry header table is referenced in the root structure tables as a header
variable’s data type, each root structure table will have an individual instance of the header contructed in the export file. When importing, a
single telemetry header structure table is recreated. The root structure telemetry header variable use this table as the data type reference.
The example tables, MyStructure and MyCommand, are shown below as exported in XTCE format.


Project used for the import and export example in Appendix C of the user's
guide

CCSDS_TLM_HDR
CCSDS_CMD_HDR

254

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 255 of 314

applicationID
functionCode



rmcclune


Generated by CCDD 1.2.11 (4-11-2018)
Date: Wed Apr 11 14:32:59 CDT 2018
Project: User's Guide
Host: localhost:5432
Endianess: big


























255

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 256 of 314



Set thrust level








No operation


Arm main engine
















Fire main engine




256

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 257 of 314














Engine thrust level






















Example import/export table

257

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 258 of 314





Location: north-south



Location: east-west




meters





meters





meters








Engine armed status


258

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 259 of 314







Engine fire status







Engine thrust level

percent























259

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 260 of 314







0


3

















260

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 261 of 314

Appendix D. Error & Warning Messages
The table below lists all of the error and warning messages, in alphabetical order, that can occur in the
CCDD application and the causes. An error message implies that the intended operation cannot be
successfully completed. An attempt is automatically made to revert any changes made to the project
database in the event an error occurs during a database update. If this reversion is unsuccessful then
the database is likely corrupted. A command line error message results in immediate program
termination, but for other errors the application continues to run. A warning message indicates that
although the operation was unsuccessful the user can effect a change to correct the problem.
Type
Warning

Message
# array member row(s) ignored due
to missing array definition(s)

Warning

All application parameters must be
entered

Warning

An association with this script and
table(s) already exists in the script
associations table
An unanticipated error occurred;
cause ‘error cause’. Error trace: class
name: method name() line line
number, 

Error

Warning

Application parameter values must
be positive integer values

Warning

Association name already in use

Warning

At least one data stream must be
selected

Warning

Auto-fill detected mismatched rates
for variable(s) associated with
variable path+name

261

Cause
The number of rows indicated, #, were ignored
when pasting data into a table. The cause is that
one or more rows in the pasted data represent an
array member, but an array definition does not
precede the member(s). Include the array
definition row when pasting array member
information
An input text field is empty in the application
parameter dialog. Enter a valid value in each of
the fields
A script association using the same script file and
data table(s) is already present in the script
association table in the script manager
An exception occurred that is not otherwise
covered by the error handling routines. The cause
is specified by error cause, followed by a method
trace showing the line where the error occurred
and the calls sequence leading to it
The value in one or more application parameter
dialog input text fields contains a zero, negative, or
non-integer value. Enter an integer value greater
than or equal to 1 in each of the fields
The association name entered in the script
association manager is already in use by another
association. Association names must be unique.
Alter the association name to one not in use
No target data stream is selected in the link copy
dialog when the Okay button is pressed. Choose
at least one data stream or press the Cancel
button
The telemetry scheduler auto-fill operation
determined that one or more variables that are
associated (via bit-packing or string membership)
with the variable variable path+name do not have
the same rate. Open the table containing the
specified variable and adjust the rate for the
associated variable(s)

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Type
Warning
Warning
Warning

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Message
Auto-fill unable to assign number
applications
Auto-fill unable to assign number
variables
Base data type inconsistent with data
type usage in table(s) ‘table name(s)’

Warning

Bit length exceeds the size of the
data type in table(s) ‘table name(s)’

Warning

Cannot assign application to a time
slot

Warning

Cannot assign variable to a message

Warning

Cannot close backup file ‘backup file
name’

Warning

Cannot close export file ‘path+file
name’
Cannot close import file ‘path+file
name’
Cannot close project database
‘database name’

Warning
Error

Warning
Error

Version 1.4.14
Page 262 of 314

Cause
The application scheduler was unable to assign
number applications to a time slot
The telemetry scheduler was unable to assign
number variables to an output message
The base data type entered in the data type
editor’s Base Type column was changed from an
integer (signed or unsigned) to a non-integer, and
the indicated table(s), table name(s), has a nonempty bit length or enumeration column. The
associated data type for a bit length parameter or
an enumerated parameter must be an integer.
Clear the bit length and enumeration columns for
the table(s) referencing this data type and then
change the base type
The size entered in the data type editor’s Base
Type column for an integer base type (signed or
unsigned) was reduced and the data type is used
with parameters having a bit length specified that
exceeds the capacity of the new size. Reduce or
clear the bit length for the table(s) referencing this
data type and then change the size
The application scheduler was unable to assign an
application to a time slot when the user attempted
manual assignment
The telemetry scheduler was unable to assign a
variable to an output message when the user
attempted manual assignment
An error occurred preventing closing the backup
file or temporary backup file backup file name
when restoring a backup file
The export file failed to close after being written
The import file failed to close after being read
An error occurred preventing closing project
database database name. Detail on the cause is
logged in the event log
The script file failed to close after being read

Cannot close script file ‘path+file
name’
Cannot close server connection

An error occurred preventing closing the
PostgreSQL server connection (which is
accomplished by closing the connection to the
default database, postgres). Detail on the cause is
logged in the event log

262

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Error

Message
Cannot connect to project database
‘database name’

Error

Cannot connect to server

Error

Cannot copy project ‘project name’

Error

Cannot copy table ‘table name’

Error

Cannot copy table type ‘table type’

Warning

Cannot create event log file

Error

Cannot create export file ‘path+file
name’

Error

Cannot create output file ‘path+file
name’

Error

Cannot create project ‘project name’

Error

Cannot create script file ‘path+file
name’

Error

Cannot create structure functions in
project database ‘database name’

Error

Cannot create tables ‘table names’

263

Version 1.4.14
Page 263 of 314

Cause
An attempt to connect to the project database
database name failed. Detail on the cause is
logged in the event log. This can occur due to lack
of access permission by the user to the database, if
the selected project is already open by another
instance of the CCDD application, or if the locked
status flag remained set due to abnormal
application termination
An attempt to connect to the PostgreSQL server,
(accomplished by connecting to the default
database, postgres) failed. Detail on the cause is
logged in the event log. This may occur if the
postgreSQL server is not running
An error occurred preventing copying of the
project project name. Detail on the cause is logged
in the event log
The attempt to copy table table name in the
project database failed. Detail on the cause is
logged in the event log
The attempt to copy table type table type in the
project database failed. Detail on the cause is
logged in the event log
The event log file cannot be created. Check that
file permissions allow read/write operations to the
directory in which the CCDD application was
executed
The export .csv file file name cannot be created in
the directory path. Check that the file permissions
allow the user to write to this directory
The output file file name cannot be created in the
directory path. Check that the file permissions
allow the user to write to this directory
An error occurred preventing creation of the
project project name. Detail on the cause is logged
in the event log
The script file file name cannot be created in the
directory path. Check that the file permissions
allow the user to write to this directory
The SQL and pgplsql functions related to structure
tables cannot be created in the project database
database name. Detail on the cause is logged in
the event log. This can occur due to lack of access
permission by the user to the database
The attempt to create tables table names in the
project database failed. Detail on the cause is
logged in the event log

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Error

Message
Cannot create tables and functions in
project database ‘database name’

Error

Cannot create web server

Warning

Cannot delete data type ‘data type’;
data type is referenced by table(s)
‘table name(s)’

Warning

Cannot delete input type ‘input
type’; input type is referenced by
table(s) ‘table name(s)’

Warning

Cannot delete macro ‘macro name’;
macro is referenced by table(s) ‘table
name(s)’

Error

Cannot delete project ‘project name’

Error

Cannot delete table type ‘table type’


Error

Cannot delete table(s) ‘table name(s)’

Error

Cannot disable auto-commit

Error

Cannot execute script ‘script name’
using table(s) ‘table name(s)’

264

Version 1.4.14
Page 264 of 314

Cause
The SQL and pgplsql functions and/or the default
tables cannot be created in the project database
database name. Detail on the cause is logged in
the event log. This can occur due to lack of access
permission by the user to the database
The attempt to instantiate the embedded Jetty
web server failed. Detail on the cause is logged in
the event log
An attempt was made to delete the data type data
type, but the data type is in use in the data table(s)
table name(s). A data type can’t be removed until
all references to it are first eliminated. Remove
the data type reference(s) and then delete the
data type
An attempt was made to delete the input type
input type, but the input type is in use in the data
table(s) table name(s). An input type can’t be
removed until all references to it are first
eliminated. Remove the input type reference(s)
and then delete the input type
An attempt was made to delete the macro macro
name, but the macro is in use in the data table(s)
table name(s). A macro can’t be removed until all
references to it are first eliminated. Remove the
macro reference(s) and then delete the macro
An error occurred preventing deletion of the
project project name. Detail on the cause is logged
in the event log
The attempt to delete table type table type and its
associated table(s) table name(s), if any, from the
project database failed. Detail on the cause is
logged in the event log
The attempt to delete table(s) table name(s) in the
project database failed. Detail on the cause is
logged in the event log
The attempt to disable the auto-commit mode for
database changes failed. If this occurs subsequent
database transactions are likely to fail. Restart the
application; the affected project database may
require manual unlocking. Detail on the cause is
logged in the event log
An error occurred during execution preparation of
the script script name. Detail on the cause is
logged in the event log

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Error

Message
Cannot export to file ‘file name’:
Error in script function ‘function
name’; cause ‘error cause’

Error

Cannot export to file ‘file name’: IO
exception

Error

Cannot export to file ‘file name’: JAXB
or Marshal exception

Error

Cannot export to file ‘file name’:
Script exception

Error

Cannot import EDS XML from file ‘file
name’; cause ‘error cause’
Cannot import from file ‘file name’
into table: Cannot locate file
Cannot import from file ‘file name’
into table: EDS conversion setup
failed; cause ‘error cause’
Cannot import from file ‘file name’
into table: File format invalid

Error
Error

Error

Error

Cannot import from file ‘file name’
into table: Imported data type ‘data
type name’ doesn’t match the
existing definition

Error

Cannot import from file ‘file name’
into table: Imported input type ‘input
type name’ doesn’t match the
existing definition

Error

Cannot import from file ‘file name’
into table: Imported macro ‘macro
name’ doesn’t match the existing
definition

265

Version 1.4.14
Page 265 of 314

Cause
Exporting the Table(s) to file file name in XTCE XML
format failed due to an error in the external script
file function function name, used to override the
internal method of the same name. Information
on the cause is displayed
Exporting the Table(s) to file file name failed due
to the I/O exception IO exception (the file exists
but is a directory rather than a regular file, does
not exist but cannot be created, or cannot be
opened for any other reason)
Exporting the Table(s) to file file name in EDS or
XTCE XML format failed due to the JAXB or
Marshal exception JAXB or Marshal exception.
Exporting the Table(s) to file file name in JSON
format failed due to the script exception script
exception (a JavaScript engine executes a script
command that parses the output in JSON format
for the export file)
Importing the table(s) from file file name in EDS
XML format failed due to the specified cause
Importing the data from file file name failed due to
the file not existing. Check the file path and name
Importing the data from file file name failed during
creation of the EDS XML marshaller/unmarshaller
due to the specified cause
The selected import CSV-formatted file file name is
not in the expected format. Correct the import file
format or select another file to import
Importing the data from file file name failed due to
the data type ‘data type name’ already existing in
the project, but with a different definition than
that in the import file. Delete the data type in the
project or import file, or adjust the types to match
Importing the data from file file name failed due to
the input type ‘input type name’ already existing in
the project, but with a different definition than
that in the import file. Delete the input type in the
project or import file, or adjust the types to match
Importing the data from file file name failed due to
the macro ‘macro name’ already existing in the
project, but with a different definition than that in
the import file. Delete the macro in the project or
import file, or adjust the macros to match

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Error

Message
Cannot import from file ‘file name’
into table: Imported project data
field ‘field name’ doesn’t match the
existing definition

Error

Cannot import from file ‘file name’
into table: Imported table type ‘table
type name’ doesn’t match the
existing definition

Error

Cannot import from file ‘file name’
into table: Invalid table path ‘table
path’ format
Cannot import from file ‘file name’
into table: No columns match those
in the target table

Error

Error

Error

Error

Error

Cannot import from file ‘file name’
into table: Table type ‘table type’
definition column name missing
Cannot import from file ‘file name’
into table: Tag information missing
Cannot import from file ‘file name’
into table: Too many/few table name
and type inputs
Cannot import from file ‘file name’
into table: Unknown table type ‘table
type’

Error

Cannot import from file ‘file name’
into table: Unrecognized file type

Error

Cannot import from file ‘file name’
into table: XTCE conversion setup
failed; cause ‘error cause’
Cannot import XTCE XML from file
‘file name’; cause ‘error cause’
Cannot load data from the custom
values table

Error
Error

266

Version 1.4.14
Page 266 of 314

Cause
Importing the data from file file name failed due to
the project data field ‘field name’ already existing
in the project, but with a different definition than
that in the import file. Delete the data field in the
project or import file, or adjust the fields to match
Importing the data from file file name failed due to
the table type ‘table type name’ already existing in
the project, but with a different definition than
that in the import file. Delete the table type in the
project or import file, or adjust the types to match
Importing the data from file file name failed due to
the structure or command table path/name table
path being in the incorrect format
The CSV-formatted import file file name has no
columns defined that match those in the table to
which the file is being imported; no data is added
to the table from the file. Check the import file’s
column names
Importing the data from file file name failed due to
the table type definition table type is missing the
column name. Add the missing column name
The CSV-formatted import file path+file name has
no tag (e.g., _description_ or _column_names_)
prior to the table information
The number of inputs following the _name_type_
tag in the the CSV-formatted import file file name
is incorrect (should be two)
Importing the data from file file name failed due to
the table type table type not existing in the project
or being defined in the import file. Add the
missing table type definition to the project or
import file
Importing the data from file file name failed due to
the file type not being recognized. The file
extension must end in .csv, .xtce, or .eds
Importing the data from file file name failed during
creation of the XTCE XML marshaller/unmarshaller
due to the specified cause
Importing the project from file file name in XTCE
XML format failed due to the specified cause
The attempt to load the table path(s), column
name(s), and column value(s) in the custom values
table matching the specified column name and
column value failed. Detail on the cause is logged
in the event log

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Error

Message
Cannot load internal table ‘table
name’

Error

Cannot load table ‘table name’

Error

Cannot load table members

Error

Cannot locate backup file ‘path+file
name’
Cannot locate event log file ‘path+file
name’
Cannot modify data in table ‘table
name’

Error
Error

Error

Cannot modify project data field(s)

Error

Cannot obtain column order for table
‘table name’

Error

Cannot obtain command information

Error

Cannot obtain comment for internal
table ‘table name’

Error

Cannot obtain comment for project
database ‘database name’

Error

Cannot obtain comment for table
‘table name’

Error

Cannot obtain database version
number

Error

Cannot obtain description for table
‘table name’

Error

Cannot obtain JDBC version number

267

Version 1.4.14
Page 267 of 314

Cause
The attempt to load the data from internal table
table name in the project database failed. Detail
on the cause is logged in the event log
The attempt to load the data from table table
name in the project database failed. Detail on the
cause is logged in the event log
The attempt to load the table and child table
relations failed. Detail on the cause is logged in
the event log
The project database restore file file name cannot
be found in the specified directory path
The event log file file name cannot be found in the
directory path
The attempt to update the contents of table table
name in the project database failed. Detail on the
cause is logged in the event log
The attempt to update the project description or
project-level data field(s). Detail on the cause is
logged in the event log
The attempt to query the project database for the
column order for table table name. Detail on the
cause is logged in the event log
The attempt to query the project database for the
command information failed. This information is
used to populate the Command Information dialog
and command references input type selection item
list. Detail on the cause is logged in the event log
The attempt to query the project database for the
comment on internal table table name failed.
Detail on the cause is logged in the event log
The comment for the project database database
name cannot be retrieved. Detail on the cause is
logged in the event log
The attempt to query the project database for the
comment on table table name failed. Detail on the
cause is logged in the event log
The database’s version number cannot be
obtained. Detail on the cause is logged in the
event log
The attempt to query the project database
__values table for the description of the table
table name failed. Detail on the cause is logged in
the event log
The JDBC version number cannot be obtained.
Detail on the cause is logged in the event log

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Error

Message
Cannot open output file ‘path+file
name’

Warning

Cannot parse import file ‘path+file
name’
Cannot read backup file ‘path+file
name’; cause ‘error cause’

Error

Warning

Cause
The output file file name cannot be opened in the
directory path. Check that the file permissions
allow the user to read from this file and directory
The JSON import file path+file name contains text
that is not in the expected JSON format
The backup file file name, chosen to restore a
project database, cannot be read for the reason
error cause. Check that the file permissions allow
the user so read from this file and directory
The event log file cannot be read. Check that user
has file read permissions for the file and directory
The import .csv file file name cannot be read in the
directory path. Check that the file permissions
allow the user so read this file and directory
The script file file name cannot be read in the
directory path. Check that the file permissions
allow the user so read this file and directory
An error occurred registering the JDBC database
driver driver name. This can be caused by setting
an invalid server type
A save point was created prior to executing one or
more database commands. Following command
execution, releasing the save point failed. Detail
on the cause is logged in the event log
An error occurred preventing renaming of the
project project name. Detail on the cause is logged
in the event log
The attempt to rename table table name in the
project database failed. Detail on the cause is
logged in the event log
The attempt to rename the table type for table
table name in the project database failed. Detail
on the cause is logged in the event log
The project database backup file file name already
exists in the directory path, but cannot be
removed so as to be replaced by a new backup file
of the same name. Check that the file permissions
allow the user to write to this file and directory
The export .csv file file name already exists in the
directory path, but cannot be removed so as to be
replaced by a new file of the same name. Check
that the file permissions allow the user to write to
this file and directory

Cannot read event log file

Error

Cannot read import file ‘path+file
name’

Error

Cannot read script file ‘path+file
name’

Error

Cannot register database driver
‘driver name’

Error

Cannot release save point

Error

Cannot rename project ‘project
name’

Error

Cannot rename table ‘table name’

Error

Cannot rename table type for table
‘table name’

Error

Cannot replace existing backup file
‘path+file name’

Error

Cannot replace export file 'path+file
name’

Version 1.4.14
Page 268 of 314

268

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Error

Message
Cannot replace output file ‘path+file
name’

Error

Cannot replace script file 'path+file
name’

Error

Cannot respond to web server
request

Error
Error

Cannot retrieve clipboard values;
cause ‘error cause’
Cannot retrieve list type list

Error

Cannot revert changes to project

Error

Cannot set comment for project
‘project name’

Error

Cannot store internal table ‘table
name’

Warning

Cannot store program preference
values; cause ‘error cause’

Error

Cannot update comment for table
‘table name’

Error

Cannot update data fields

Error

Cannot update data types

269

Version 1.4.14
Page 269 of 314

Cause
The output file file name already exists in the
directory path, but cannot be removed so as to be
replaced by a new file of the same name. Check
that the file permissions allow the user to write to
this file and directory
The script file file name already exists in the
directory path, but cannot be removed so as to be
replaced by a new file of the same name. Check
that the file permissions allow the user to write to
this file and directory
An error occurred in writing the output to the
output stream for a request for data from the
application via the web server. Detail on the cause
is logged in the event log
An error occurred in retrieving the values from the
clipboard for a paste operation
An error occurred retrieving the list of data list
type from the project database. Detail on the
cause is logged in the event log. The may be due
to database corruption or a database server error
Following an update error on the current project
another error prevented reverting any changes
made to the database. Detail on the cause is
logged in the event log
The attempt to update the lock status, which is
stored in the project database comment, for
project ‘project name’ failed. Detail on the cause
is logged in the event log
The attempt to store the data to internal table
table name in the project database failed. Detail
on the cause is logged in the event log
The program preference keys could not be stored
in the preference storage node due to the cited
cause
The attempt to update comment for table table
name failed. Detail on the cause is logged in the
event log
The attempt to update the data fields in the
internal table (__fields) failed. Detail on the cause
is logged in the event log
The attempt to update the data types in a data
table or the internal table (__data_types) failed.
Detail on the cause is logged in the event log

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Error

Message
Cannot update input types

Error

Cannot update macros

Error

Cannot update project
administrator(s)

Error

Cannot update table type ‘type
name’ ’

Warning

Error
Error
Warning

Cannot write to event log

Cannot write to export file ‘path+file
name’
Cannot write to script file ‘path+file
name’
Column ‘column name’ expects a
boolean value

Warning

Column name ‘column name’ already
in use

Warning

Column name ‘column name’ already
in use (database)

Warning

Column name ‘column name’ already
in use (hidden)

Warning

Column name ‘column name’
matches a reserved word

Warning

Data field ‘field name’ definition
applicability type ‘applicability type’
for owner ‘owner name’
unrecognized in import file ‘file
name’; continue?

270

Version 1.4.14
Page 270 of 314

Cause
The attempt to update the input types in a data
table or data field or the internal table
(__input_types) failed. Detail on the cause is
logged in the event log
The attempt to update the macros in a data table
or the internal table (__macros) failed. Detail on
the cause is logged in the event log
The attempt to update the project administrator(s)
in the project database comment failed. Detail on
the cause is logged in the event log
The attempt to update table type type name (and
tables of that type, table name(s), if any) in the
project database failed. Detail on the cause is
logged in the event log
The event log file cannot be written. Check that
user has file write permissions for the file and
directory
An I/O error occurred while writing to the export
file file name in the directory path
An I/O error occurred while writing to the script
file file name in the directory path
The text pasted into column column name is
non-boolean (true/false) and the column only
displays boolean (in the form of a check box); the
text is ignored
The column name column name is already used in
the table type being edited. A different column
name must be chosen
The database converts the column names to one
that is valid for use in PostgreSQL. The database
form of the column names in the table type being
edited must be unique. A different column name
must be chosen
The column name column name is already used by
a hidden column in the table type being edited. A
different column name must be chosen
The column name column name matches a
PostgreSQL key word. A different column name
must be chosen
The applicability type, applicability type,
referenced in a data field definition with the name
field name belonging to field owner owner name in
the import file file name is not one of those
recognized. Change the input type, or select
Ignore or Ignore all to use the default input type
(‘All tables’)

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Warning

Message
Data field ‘field name’ definition
input type ‘input type’ for owner
‘owner name’ unrecognized in import
file ‘file name’; continue?

Warning

Data must be provided for column
‘column name 1’ or column ‘column
name 2’ [row row number]

Warning

Data must be provided for column
‘column name’ [row row number]

Warning

Data type name already in use

Warning

Data type size must be a positive
integer
Database connection parameter(s)
missing

Warning

Error

Database query failed

Warning

Directory name cannot be selected as
the file name

Warning

Duplicate stream name

Warning

Enumeration ‘enumeration’ format
invalid in table ‘table name’; initial
non-negative integer or separator
character between enumeration
value and label missing

271

Version 1.4.14
Page 271 of 314

Cause
The input type, input type, referenced in a data
field definition with the name field name
belonging to field owner owner name in the
import file file name is not one of those
recognized. Change the input type, or select
Ignore or Ignore all to use the default input type
(‘Text’)
One or both columns column name 1 and column
name 2 in the data type editor in row row number
require a value, but both are empty. Enter a value
in at least one of the columns
The column column name in the table type, data
type, input type, macro, data field, reserved
message ID, or access level editor in row row
number requires a value, but is empty. Enter a
value in the column
The data type name entered in the data type
editor’s User Name column is already in use by
another data type. User-defined data type names
must be unique. Alter the data type name to one
not in use
The value entered for a data type’s size is less than
1 or is not an integer. Enter a valid size value
One or more or the server connection parameters,
server type, server host, or user name, are missing.
the Change user and Server properties commands
are used to set these parameters
A project database query executed from within a
script using the getDatabaseQuery script data
access method failed. The script association
dialogs can also produce this error. Detail on the
cause is logged in the event log
A directory (folder) name is entered as the file
name in the export dialog. Select a file and not a
directory
A data stream name netered in the rate parameter
dialog matches one already in use. Data stream
names must be unique
One or more of the enumeration definitions in
enumeration enumeration in table table name
imported from an EDS or XTCE XML file does not
have a non-negative integer as the first
enumeration parameter or the character
separating the enumeration value and label can’t
be identified. EDS and XTCE XML enumerations
must be in the format specified in paragraph 4.5.6

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Warning

Message
Enumeration ‘enumeration’ format
invalid in table ‘table name’;
separator character between
enumerated pairs missing

Warning

Environment variable override key
‘key name’ has no corresponding
value

Error

Error obtaining metadata for internal
table ‘table name’

Error

Error obtaining metadata for table
‘table name’

Error

Error obtaining project database
‘database name’ metadata

Error

Error verifying project database
‘database name’ consistency

Command
Line Error

Error: argument must be >=
minimum and <= maximum

Command
Line Error

Error: argument must be a color
name or in the format '0x######'
where '#' is a hexadecimal digit
Error: argument must be one of the
following: valid inputs

Command
Line Error
Command
Line Error
Command
Line Error

Error: argument not a number
Error: Import disabled; user lacks
write access

272

Version 1.4.14
Page 272 of 314

Cause
The character separating each enumerated pair
can’t be identified in one or more of the
enumeration definitions in enumeration
enumeration in table table name imported from an
EDS or XTCE XML file. EDS and XTCE XML
enumerations must be in the format specified in
paragraph 4.5.6
The environment variable override key key name
entered in the script manager or script executive
dialog doesn’t have a value associated with it. The
key/value format is >>
An error occurred while attempting to read the
metadata for the internal table table name during
project database verification. The metadata
provides information on the table’s columns
(number, names, and data types)
An error occurred while attempting to read the
metadata for the table table name during project
database verification. The metadata provides
information on the table’s columns (number,
names, and data types)
An error occurred while attempting to read the
metadata for project database database name
during project database verification. The
metadata provides information on the number of
tables and their names
An error occurred while perform updates to
project database database name internal tables
during project database verification. Detail on the
cause is logged in the event log
The command line argument argument expects a
numeric value between the values minimum and
maximum, inclusive
The command line argument argument expects a
recognized color name from the color map or a
hexdecimal value preceded by ‘0x’
The command line argument argument is provided
an argument value that is not one of the valid
inputs, valid inputs, for this command
The command line argument argument expects a
numeric value which isn’t provided
The import command was executed by a user with
read only access. This command is only available
to users with read/write or admin access level.

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Command
Line Error
Command
Line Error

Message
Error: mainsize width or height not a
number, or too many/few values
Error: Missing argument for
command ‘command name’

Command
Line Error
Command
Line Error
Command
Line Error
Command
Line Error

Error: Missing export file name
and/or table path(s)
Error: Missing import file name
Error: Unrecognized command
‘command name’
Error: Unrecognized delimiter for
command ‘command name’

Warning

Field name ‘field name’ already in use

Warning

Field size must be a positive integer

Warning

Field size must be less than or equal
to maximum width

Error

File ‘path+file name‘ is not a backup
file

Warning

Group name is already in use

Warning

Group name must be entered

Warning

ID interval must be a positive integer

Warning

Illegal character(s) in association
name

273

Version 1.4.14
Page 273 of 314

Cause
The width or height contains a non-numeric (0-9)
character, or other than 2 values are given
The command command name expects an
argument immediately following the command but
none is provided
The export command is missing the export file
name and/or the data table path(s)
The import command is missing the import file
The command command name isn’t a valid
command for CCDD
The command command name uses an
unrecognized delimiter. Commands must begin
with either ‘-‘ or ‘/’
The data field field name is already in use for this
table. Each field within a table must be unique.
Alter the field name
The value entered for a data field’s size is less than
1 or is not an integer. Enter a valid size value
The value entered for a data field’s size is greater
than the maximum allowed, maximum width
(determined by the program preference value
MaximumDataFieldLength). The number of
characters that can be entered into the field is not
limited by this value, only the displayed width of
the field. Enter a value less than the maximum
The file chosen to restore a project database is not
in the expected format. The file is either
corrupted or the wrong file was chosen
The group name entered in the group name text
field is already in use by another group or matches
the pseudo-group’s name, ‘All tables’. Group
names must be unique. Alter the group name to
one not in use
The group name text field is empty. Enter a valid
group name into the text field
The message ID interval value in the Assign
Telemetry Messages or Assign Table Message IDs
dialog is invalid. Enter a positive integer value
The association name in the script association
manager dialog contains one or more illegal
characters. Association names must begin with a
letter or underscore and contain only letters,
numerals, and underscores. Remove the illegal
character(s)

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Warning

Message
Illegal character(s) in data type C type
name

Warning

Illegal character(s) in data type name

Warning

Illegal character(s) in macro name

Warning

Illegal character(s) in project name

Warning

Illegal character(s) in table name
‘table name’

Warning

Incorrect number of columns
indicated for table 'table name' in the
column order table for user ‘user
name’

Warning

Input type name already in use

Warning

Input value out of range in table
‘table name’ for column ‘column
name’; must be greater than
minimum and less than maximum

274

Version 1.4.14
Page 274 of 314

Cause
The C type name in the data type editor table cell
contains one or more illegal characters. C type
names can consist of multiple words, separated by
one or more spaces, which must begin with a
letter or underscore and contain only letters,
numerals, and underscores (an ending asterisk is
legal if the corresponding base type is ‘pointer’ or
blank). Remove the illegal character(s)
The user data type name in the data type editor
table cell contains one or more illegal characters.
Data type names must begin with a letter or
underscore and contain only letters, numerals, and
underscores. Remove the illegal character(s)
The macro name in the macro editor table cell
contains one or more illegal characters. Macro
names must begin with a letter or underscore and
contain only letters, numerals, and underscores.
Remove the illegal character(s)
The project name text field contains one or more
semi-colons. Remove the illegal character(s)
The table name text field contains one or more
illegal characters. Table names must begin with a
letter or underscore and contain only letters,
numerals, and underscores. Remove the illegal
character(s)
Detected during project database verification, the
number of columns for table table name in the
internal table __orders doesn’t match the actual
number of columns for that table’s type. If
updated the column order is reset to the default
The input type name entered in the input type
editor’s Type Name column is already in use by
another input type (this includes the default input
types as well). Input type names must be unique.
Alter the input type name to one not in use
The minimum or maximum value entered in a cell
of table table name in the column column name is
outside the minimum and maximum values for an
unsigned integer of the data type’s size. Enter a
value within the minimum and maximum
boundaries

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Warning

Message
Internal table ‘table name’ column
‘column name’ data type mismatch
(expected: ‘expected type’, actual:
‘actual type’)

Warning

Internal table ‘table name’ column
column index name mismatch
(expected: ‘expected name’, actual:
‘actual name’)

Warning

Internal table ‘table name’ has too
many columns

Warning

Internal table ‘table name’ is missing
one or more columns

Error

Invalid application parameter(s):
using the default values instead

Error

Invalid application scheduler
applications detected; number
removed

Warning

Invalid bit length in table ‘table
name’; bit length exceeds the size of
the data type

Warning

Invalid characters in field ‘field
name’; characters consistent with
input type ‘input type‘ expected

275

Version 1.4.14
Page 275 of 314

Cause
Detected during project database verification, the
data type for the column column name in the
internal table table name is found to not be of the
type expected for this column (e.g., an integer
type is specified while the table shows a text type).
If updated the data type is changed to the one
expected
Detected during project database verification, the
column indicated by its index is found to have a
name other than the name expected for this
column. If updated the name is changed to the
one expected; however, the data in the column
may be incorrect as well. For this case deleting the
internal table (with loss of its data) may be
necessary
Detected during project database verification, the
internal table table name is found to have more
columns than the number expected. If updated
any extra columns are removed
Detected during project database verification, the
internal table table name is found to be missing
one or more columns. If updated the table is
deleted (with loss of its data)
The application scheduler parameters stored in the
project database internal table (__app_scheduler)
comment are invalid. Default values replace these
parameters. Detail on the cause is logged in the
event log
The application scheduler internal table
(__app_scheduler) references applications that do
not exist in the project database. The number
invalid application references are removed
Either the bit length entered for a parameter in
the data table table name is larger than the size, in
bits, of the associated data type, or the data type
changed to a smaller sized integer with a size in
bits less than the current bit length. Decrease the
bit length or choose a data type containing more
bytes
The value in the data field field name text field
contains characters that are inconsistent with the
data field’s input type, input type. Enter only
characters matching the input type or change the
input type

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Warning

Message
Invalid characters in message ID

Warning

Invalid characters in message name

Warning

Invalid characters in separator field(s)

Warning

Invalid characters in table ‘table
name’ for column ‘column name’;
characters consistent with input type
‘input type‘ expected

Warning

Invalid data type ‘data type’ is table
‘table name’; structure cannot
reference itself or an ancestor

Warning

Invalid export file name

Warning

Invalid input type in table ‘table
name’ for column ‘column name’;
input type ‘non-negative integer’
expected
Invalid input type in table ‘table
name’ for column ‘column name’;
input type ‘integer’ expected

Warning

Warning

Invalid input type in table ‘table
name’ for column ‘column name’;
input type ‘float’ expected

Warning

Invalid input value in table ‘table
name’ for column ‘column name’; the
minimum must be less than or equal
to the maximum

276

Version 1.4.14
Page 276 of 314

Cause
The message contains an invalid character in the
telemetry scheduler Scheduler ID column cell.
Enter an ID in hexadecimal format (the leading ‘0x’
is optional)
The message contains an invalid character in the
telemetry scheduler Scheduler Message column
cell. Enter a name beginning with an underscore
or alphabetical character, and containing only
alphanumeric and underscore characters
The variable path or data type/variable name
separator characters entered in the Variable Path
& Names dialog are not valid. The left and right
bracket characters ([ and ]) are not allowed.
Remove the invalid character(s) from the
separator inputs
The value entered in a cell of table table name in
the column column name does not match the
expected input type, input type, as specified in the
table type definition. Enter only characters
matching the input type or change the input type
The data type pasted into the structure table table
name’s data type cell matches the name of the
structure or one of its ancestor structures. This
causes a recursive reference, so isn’t allowed.
Change the data type to a valid structure reference
or a primitive data type
The file name entered in the export dialog is
missing or invalid. Enter a valid file name
The minimum or maximum value entered in a cell
of table table name in the column column name
for an unsigned integer data type is less than zero.
Enter a non-negative integer value
The minimum or maximum value entered in a cell
of table table name in the column column name
for an integer data type is not an integer value.
Enter an integer value
The minimum or maximum value entered in a cell
of table table name in the column column name
for a floating point data type is not a floating point
value. Enter a floating point value
In table table name in the column column name,
representing a minimum or maximum value, the
minimum value is greater than the maximum
value. Alter the minimum ro maximum such that
the minimum is less than or equal to the maximum

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Warning

Message
Invalid input value in table ‘table
name’ for column ‘column name’;
command argument names must be
unique for a command

Warning

Invalid input value in table ‘table
name’ for column ‘column name’;
data type invalid or unknown in
sizeof() call

Warning

Invalid input value in table ‘table
name’ for column ‘column name’;
input value ‘input value‘ must be
unique

Warning

Invalid message ID range; lower value
must be <= upper value

Warning

Invalid message ID; hexadecimal
range expected

Error

Invalid rate parameter(s): using the
default values instead

Warning

Invalid regular expression; cause
‘cause’

Warning

Invalid regular expression; cause
‘error cause’

277

Version 1.4.14
Page 277 of 314

Cause
The command argument name entered in a cell of
table table name in the column column name has a
duplicate elsewhere in that column, and the cell
values must be unique, as specified in the table
type definition
The data type referenced in a sizeof() call entered
in a cell of table table name in the column column
name is either not a recognized primitive data type
or structure name, or is a valid structure name but
is the prototype of this structure table or one of its
child structures, producing a recursive reference.
Enter a valid data type name. Use Ctrl-S to display
a pop-up dialog that allows selecting from the valid
data types
The value, input value, entered in a cell of table
table name in the column column name has a
duplicate elsewhere in that column, and the cell
values must be unique, as specified in the table
type definition
The upper message ID range value is less than the
lower value entered into the reserved message ID
dialog. Correct the lower or upper value
The message ID range entered into the reserved
message ID dialog doesn’t match the expcted
format: start hexadecimal value <- end
hexadecimal value>. Enter a valid hexadecimal
value or values
The rate parameters stored in the project
database internal table (__tlm_scheduler)
comment are invalid. Default values replace these
parameters. Detail on the cause is logged in the
event log
A project database or script search was attempted
using an invalid regular expression (the check box
allowing a regular expression must be selected in
order for the search text to be evaluated as a
regular expression). The reason is indicated by
cause. Enter a valid regular expression and
reattempt the search
The regular expression entered in the input type
editor’s RegEx Match column is invalid for the
cause indicated. Correct the regular expression

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Type
Warning

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Message
Invalid variable path in table ‘table
name’; variable path already in use in
another structure

Error

Invalid web server request

Warning

Link name is already in use

Warning

Link name must be entered

Warning

Macro ‘macro name’ contains a
recursive reference

Warning

Macro name is already in use

Warning

Macro value is not consistent with
macro usage in table(s) ‘table
name(s)’

Warning

Message ID is already in use

Warning

Message ID(s) already reserved

Warning

Message name is already in use

Warning

Message name must be entered

278

Version 1.4.14
Page 278 of 314

Cause
In table table name the variable path entered in
the column with input type ‘Variable path’ is a
duplicate of that entered for another variable (in
this or any other structure). The variable path
must be unique. Alter the variable path to be
unique or use the default path
The request for data from the CCDD application via
the web server is unrecognized; an unknown data
stream name, incorrect number of parameters, or
incorrect parameter type was passed to the
telemetry scheduler request; or an error occurred
while attempting to parse the data from the
database for the request. Detail on the cause is
logged in the event log
The link name entered in the link name text field is
already in use by another link. Link names must be
unique. Alter the link name to one not in use
The link name text field is empty. Enter a valid link
name into the text field
The macro value for the macro macro name in the
macro editor contains a circular reference (a
macro references itself). Alter the macro value to
remove the circular reference
The macro name entered in the macro editor’s
name column is already in use by another macro.
Macro names must be unique. Alter the macro
name to one not in use
The macro value entered in the macro editor’s
value column does not match the input type of a
column in one or more tables, table name(s),
where the macro is used. Alter the macro value to
be consistent with the input type in every column
for which the macro is referenced
The message ID is a duplicate of another in the
telemetry scheduler Scheduler ID column. Enter a
unique message name
The message ID range entered into the reserved
message ID dialog matches or encompasses an ID
already reserved. Correct the range values so that
no overlap occurs
The message name is a duplicate of another in the
telemetry scheduler Scheduler Message column.
Enter a unique message name
The message name is missing from the telemetry
scheduler Scheduler Message column cell. Enter a
valid message name

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Type
Warning

Warning

Warning

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Message
Message name pattern must be in
the format: startText<0#>d
where startText and endText consist
of alphanumeric characters and/or
underscores, startText begins with a
letter or underscore, and # is one or
more digits. Note: 0# and endText
are optional
Message starting number must be an
integer >= 0

Warning

Missing or extra data type definition
input(s) in import file ‘file
path+name’; continue?
Missing or extra input type definition
input(s) in import file ‘file
path+name’; continue?
Missing or extra macro definition
input(s) in import file ‘file
path+name’; continue?
Missing or extra reserved message ID
definition input(s) in import file ‘file
path+name’; continue?
Missing table type name in import
file ‘file path+name’; continue?
Must enter or select a script

Warning

Must select a project to delete

Warning

Must select a project to open

Warning

Must select a project to unlock

Warning

Must select a script location

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

279

Version 1.4.14
Page 279 of 314

Cause
The message name pattern in the Assign
Telemetry Messages dialog in not in the expected
format. The pattern must contain only
alphanumeric characters, contain a single ‘#’
character, and begin with either an underscore or
alphabetical character. Change the pattern to
match the valid format
The message starting number in the Assign
Telemetry Messages dialog is invalid. Enter a
positive integer value or zero
A data type definition is missing or has too many
inputs in import file file path+name
An input type definition is missing or has too many
inputs in import file file path+name
A macro definition is missing or has too many
inputs in import file file path+name
A reserved message ID definition is missing or has
too many inputs in import file file path+name
A table type definition is missing the table type
name in import file file path+name
No script is selected when the Add button is
pressed in the script association manager dialog.
Enter or select a script file
No project is selected from the Delete Project
dialog when the Delete button is pressed. Select
one or more projects from the dialog or press the
Cancel button
No project (other than the currently open one) is
selected from the Open Project dialog when the
Open button is pressed. Select a project from the
dialog or press the Cancel button
No project is selected from the Unlock Project
dialog when the Unlock button is pressed. Select a
project from the dialog or press the Cancel button
No folder is selected in which to save the script(s)
retrieved from the project when the Retrieve
button is pressed in the Retrieve Script dialog.
Enter or select a script location, or press the
Cancel button

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Warning

Message
Must select a script to delete

Warning

Must select a script to retrieve

Warning

Must select a script to store

Warning

Must select a table from the tree

Warning

Must select an export file name

Warning

Must select an import file name

Warning

Must select at least one data field

Warning
Warning

Must select at least one structure
table
No data field exists

Warning

No other user exists

Warning

No project exists for which user ‘user
name’ has access

Warning

No role exists

Warning

Password incorrect for user ‘user
name’
Platform does not allow key press
simulation

Warning

Warning

Problem occurred when setting the
look & feel to look&feel

280

Version 1.4.14
Page 280 of 314

Cause
No script is selected from the Delete Script(s)
dialog when the Delete button is pressed. Select a
script from the dialog or press the Cancel button
No script is selected from the Retrieve Script(s)
dialog when the Retrieve button is pressed. Select
a script from the dialog or press the Cancel button
No script is selected from the Store Script(s) dialog
when the Store button is pressed. Select a script
from the dialog or press the Cancel button
No table is selected from the table tree and is
required for the action requested by the user.
Select a table from the tree
No export file name is entered in the export dialog.
Enter a valid file name
No import file name is entered in the import
dialog. Enter a valid file name
No data field is selected from the list of fields in
the data field table editor selection dialog. Select
at least one data field check box
No table is selected from the structure table tree
in the padding dialog. Select at least one table
No data field is available to select in the data field
table editor selection dialog
An attempt was made to change to another user
when no other user exists in the server
The user user name does not have permission to
access any of the project databases existing in the
server. The user’s permissions must be upgraded
or a project database created for which the user
has access
No user or role exists in the server from which to
choose
The password entered for user user name is
invalid. Enter the correct password
Copy, paste, and insert menu commands in the
table and table type editors are handled by
simulating the equivalent control key presses. The
platform on which the application is running does
not support this type of simulation. Use the actual
key press sequences to perform the desired
operation
An exception occurred while attempting to set the
look & feel to the one selected. This can occur if
the look & feel is not supported by the platform,
or if there is a problem with access to the look &
feel information

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Type
Error

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Message
Project ‘database name’ restore
failed

Warning

Project ‘project name’ has no table
type defined

Error

Project ‘project name’ backup failed

Warning

Project ‘project name’ has no scripts

Warning

Project ‘project name’ has no tables

Warning

Project database name too long
(maximum length characters
maximum)

Warning

Project must be selected

Warning

Project name already in use

Warning

Project name must be entered

Warning

Project owner must be selected

Warning

Project-level data field has missing or
extra input(s) in import file ‘file
path+name’; continue?
Rate parameter values must be
positive integers

Warning

Warning

Script file name missing

281

Version 1.4.14
Page 281 of 314

Cause
An error occurred preventing restoring project
project name. Detail on the cause is logged in the
event log
The project database project name has no __types
internal table or the __types table is empty.
Create table types using the table type editor and
store these in the project’s database
An error occurred preventing backing up project
project name. Detail on the cause is logged in the
event log
The user attempted to retrieve a script from the
project database project name, but the project
does not have any scripts stored in it
The project database project name contains no
data tables. Create tables using the Table | New
command
The project’s database name, derived from the
project name entered into the project name text
field, exceeds the maximum allowed. The
maximum length for a database name in
PostgreSQL is 63 characters. Shorten the name to
within the length limit
No project is selected when renaming or copying a
project database. Choose a project from the radio
button list
The project (database) name already exists on the
server. Choose another name that does not match
an existing project’s database
The project name text field is empty. Enter a valid
project name into the text field
No owner is selected when creating a project
database. Choose an owner from the radio button
list
A project-level data field is missing or has too
many inputs in import file file path+name. Add the
missing inputs or delete the extraneous ones
The value in one or more rate parameter dialog
input text fields contains a zero, negative, or noninteger value. Enter an integer value greater than
or equal to 1 in each of the fields
The script file name is missing in the export dialog.
A file name must be entered if the check box
indicating an external file is used is selected. Enter
a valid script file name or deselect the check box

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Warning

Message
Search text cannot be blank

Warning

Server port must be a positive integer

Warning

Server port must be blank or a
positive integer

Warning

Starting ID must be in the format
<0x>#, where # is one or more
hexadecimal digits

Warning

System data field name, version,
validation status, and/or
classification missing

Warning

Table ‘table name’ column ‘column
name’ data type is invalid (data type)

Warning

Table ‘table name’ column ‘column
name’ rows row number 1 and row
number 2 have duplicate values

Warning

Table ‘table name’ column name
‘column name’ unrecognized in
import file ‘file path+name’;
continue?
Table ‘table name’ contains a
recursive reference to ‘recursion
table name’

Warning

Warning

Version 1.4.14
Page 282 of 314

Cause
A project database or script search was attempted
without a text string for which to search entered in
the search dialog. Enter a text string prior to
attempting a search
The value entered into the server port field in the
web server properties dialog is invalid. Enter a
port number (positive integer value)
The value entered into the server port field in the
PostgreSQL server properties dialog is invalid.
Either clear the field or enter a port number
(positive integer value)
The starting message ID value in the Assign
Telemetry Messages or Assign Table Message IDs
dialog is invalid. Enter a hexadecimal value. The
“0x” prefix is optional
The Export XTCE dialog system data field name,
version, validation status, and/or classification
field is empty. Enter a valid value for each missing
field
Detected during project database verification,
column column name in table table name is found
to have an invalid data type, data type. Updating
replaces the data type with that from the table’s
type definition
Detected during project database verification, the
values in table table name on rows row number 1
and row number 2 in column column name are
found to have the same value when the indicated
column for this table’s type is specified to contain
only unique values. If updated the value in row
row number 2 is replaced with a blank
The column column name for table table name in
the import file file path+name doesn’t not exist in
the table type definition
The table table name has the condition wherein
the table recursion table name contains a
reference to itself as a variable or as a variable in
one of its child tables (or in one of their child
tables, etc.). Remove the recursive table reference
Detected during project database verification,
table table name is found to have a column
column name that is not defined for this table’s
type. If updated the column is deleted

Table ‘table name’ has an unknown
column (‘column name’)

282

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Warning

Message
Table ‘table name’ is an unknown
type (‘table type’)

Warning

Table ‘table name’ is missing column
‘column name’

Warning

Table ‘table name’ printing failed;
cause ‘error cause’

Warning

Table ‘table name’ row row number
column ‘column name’ input type
mismatch

Warning

Table ‘table name’ row row number
index mismatch

Warning

Table ‘table name’ variable ‘variable
name’ array member array index
array size doesn’t match the array
definition

Warning

Table ‘table name’ variable ‘variable
name’ array member array index
data type doesn’t match the array
definition

Warning

Table ‘table name’ variable ‘variable
name’ has an extra array member

283

Version 1.4.14
Page 283 of 314

Cause
Detected during project database verification, the
table type table type specified for table table name
is not one of the defined table types. If updated
the table is deleted
Detected during project database verification,
table table name is found to be missing a column
column name that is defined for this table’s type.
If updated the column, with blank values for any
rows, is added
Output of the table table name to a printer or file
was unsuccessful due to the cause specified. This
can be due to the printer being offline
Detected during project database verification, the
value in row row number, column column name in
table table name is found to have a value that is
inconsistent with the input type specified in this
table’s table type for this column (e.g., text in an
integer-only cell). If updated the value in the row
and column indicated is replaced with a blank
Detected during project database verification, row
row number in table table name is found to have
the wrong row index. Row indices, stored in a
hidden column, start at 1 for the first row and
increment sequentially for each additional row. If
updated the row indices are set to the expected
values
Detected during project database verification, in
table table name the array member variable
name[array index] is found to have a value in the
array size column that differs from that in the
array’s array definition. If updated the array size
for the specified array member is changed to
match the array definition
Detected during project database verification, in
table table name the array member variable name
is found to have a value in the data type column
that differs from that in the array’s array
definition. If updated the data type for the
specified array member is changed to match the
array definition
Detected during project database verification, in
table table name the array variable variable name
is found to have more members than its array size
allows. If updated any extra array member rows
are deleted

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Warning

Message
Table ‘table name’ variable ‘variable
name’ is missing array member array
index

Warning

Table ‘table name’ variable ‘variable
name’ is missing the array definition

Warning

Table ’table name’ has missing or
extra data field input(s) in import file
‘file path+name’; continue?
Table export completed with errors

Error

Warning

Table name ‘table name’ cannot
begin with ‘__’

Warning

Table name ‘table name’ is a
duplicate

Warning

Table name ‘table name’ is already in
use

Warning

Table name ‘table name’ matches a
primitive data type

Warning

Table name ‘table name’ matches a
reserved word

Warning

Table name ‘table name’ too long
(maximum characters maximum)

Warning

Table name must be entered

284

Version 1.4.14
Page 284 of 314

Cause
Detected during project database verification, in
table table name the array variable variable name
is found to have fewer members than its array size
allows. If updated any missing array member rows
are added
Detected during project database verification, in
table table name the array member variable name
is found to have no accompanying array definition.
If updated the missing array definition row is
added
A data field definition in table table name is
missing or has too many inputs in import file file
path+name
An error occurred when attempting to export one
or more tables to a file. A separate error dialog
appears describing the specific error; this error
appears at the end of the export operation
The table name, table name, entered into the
table name text field begins with a double
underscore. The double underscore prefix is
reserved for use by the application to designate
internal tables in the project database. Alter the
table name to meet the table naming constraints
The table name, table name, appears more than
once in the list of new table names entered in the
table name text field. Table names must be
unique. Alter the table name to one not in use
The table name, table name, entered in the table
name text field is already in use by another table.
Table names must be unique. Alter the table
name to one not in use
The table name, table name, entered in the table
name text field matches a primitive data type’s
name (e.g., uint32, float). Alter the table name to
meet the table naming constraints
The table name, table name, entered into the
table name text field matches that of a reserved
word in PostgreSQL. Alter the table name to meet
the table naming constraints
The table name, table name, entered into the
table name text field exceeds the maximum
allowed (maximum). The maximum length for a
table name in PostgreSQL is 63 characters.
Shorten the name to within the length limit
The table name text field is empty. Enter a valid
table name into the text field

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Warning

Message
Table type ‘table type’ definition has
missing or extra input(s) in import file
‘file path+name’; continue?

Warning

Table type ‘table type’ definition
input type ‘input type name’
unrecognized in import file ‘file
path+name’; continue?

Warning

Table type ‘table type’ has missing or
extra data field input(s) in import file
‘file path+name’; continue?

Warning

Table type must be selected

Warning

Table type name is already in use

Warning

Table type name must be entered

Warning

Table(s) not exported ‘table name(s)’;
output file already exists or file I/O
error

Warning

Table(s) not imported ‘table
name(s)’; table already exists

Warning

Tables of type ‘Structure or
Command' may not have more than
one column with
input type(s): input type[, input type
2[, …]]

285

Version 1.4.14
Page 285 of 314

Cause
The table type definition table type is missing or
has too many inputs in import file file path+name.
Add the missing inputs or delete the extraneous
ones
The table type definition table type references an
input type input type name that isn’t a recognized
input type in import file file path+name. Change
the input type name to one of those recognized by
the application. If the error is ignored then the
invalid input type defaults to Text
The table type definition table type is missing or
has too many data field inputs in import file file
path+name. Add the missing inputs or delete the
extraneous ones
No table type is selected from the list. Select a
table type
The table type entered in the table type name text
field is already in use by another table type. Table
type names must be unique. Alter the table type
name to one not in use
The table type name text field is empty. Enter a
valid table type name into the text field
The table(s) table name(s) selected for exportation
were skipped due to the output file already
existing and the option to overwrite existing files
was not selected, or that a file I/O error occurred
(for example, insufficient file permission in the
target folder)
The table(s) table name(s) selected for importation
were skipped due to the table already existing and
the option to overwrite existing tables was not
selected
In the table editor for a table type representing a
‘Structure’ or ‘Command’, one or more column
definition input types (input type[, input type 2[,
…]]) are used multiple times, but must be unique
for this table type (e.g., input type ‘Variable name’
in a structure table). This can occur if these input
types are assigned before the table has all the
columns necessary to define the table type as a
structure or command, then the final input type
necessary to make the type a structure/command
is assigned. Assign different input types to the
affected row(s), or delete these row(s), then assign
the input type

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Type
Warning

Message
The value for ‘preference name’
cannot be blank

Warning

The value for ‘preference name’ is
outside allowable limits

Warning

The value for ‘preference name’ must
be a positive integer

Warning

Unknown input type ‘text’

Warning

Unknown internal table ‘table name’

Warning

Unrecognized association name
‘association name’

Warning

User name already in use

Warning

User name must be entered

Warning

User’s guide ‘file name‘ cannot be
opened; cause ‘Desktop class
unsupported’
User’s guide ‘file name‘ cannot be
opened; cause ‘file I/O error or no
application registered to open .pdf
files’

Warning

286

Version 1.4.14
Page 286 of 314

Cause
The value for the size or spacing preference
‘preference name’ in the Preferences dialog is
empty. Enter a value between the minimum and
maximum (inclusive)
The value for the size or spacing preference
‘preference name’ in the Preferences dialog is
outside the minimum and maximum range. Enter
a value between the minimum and maximum
(inclusive)
A negative value was entered for the size or
spacing preference ‘preference name’ in the
Preferences dialog. Enter a value between the
minimum and maximum (inclusive)
The text text pasted into the Table Type Editor’s
Input Type column does not match a known input
type; the text is ignored
Detected during project database verification, the
table table name is found to have a name that
indicates it is an internal table, but it is not one of
the recognized internal tables. If updated the
table is deleted
The script association name association name
entered for the command line execute command
is not a valid association for the current project.
Check the association name spelling
The user name selected in the access level
manager User Name column matches that in
another row. Each user may be assigned only one
access level. Select another user name from the
drop down menu or change the access level for
the row that already contains the user name
The user name field in the database login dialog is
empty. Enter a valid user name into the text field.
The user name field is only present if a connection
to the database server cannot be established;
otherwise a list of radio buttons representing the
user list is displayed
The CCDD user’s guide file cannot be opened. This
is due to the Java Desktop class not being available
in the operating system
The CCDD user’s guide file cannot be opened. This
is due to either a file I/O error or having no
application registered in the operating system to
open .pdf files (the help file is in PDF format)

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Type
Warning

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Message
User’s guide ‘file name‘ cannot be
opened; cause ‘file missing’

Error

Web server failed to start

Error

Web server failed to stop

Version 1.4.14
Page 287 of 314

Cause
The CCDD user’s guide file cannot be opened. This
is due to the file not being located in the CCDD
start-up folder
The attempt to start the embedded Jetty web
server failed. Detail on the cause is logged in the
event log
The attempt to stop the embedded Jetty web
server failed. Detail on the cause is logged in the
event log

287

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 288 of 314

Appendix E. Program Notes
Appendix E.1. Key reference
The special keys and their contexts/actions are described below.
←→↑↓

The left, right, up, and down arrow keys move table cell selection from the currently
highlighted cell to the cell to the left, right, above, or below respectively. If the bottom
(top) of the table is reached then the down (up) arrow traverses to the next component
within the GUI entity as with the Tab (Shift-Tab) key. If in edit mode the left (right) key
repositions the text cursor one character to the left (right) of the current cursor position
until the left (right) end of the text string is reached; the up and down arrow keys have no
effect while in edit mode.

Alt-Enter

If editing a table cell with an input type that supports multiple lines, a line break is
inserted into the table cell at the current text insertion point, replacing any selected
character(s).

Ctrl-A

Selects all cells in the table that currently has the focus.

Ctrl-Delete

Deletes the currently selected row(s).

Ctrl-C

Copies the contents of the selected table cell(s) to the clipboard buffer.

Ctrl-E

Expands (if collapsed) or collapses (if expanded) the currently selected table or variable
tree node(s). If multiple nodes are selected then the state of the uppermost one
determines which action is taken for all of the selected nodes.

Ctrl-F

Opens the Search Session Event Log dialog if pressed while the main application window
has the focus (same as selecting the main window File | Search log command). Opens the
table Search dialog if pressed while a table or table type editor dialog is open and has the
focus (same as selecting editor’s File | Search command).

Ctrl-I

Pastes the contents of the clipboard buffer to the table cell(s). New rows are inserted to
contain the pasted data.

Ctrl-M

When pressed while in edit mode in a data table cell a pop-up list appears showing the
macro or macros that are allowed in the cell (no pop-up appears if none of the defined
macros is appropriate, or if no macros are defined). The chosen macro is inserted into the
table cell at the current text insertion point, replacing any selected character(s) and
bounded by the macro identifier characters.

Ctrl-Shift-M Replaces every macro reference and sizeof() call in the current table or macro editor value
column with its corresponding text string, evaluated as a mathematical expression if
applicable. Releasing the keys restores the macro names.
Ctrl-S

When pressed while in the edit mode in a data table cell a pop-up list appears displaying
the primitive data types and prototype structure names. If the data table represents a
structure then only those prototype structures that can be used as a variable data type are
displayed. When pressed while in the macro editor table a pop-up list appears displaying
all primitive data types and prototype structure names. When pressed while in the data
type editor’s Type Name or C Name cells, and the corresponding Base Type is either blank
or ‘pointer’, a pop-up list appears displaying all of the prototype structure names. The
chosen data type name is inserted into the table cell.
288

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 289 of 314

Ctrl-V

Pastes the contents of the clipboard buffer to the table cell(s), overwriting the current
contents of the cell(s).

Delete

When not editing a cell deletes the contents of the currently selected table cell(s). If in
edit mode the Delete key removes the character immediately to the left of the text cursor.

End

Changes the table cell selection to the leftmost column. If in edit mode the End key
repositions the text cursor to the end of the text in the input cell or field.

Enter

Enters edit mode when pressed while an editable table cell is selected. If in edit mode
then the cell text is entered into the cell (following any validation) and the next editable
cell to the right is placed in edit mode (if the rightmost column is reached then the
leftmost cell in the row below is used; after the last row is reached the first row is used).
If a cell containing a check box gets the focus then pressing Enter toggles the check box
state rather than traversing to the next editable cell.

Escape

Exits edit mode in a table cell or data field, restoring the original contents of the cell or
field. Removed a pop-up list (macro) if displayed without making a selection.

Home

Changes the table cell selection to the rightmost column. If in edit mode the Home key
repositions the text cursor to the beginning of the text in the input cell or field.

Insert

Inserts a new, empty row into the table below the row with the currently selected cell(s).
If in edit mode the Insert key adds a space character at the text cursor location and moves
the cursor immediately after the inserted space.

Page Down

Scrolls the table one page down from its current position. Changes the cell selection to
the currently selected column, with the row one page down from its previous position.

Page Up

Scrolls the table one page up from its current position. Changes the cell selection to the
currently selected column, with the row one page up from its previous position.

Shift-Delete Replaces the selected cell(s) value with that from the corresponding cell value in the
tables’ prototype. See paragraph 4.9.3.2.2.8.2 for more details.
Space

Enters edit mode when pressed while an editable table cell is selected, then inserts a
space in the cell (following any existing text).

Tab

Changes the focus within the current GUI entity to its next component. Pressing Shift-Tab
traverses the components in the opposite direction.

Appendix E.2. Program preferences
The program preferences are stored in a location dependent on the operating system and are updated
as needed by the CCDD application. For example, the Windows operating system stores the preferences
in the system registry under the key name:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\JavaSoft\Prefs\/C/C/D/D

In Linux the preferences are stored in the file:
//.java/.userPrefs/CCDD/prefs.xml

Many of these preference values may be changed via the Preferences dialog; see paragraph 4.9.1.7. The
preference keys and associated descriptions are provided below.
General

289

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 290 of 314

Database

The name of the project database that was connected to most
recently.

DatabaseBackupPath

The full path to the folder to (from) which a project database was
most recently backed up (restored). Used to set the initial path in
the project database backup and restore dialogs.

HideDataType

Determines if the data type is excluded or included when displaying
the variable path in the Show variables dialog and in structure tables
containing a column with the input type ‘Variable path’. The default
is false.

LogFilePath

The full path name for the location where an event log was most
recently opened for reading. This is not necessarily the path of the
current session log. Used to set the initial path in the read log dialog.

PaddingAlignment

The current padding variable byte alignment value. The default is 4.
The value must be a power of 2.

PostgreSQLServerHost

The name of the PostgreSQL server host that was connected to most
recently.

PostgreSQLServerPort

The PostgreSQL server port number of the server that was connected
to most recently.

ScriptPath

The full path to the folder to (from) which a script was most recently
retrieved from (stored in) the project database. Used to set the
initial path in the Script storage and retrieval dialogs.

SearchStrings

Text string containing the previous search dialog searches, stored as
a single string separated by special delimiter characters, and used for
auto-completing input in the search dialogs’ search text field. Once
the maximum number of retained search strings is reached further
searches cause the oldest search string to be removed so that the
latest one can be added.

ServerStrings

Text string containing the previously entered server names, stored as
a single string separated by special delimiter characters, and used for
auto-completing input in the Database Server dialog’s Host field.
Once the maximum number of retained server names is reached
further entries cause the oldest name to be removed so that the
latest one can be added.

TableExportPath

The full path to the folder to (from) which a data table was most
recently exported (imported). Used to set the initial path in the data
table import and export dialogs.

TypeNameSeparator

The character(s) in a variable path used to separate the data type
and variable name in the Show variables dialog and in structure
tables containing a column with the input type ‘Variable path’. The
default is an underscore (_).

User

The name of the latest user to attempt a server connection.

290

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 291 of 314

VariablePathSeparator

The character(s) in a variable path used to separate the root
structure table from a child variable, and a parent structure variable
from a child variable in the Show variables dialog and in structure
tables containing a column with the input type ‘Variable path’. The
default is an underscore (_).

WebServerPort

The web server port number of the server that was connected to
most recently.

L&F
LookAndFeel

The name of the selected “look and feel” that governs the
application’s overall appearance.

Font
DataTableCellFont

Data table and table type editor cell font.

DialogButtonFont

Dialog box button label font.

InputFieldTextFont

Font used when inputting text into dialog input fields, description
fields, and data fields.

LabelBoldFont

Font generally used for labels in dialogs.

LabelPlainFont

Font used for labels in dialogs for non-emphasized text. Also used in
the telemetry and applications scheduler Options lists and Assigned
Applications list.

MenuItemFont

Menu and sub-menu item font.

OtherTableCellFont

Table cell font for non-data tables (e.g., event log).

TableHeaderFont

Table column name font.

ToolTipFont

Font for use when displaying tool tips. Some look & feels ignore
changes to the tool tip font.

TreeNodeFont

Font used when displaying tree node labels, such as in a table tree,
link tree, etc.

Color
DataTypeTextColor

Text color for the data type portion structure and primitive variable
name in a table or variable tree.

FocusBackgroundColor

Background color for a table cell that has the input focus.

InputBackgroundColor

Color used for the background in dialog input fields, description
fields, and data fields.

InputDisabledBackgroundColor

Color used for the background in dialog input fields, description
fields, and data fields that are currently non-editable.

InputTextColor

Color used for the text in dialog input fields, description fields, and
data fields.

291

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 292 of 314

InvalidTextColor

Text color for invalid table rows. Used in the telemetry and
application scheduler tables to denote messages and time slots
which are valid for the selection option.

LabelTextColor

General color for text labels.

PaddingBackgroundColor

Background color for a padding variable cell.

ProtectedBackgroundColor

Background color for a protected (non-editable) table cell.

ProtectedTextColor

Text color for a protected (non-editable) table cell.

RequiredBackgroundColor

Background color for table cells and input fields that are required.

SelectedBackgroundColor

Background color for a table's cells when the cell is selected.

SelectedTextColor

Text color for a table's cells when the cell is selected.

SpecialLabelTextColor

Text color for a group of components in a dialog.

TableAlternateBackgroundColor Background cell color for even numbered rows when the cell is not
selected.
TableBackgroundColor

Table cell background color for odd numbered rows when the cell is
not selected.

TableGridColor

Color for a table’s grid lines. Log table grid lines are not colored (i.e.,
the log table uses the table background color between individual
cells).

TableTextColor

Table cell text color when the cell is not selected.

TextHighlightColor

Color used to highlight macros and matching search text.

ToolTipBackgroundColor

Background color for tool tip pop-ups. Some look & feels ignore
changes to the tool tip background color.

ToolTipTextColor

Text color for tool tip pop-ups. Some look & feels ignore changes to
the tool tip text color.

TypeRequiredBackgroundColor

Background color for a cell in a table type column definition that is
required to define the type.

ValidTextColor

Text color for valid table rows. Used in the telemetry and application
scheduler tables to denote messages and time slots which are valid
for the selection option.

Size
InitalViewableComponentRows

Number of rows of radio buttons or check boxes to display initially
when using the CcddDialogHandler class methods for creating a radio
button or check box selection panel.

InitialViewableDataTableRows

Maximum number of rows to display when a data table or table type
editor is opened. The table may be resized afterwards to display
fewer or more rows.

292

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 293 of 314

InitialViewableTableRows

Maximum number of rows to display when a non-data table is
opened. The table may be resized afterwards to display fewer or
more rows.

MaximumConversionLists

Maximum number of variable name conversion lists to maintain in
memory. A conversion list is created when a full variable name, with
path, is requested using separators other than those used in a
previous request. When the maximum number of lists is reached an
earlier list (the second one created) is removed to make room for the
new one.

MaximumDataFieldLength

Maximum character length for displaying a data field. Note that this
is for display purposes only; the number of characters entered into
the field may exceed this value.

MaximumDialogLineLength

Maximum number of characters to display per line in a dialog
message. The dialog text is wrapped for line lengths greater than
this value.

MaximumDialogMessageLength Maximum number of characters to display in a dialog message. This
value only is applied to dialogs displaying a list of tables in the event
the number of tables is large.
MaxImportedTabRows

Maximum number of tab rows a single editor dialog when importing
tables. This value is used to prevent the number of tab rows from
growing so large that the table content is no longer visible.

MaximumInitialTableCellWidth

Maximum pixel width for a table column when the table is initially
displayed. The column size may be changed afterwards.

MaximumLogMessageLength

Maximum number of remembered search strings.

MaximumServerTimeout

Number of seconds allowed to validate the PostgreSQL server
connection.

MaximumToolTipLineLength

Maximum number of characters to display per line in a tool tip.

MaximumViewableListRows

Maximum number of items to display at one time in a combo box
list. A scroll bar appears if more items than this are in the list.

MinimumDialogWidth

Minimum dialog window width, in pixels. Any dialog displayed is this
width, or larger if the contents dictate.

MinimumWindowHeight

Minimum frame window height, in pixels. Examples of frame
windows include the data table editors and table type editor. The
frame window width may not be resized below this value.

MinimumWindowWidth

Minimum frame window width, in pixels. Examples of frame
windows include the data table editors and table type editor. The
frame window height may not be resized below this value.

NumberOfRememberedSearches Maximum number of search strings to store. These are used for
auto-completing input in the search dialogs’ search text field. Once
the maximum number of search strings is reached further searches
cause the oldest search string to be removed so that the latest one
can be added.
293

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

NumberOfRememberedServers

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 294 of 314

Maximum number of server names to store. These are used for
auto-completing input in the Database Server dialog’s Host field.
Once the maximum number of server names is reached further
entries cause the oldest name to be removed so that the latest one
can be added.

Spacing
ButtonGap

Number of pixels between each button in a dialog box.

ButtonPad

Minimum number of pixels around the perimeter of a dialog box’s
button grouping.

CellHorizontalPadding

Number of pixels added to either side of the text in a table cell.

CellVerticalPadding

Number of pixels added to above and below the text in a table cell.

DialogBorderPadding

Number of pixels between the dialog box contents and the dialog's
frame.

DialogIconPadding

Number of pixels between the icon and text message in a message
dialog box.

HeaderHorizontalPadding

Number of pixels added to the width of a table’s column header text.
The padding is split equally between each side of the header text.
This padding provides room for the column sort arrow.

HeaderVerticalPadding

Number of pixels added to the height of a table’s column header
text. The padding is split equally between the top and bottom of the
header text.

InputFieldPadding

Number of pixels added to the each side of the text in an input field.

LabelHorizontalSpacing

Defines the horizontal spacing between a text label and an adjacent
component, in pixels.

LabelVerticalSpacing

Defines the vertical spacing between a text label and an adjacent
component, in pixels.

Other
EDSSchemaLocationURL

The URL for the EDS schema location. This value is used to set the
JAXB_SCHEMA_LOCATION property in the marshalled XML output
when exporting project data in EDS format.

EnvironmentVariableOverride

Environment variable override key/value pairs in the format
>. The override values are used to expand variables
in the script paths when executing script associations via the script
manager or script execution dialogs; these overrides are not used
when executing via the command line execute command.

XTCESchemaLocationURL

The URL for the XTCE schema location. This value is used to set the
JAXB_SCHEMA_LOCATION property in the marshalled XML output
when exporting project data in XTCE format.

294

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 295 of 314

Appendix E.3. CCDD class files
Following is a list and description of the CCDD application’s Java class files.
CcddApplicationParameterDialog.java

Dialog for assigning the application scheduling
parameters. The dialog is built on the
CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddApplicationParameterHandler.java

Class that handles retrieval from and storage to the
project database of the application scheduling parameter
values.

CcddApplicationSchedulerDialog.java

Dialog for assignment of applications to time slots. The
dialog is built on the CcddDialogHandler class and
implements the CcddSchedulerDialogInterface class.

CcddApplicationSchedulerInput.java

Class for handling application selection in the application
scheduler dialog. This class implements the
CcddSchedulerInputInterface class.

CcddApplicationSchedulerTableHandler.java Class for handling CFS application scheduler table output.
CcddAssignmentTreeHandler.java

Class that handles the variable assignment tree in the
telemetry scheduler dialog. This class is an extension of
the CcddInformationTreeHandler class.

CcddAssignMessageIDDialog.java

Dialog for automatic assignment of message IDs to data
tables or telemetry messages. The dialog is built on the
CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddBackgroundCommand.java

Class for generically handling execution of code in a
background thread.

CcddButtonPanelHandler.java

Generic utility class for creating and handling button
panels in the dialogs and frames created within the
application.

CcddClassesComponent.java

Collection of common classes used by other CCDD
classes. These classes, in general, override existing Java
component classes or introduce new ones.

CcddClassesDataTable.java

Collection of common classes used by other CCDD
classes. These classes, in general, are used to
manipulate and contain information with respect to the
data tables.

CcddCommandDialog.java

Dialog for the user to view the project’s commands
(including the command’s name, code, table, and
argument names). The dialog is built on the
CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddCommandHandler.java

Class for building a list of project commands (including
the command’s name, code, table, argument names, and
number of arguments). This is used for populating the
the Command reference input type selection item list
and by the script data access methods.
295

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 296 of 314

CcddCommandLineHandler.java

Class for reading and executing the command line
options.

CcddCommonTreeHandler.java

Class containing tree handling methods common to all
other trees used in the application. This class is an
extension of the JTree class.

CcddConstants.java

Class containing constant values used by the other
classes.

CcddCopyTableHandler.java

Class for handling copy table operations.

CcddCSVHandler.java

Class for handling import and export of data tables in
CSV format. This class implements the
CcddImportExportInterface class.

CcddDataTypeEditorDialog.java

Class for handling data type editing. The dialog is built
on the CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddDataTypeHandler.java

Class for handling data type operations.

CcddDbCommandHandler.java

Class for handling database commands.

CcddDbControlHandler.java

Class containing the methods for connecting to, creating,
copying, renaming, and deleting project databases.

CcddDbManagerDialog.java

Dialog for the user to set the connection parameters to
the database, and for creating, copying, renaming, and
deleting databases. The dialog is built on the
CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddDbTableCommandHandler.java

Class containing the methods for creating, altering,
copying, renaming, and deleting the database tables.

CcddDbVerificationHandler.java

Class that executes the database information consistency
check.

CcddDialogHandler.java

Generic utility class for creating and handling all of the
dialogs created within the application.

CcddDuplicateMsgIDDialog.java

Dialog displaying a table containing duplicate message
IDs and their owners. The dialog is built on the
CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddEDSHandler.java

Class for handling import and export of data tables in
EDS XML format. This class implements the
CcddImportExportInterface class.

CcddEventLogDialog.java

Class for displaying and updating the session and stored
event logs. The dialog is built on the CcddFrameHandler
class.

CcddFieldEditorDialog.java

Class for handling data field operations. The dialog is
built on the CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddFieldHandler.java

Class for handling the data field editor.

296

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 297 of 314

CcddFieldTableEditorDialog.java

Dialog for inspecting and assigning values to data input
fields. The dialog is built on the CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddFileIOHandler.java

Class containing file input and output methods (project
database backup and restore, table import and export,
script storage and retrieval).

CcddFrameHandler.java

Generic utility class for creating and handling all of the
frame windows created within the application.

CcddGroupHandler.java

Class for handling table grouping operations.

CcddGroupManagerDialog.java

Dialog for the user to create, alter, or delete table
groups. The dialog is built on the CcddDialogHandler
class.

CcddGroupTreeHandler.java

Class containing the methods for creating and
manipulating a table group tree. This class is an
extension of the CcddInformationTreeHandler class.

CcddImportExportInterface.java

Class that defines the interface for data table import and
export classes.

CcddImportSupportHandler.java

Class containing support methods for classes based on
the CcddImportExportInterface class. The support
methods handle validation and addition of table types
and data fields, and for obtaining the user’s response to
a non-fatal error condition. Classes utilizing these
support methods must extend this class.

CcddInformationTreeHandler.java

Generic utility class for manipulating information trees.
This class is an extension of the
CcddCommonTreeHandler class.

CcddInputFieldPanelHandler.java

Class for creating the table editor panel in which a table,
description, and data fields are displayed.

CcddJSONHandler.java

Class for handling import and export of data tables in
JSON format. This class implements the
CcddImportExportInterface class.

CcddJTableHandler.java

Generic utility class for creating and handling all of the
tables created within the application, including the data,
type, and field tables. This class is an extension of the
JTable class.

CcddKeyboardHandler.java

Class for controlling keyboard input and implementing
special key sequence actions.

CcddLinkHandler.java

Class containing methods to manipulate variable
linkages.

CcddLinkManagerDialog.java

Dialog for the user to create, modify, or delete variable
links, and to assign variables to the links. The dialog is
built on the CcddDialogHandler class.
297

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 298 of 314

CcddLinkManagerHandler.java

Class for handling interactions with the variable links for
a specific data stream.

CcddLinkTreeHandler.java

Class containing the methods for creating and
manipulating a variable link tree. This class is an
extension of the CcddInformationTreeHandler class.

CcddMacroEditorDialog.java

Dialog for the user to create, modify, or delete macros
and macro values. The dialog is built on the
CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddMacroHandler.java

Class for handling macro operations.

CcddMain.java

The CCDD main application class handles flow and
execution of the menu bar items.

CcddMathExpressionHandler.java

Class for evaluating simple mathematical expressions.

CcddMessageIDDialog.java

Dialog displaying all message ID names and associated
message ID values. The dialog is built on the
CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddMessageIDHandler.java

Class used to determined which message IDs are
currently used in tables, data fields, and telemetry
messages, and to determine if any references are
duplicated.

CcddPaddingAlignmentDialog.java

Dialog displaying a slider control that allows selection of
the variable padding byte alignment value. The dialog is
built on the CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddPaddingVariableHandler.java

Class that adds/updates or removes the padding
variables.

CcddPatchHandler.java

Class used to contain code to update the project
database when a schema change is made. The code is
written to execute only if the database has not already
been updated.

CcddPreferencesDialog.java

Class that creates and manages the Preferences dialog
used for altering the application’s look & feel, fonts,
colors, size values, and spacing values. The dialog is built
on the CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddProjectFieldDialog.java

Class that creates and manages project-level data fields.
The dialog is built on the CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddRateParameterDialog.java

Dialog for assigning the telemetry sample rate
parameters. The dialog is built on the
CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddRateParameterHandler.java

Class that handles retrieval from and storage to the
project database of the rate parameter values, and
calculation of the sample rates based on the rate
parameters.
298

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 299 of 314

CcddReservedMsgIDEditorDialog.java

Dialog for the user to create, modify, or delete reserved
message ID and ID ranges and descriptions. The dialog is
built on the CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddReservedMsgIDHandler.java

Class for handling reserved message ID operations.

CcddSchedulerDbIOHandler.java

Class for handling project database input and output
operations for the applications and telemetry schedulers.

CcddSchedulerDialogInterface.java

Class that defines the interface for the application and
telemetry scheduler dialog classes.

CcddSchedulerEditorHandler.java

Class that handles the Scheduler table within the
application (for time slots) and telemetry (for messages)
scheduler dialogs.

CcddSchedulerHandler.java

Class that manages the application and telemetry
scheduler dialogs, including transfer of information
between the trees and lists.

CcddSchedulerInputInterface.java

Class that defines the interface for application and
telemetry scheduler input.

CcddScriptDataAccessHandler.java

Class containing the methods whereby scripts can access
the project database information.

CcddScriptDataAccessHandlerStatic.java

Class containing the static method references to the
methods in the CcddScriptDataAccessHandler class.

CcddScriptExecutiveDialog.java

Dialog for the user to select script associations to
execute. The dialog is built on the CcddDialogHandler
class.

CcddScriptHandler.java

Class that handles obtaining the table data and executing
the associated script.

CcddScriptManagerDialog.java

Dialog for the user to associate scripts and data tables.
The dialog is built on the CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddScriptStorageDialog.java

Dialog for the user to select script files to store to or
retrieve from the database. The dialog is built on the
CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddSearchDialog.java

Dialog for the user to perform text string searches of the
project database data tables and stored scripts. The
dialog is built on the CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddSearchHandler.java

Class that handles event log, table, and script searches.

CcddServerPropertyDialog.java

Dialog for changing the user name and password, and
the PostgreSQL server host and port. The dialog is built
on the CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddTableEditorDialog.java

Class for handling data table editing; displays instances
of CcddTableEditorHandler. The dialog is built on the
CcddEditorPanelHandler class.
299

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 300 of 314

CcddTableEditorHandler.java

Class that handles editing of a specific data table. This
class is an extension of the CcddInputFieldPanelHandler
class.

CcddTableManagerDialog.java

Dialog for the user create, edit, copy, rename, and delete
data tables. The dialog is built on the CcddDialogHandler
class.

CcddTableTreeHandler.java

Class containing the methods for creating and
manipulating a data table tree. This class is an extension
of the CcddCommonTreeHandler class.

CcddTableTypeEditorDialog.java

Class for handling table type editing; displays instances
of CcddTableTypeEditorHandler. The dialog is built on
the CcddEditorPanelHandler class.

CcddTableTypeEditorHandler.java

Class that handles the commands associated with a
specific table type editor. This class is an extension of
the CcddInputFieldPanelHandler class.

CcddTableTypeHandler.java

Class for handling interactions with table types.

CcddTableTypeManagerDialog.java

Dialog for the user to create, edit, copy, rename, and
delete table types. The dialog is built on the
CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddTelemetrySchedulerDialog.java

Dialog for assignment of variables to telemetry
messages. The dialog is built on the CcddDialogHandler
class and implements the CcddSchedulerDialogInterface
class.

CcddTelemetrySchedulerInput.java

Class for handling variable selection in the telemetry
scheduler dialog. This class implements the
CcddSchedulerInputInterface class.

CcddUndoHandler.java

Class that manages GUI component undo and redo edit
operations.

CcddUndoManager.java

Class that handles undo and redo of edit operations and
the edit stack.

CcddUtilities.java

Class containing common utility methods used by other
CCDD classes.

CcddVariableDialog.java

Dialog for the user to view the project’s variables
(including the each variable’s full path), and to display
the variables and paths using user-specified separator
characters for the data type and variable names, and
each variable data type/name pair. The dialog is built on
the CcddDialogHandler class.

CcddVariableHandler.java

Class for building a list of project variables and
converting the variable paths to unique path names, and
for calculating the variable offsets. This is used for

300

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 301 of 314

populating the the Variable reference input type
selection item list and by the script data access methods.
CcddWebDataAccessHandler.java

Class that accepts web access commands and provides
JSON formatted output of the requested project data.

CcddWebServer.java

Class that handles set up and management of the
embedded Jetty web server.

CcddXTCEHandler.java

Class for handling import and export of data tables in
XTCE XML format. This class implements the
CcddImportExportInterface class.

Images.java

Dummy class required for the images folder contents to
be accessible.

Appendix E.4. PostgreSQL tables
Data tables created by the user have the columns defined in the table’s type definition. In addition,
each data table has two initial columns that do not appear in the data table when it is edited within the
application. These two columns represent the primary key (column name _key_) and the row index
(column name _index_). The primary key column contains a unique, positive, sequential integer value
automatically assigned by the database to each row. This value is used by the application to select
specific rows in the table for modification and deletion. The row index column contains a unique,
positive, sequential integer value assigned by the CCDD application. The database does not guarantee a
particular order to the rows of data stored for a table; i.e., when the table’s data is retrieved the row
order may not be the same as the order displayed in the table editor when the data was stored. To
overcome this, when a data table is loaded from the database its row index values are used to restore
the row order to that specified by the user using the table editor.
In addition to the tables created by the user for containing the project’s data, CCDD uses a number of
internal tables for keeping track of certain information. These tables are denoted by the prefix ‘__’ (two
underscores) and do not show up in the table trees. The tables, with their descriptions and formats, are
described below:
Table name: __app_scheduler
Description: Contains the information produced by the application scheduler
Columns:

Comment:

time_slot

Time slot to which the application belongs in the format , where # is the time slot index

application_info

Application information for the specified time slot. The
information is composed of the application name, rate (in Hertz),
maximum allotted run time (in seconds), priority, application
wake-up ID (in hexadecimal), application wake-up name,
application housekeeping send rate, housekeeping application
wake-up name, housekeeping application wake-up ID (in
hexadecimal), and scheduler group, separated by commas

Application parameter values: maximum number of slots per message, maximum
messages per second, maximum messages per cycle, maximum number of commands

301

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 302 of 314

Table name: __associations
Description: Contains the script file and data table associations
Columns:

Comment:

description

Description of the association; may be blank

script_file

Script file path and file name

member_tables

This column contains the name(s) of the table(s) associated with
the script file name. If multiple tables are associated then each is
separated by a semi-colon and line feed character. The table
names are in the format ,.[,.[,level 3, etc.]]. Child tables of an associated table are
automatically included when loading the data for script execution

Unused

Table name: __data_types
Description: Contains the information for the data type definitions. The table is automatically
populated by default data types, which can be altered or deleted
Columns:

Comment:

user_name

User-defined data type name

c_name

C-language data type name

size

Data type size in bytes

base_type

Base data type (signed integer, unsigned integer, floating point,
character, or other)

index

OID value; used to uniquely identify a row in the table

Unused

302

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 303 of 314

Table name: __fields
Description: Contains the definitions and values for all of the project’s data fields. Each row in the
table describes a single data field. The order that the data fields appear in this table is
the same as the order of the fields when displayed with a data table, group, or project
Columns:

Comment:

owner_name

Path (applicable for structure table instances) and name of the
table to which this data field belongs. This column contains the
parent and path to the table belonging to the group, separated by
commas. This is in the format ,.[,.[,level 3, etc.]]. Default data fields (i.e., those
applied to each table of a given table type when created) are
denoted by having an owner name in the format Type:. Group data fields (i.e., those assigned to a group of data
tables) are denoted by having an owner name in the format
Group:. Project data fields (i.e., those assigned at
the project level) are denoted by having an owner name Project:.

field_name

Field name. This is the text displayed beside the input text field

field_description

Description of the field. The description is used as the tool tip text
when the mouse pointer hovers over the data field

field_size

Width of the input text field in characters. Due to character width
variations when using variable-spaced fonts the actual character
width can be larger than this value

field_type

Determines the allowable values that can be input into the data
field. The field types are Text, Integer, Positive integer, Nonnegative integer, Float, Hexadecimal, Break, and Separator

field_required

true if the data field requires a value; false if the field may be left
empty. The application does not enforce entering a value into a
required field, but simply uses this designation to highlight the
fields that have this flag set

field_applicability

Determines, when creating tables of this type, if the data field is
added: ‘All tables’ if the data field should be added when creating
any table of this type; ‘Parents only’ if the field is only added to
parent tables; ‘Children only’ if the field is only added to child
tables (only applicable for structure table types)

field_value

Data entered by the user into the data field’s text input field.
Leading and trailing white space characters are automatically
stripped off by the application before storing the value

Unused

303

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 304 of 314

Table name: __groups
Description: Contains the information for the user-defined data table groups
Columns:

Comment:

group_name

Group name

member_tables

The first row for a group contains the group’s description, prefixed
by a number and a comma. The number is non-zero if the group
represents a CFS application. The description is used as the tool
tip text when the mouse pointer hovers over the group name in a
table tree. For subsequent rows with the same group name this
column contains the parent and path to the table belonging to the
group, separated by commas. This is in the format ,.[,.[,level 3, etc.]]

Unused

Table name: __links
Description: Contains the information for the user-defined variable linkages
Columns:

rate_name

Name of the rate column from which the rate for the variables in
this link are taken

link_name

Link name

member_variables The first row for a link contains the link’s rate, in samples per
second, and description, separated by a comma. The description is
used as the tool tip text when the mouse pointer hovers over the
link name in the link tree. For subsequent rows with the same link
name this column contains the parent, table path, and variable
belonging to the link, separated by commas. This is in the format
,.[,.[,level 3, etc.]],.
Comment:

Unused

Table name: __macros
Description: Contains the information for the macro definitions
Columns:

Comment:

macro_name

Macro name

value

Macro value

Unused

304

Johnson Space Center
Engineering Directorate

Core Flight System Command and Data Dictionary Utility User’s Guide
Doc. No. JSC-37494
Date: August 2018

Version 1.4.14
Page 305 of 314

Table name: __orders
Description: Contains the information for the table column orders, based on user
Columns:

user_name

User name for which this column ordering applies

table_path

Path to a table in the format:
,.[,.[,level 3, etc.]]
root table name is the name of the top-level table. For a nonstructure table or a top-level structure table this is the entire table
path. For a structure table that is a child of another table the path
contains the top-level structure table (root table name) followed
by structure name and variable name pairs leading to the target
child table, separated by commas

column_order

Comment:

Contains the column numbers, as defined in the __types table,
separated by colons (:), in the order in which the columns are
displayed when the user, user_name, is viewing the table specified
by table_path

Unused

Table name: __reserved_msg_ids
Description: Contains the reserved message IDs and ID ranges with their descriptions. By default the
range 0x0800 - 0x08FF is reserved for cFE telemetry IDs and the range 0x1800 - 0x18FF
is reserved for cFE command IDs (these default values may be altered or deleted)
Columns:

Comment:

msg_id

Message ID or ID range in hexadecimal format. ID range values are
separated by a hyphen (-)

description

User-defined text describing the reserved ID or ID range

Unused

Table name: __script_





 




Navigation menu